JP2016067826A - Game system and game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game system and a game machine where a customization function can be fully enjoyed.SOLUTION: A pachinko machine 10 includes display control means that variably displays identification information in variable display means to be stopped and displayed according to a prescribed lottery result. The display control means can lead out a continuous display object capable of continuously being displayed in a plurality of variable displays in the variation display means. With respect to the continuous display object, customization items that can be customized are set in a plurality of numbers, and a plurality of patterns are provided for customization patterns for each customization item. In an uncompleted object, corresponding to the customization items that are not yet customized, a part of a completed object where all of the plurality of customization items are customized is configured to become a mode being masked in a mode different from a portion that is already being customized.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 1

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine and a gaming system including the gaming machine.

  One type of gaming machine is a pachinko machine. In the pachinko machine, when the game ball launched by the launching means enters the starting entrance means provided on the game board, a lottery is performed as to whether or not a hit state is generated, and the variable display means Fluctuation display for teaching the result is performed (for example, refer to Patent Document 1).

  In addition, the gaming machine is configured such that customization of a plurality of items can be executed for a continuous display object that can be continuously displayed in a plurality of variable displays on the variable display means, and a plurality of patterns are prepared for customization of each item There is something. In this way, by using the continuous display object whose aspect changes in various ways for the production and the like, it is possible to diversify the production and the like and to suppress the monotonous feeling in the game.

JP 2006-271480 A

  However, when a plurality of customization items are prepared for the continuous display object, it may be relatively difficult to grasp and predict the final form of the continuous display object. In this case, there is concern that it will be difficult to understand how far the customization of the continuous display object can be done, and even though the customization function has been enhanced, before the player understands and fully enjoys the customization function, There is a possibility of causing a situation that the gaming machine is not played.

  Such a problem is not limited to pachinko machines, but also applies to other gaming machines such as slot machines.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming system and a gaming machine that can fully enjoy the customization function.

The gaming system of claim 1 comprises:
In a gaming system comprising a gaming machine and a server capable of acquiring information related to the player's game via a portable communication terminal carried by the player,
The gaming machine is
Operation means that can be operated by the player;
Player specifying information storage means for storing player information input by the player operating the operating means;
Game information storage means capable of accumulating and storing game information which is information relating to a lottery performed in the game;
Information output means capable of outputting the game information stored and stored in the game information storage means in a manner capable of being acquired by a mobile communication terminal;
The player information is stored in the player identification information storage means, so that processing corresponding to the player information is performed, and game information related to the game is stored and stored in the game information storage means. ,
The mobile communication terminal is
Information acquisition means capable of acquiring the game information output from the information output means;
When the game information is acquired by the information acquisition means, portable side transmission means for transmitting the game information and portable identification information capable of identifying the portable communication terminal to the server;
Mobile-side receiving means for receiving information transmitted from the server;
Portable output means capable of outputting information received by the portable side receiving means,
The server
Server side receiving means for receiving the game information transmitted from the portable side transmitting means and the portable identification information;
Server-side game information storage means for storing and storing the game information in association with the mobile identification information;
An accumulation storage that accumulates and stores the game information in the server-side game information storage means corresponding to the mobile identification information when the game information and the mobile identification information are received by the server-side receiving means. Control means;
Server-side transmission means for transmitting information related to the game information stored in the server-side game information storage means to the mobile communication terminal;
The gaming machine is
A main control means for performing a lottery on whether or not to generate a special gaming state advantageous to the player based on a predetermined opportunity, and generating the special gaming state based on a result of the lottery;
Variable display means capable of variably displaying the identification information;
The variable display means includes display control means for variably displaying the identification information and, after a predetermined time, displaying the identification information based on the lottery result.
The display control means is configured to be capable of deriving a continuous display object that can be continuously displayed in the variable display of the variable display means a plurality of times.
Regarding the continuous display object,
Multiple customization items that can be customized are set.
A plurality of patterns are prepared for the customization pattern of each customization item,
The continuous display object includes a completed object in which all of the plurality of customization items are customized, and an incomplete object in which the customization items that have not yet been customized exist up to the completed object,
The unfinished object is configured so that a part of the completed object is masked in a manner different from a part that has already been customized, corresponding to the customization item that has not yet been customized,
When the game information is output by the information output means, information on the continuous display object is also output.

  According to the first aspect, the customization function can be fully enjoyed.

It is a front view which shows the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a perspective view which shows a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view which shows the state which open | released the inner frame and the front frame set. It is a front view which shows structures, such as an inner frame and a game board. It is a rear view which shows the structure of a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view which shows the state which open | released the inner frame, the back pack unit, etc. FIG. It is a block diagram which shows the main electrical structures of a pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing which shows the outline | summary of the various counters used for game control. It is a flowchart which shows the main process by the main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the normal process by the main controller. It is a flowchart which shows a timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows a NMI interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows a start winning process. It is a flowchart which shows a success / failure determination process. It is a flowchart which shows a 1st type determination process. It is a flowchart which shows a 2nd classification determination process. It is a flowchart which shows reach determination processing. It is a flowchart which shows a through gate passage process. It is a flowchart which shows a special display control process. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation | variation display setting process. It is a flowchart which shows discrimination | determination information setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows a 1st variable winning apparatus control process. It is a flowchart which shows an end setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a normal display control process. It is a flowchart which shows a common figure change setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a common figure discrimination | determination information setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a start winning apparatus control process. It is a flowchart which shows a reception interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows the main process of the payout control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows a timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows a command determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the normal process of a sub control apparatus. It is explanatory drawing which shows the outline | summary of the various counters used for the determination of a decoration design, etc. It is a flowchart which shows the update process of a counter. It is a flowchart which shows holding information storage processing. It is a flowchart which shows a pending | holding process. It is a flowchart which shows a win display process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the outline of a game system. It is a flowchart which shows a menu display process. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows a menu screen, (b) is explanatory drawing which shows a password input screen, (c) is explanatory drawing which shows a code issue screen. It is a flowchart which shows a password input process. It is a flowchart which shows a code issue process. It is a flowchart which shows an access corresponding process. It is a flowchart which shows a password issuing process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display mode in a decoration symbol display apparatus. It is explanatory drawing which shows the incomplete vehicle displayed in the tuning area of a decoration symbol display apparatus. It is explanatory drawing which shows the hold icon (item hold icon) displayed in the hold display area of a decoration symbol display apparatus. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display mode (part selection screen) in a decoration symbol display apparatus. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display mode in a decoration symbol display apparatus. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display mode (completed vehicle selection screen) in a decoration symbol display apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows a pending | holding icon setting process. It is explanatory drawing of a customization winning value storage table. It is a flowchart which shows the determination process of a customization pattern. It is explanatory drawing of a corresponding | compatible pattern storage table. It is a flowchart which shows a customization variation process. It is a flowchart which shows parts selection processing. It is a flowchart which shows a reflection process. It is a flowchart which shows a completed vehicle selection process. It is a flowchart which shows a vehicle production | presentation setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a normal vehicle production process. It is a flowchart which shows a normal vehicle production process. It is explanatory drawing of a vehicle production table. It is explanatory drawing of a vehicle type corresponding | compatible table. It is a flowchart which shows a vehicle production execution process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display mode of the decoration symbol display apparatus in another embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display mode of the decoration symbol display apparatus in another embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display mode of the decoration symbol display apparatus in another embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display mode of the decoration symbol display apparatus in another embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display mode of the decoration symbol display apparatus in another embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display mode of the decoration symbol display apparatus in another embodiment.

  Hereinafter, an embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. As shown in FIG. 3 and the like, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 as a fixed frame that constitutes an outline of the pachinko machine 10, and an inner frame as a game board mounting frame is provided on one side of the outer frame 11. The frame 12 is supported so that it can be opened and closed. For the sake of convenience, FIG. 3 does not show game members (nails, accessories, etc.) disposed on the surface of the game board 30, a glass unit 137 attached to the front frame set 14 as a front frame, and the like.

  As shown in FIG. 6 and the like, the outer frame 11 has an upper side frame constituting portion 11a and a lower side frame constituting portion 11b made of a wooden plate material, and the left side frame constituting portion 11c and the right side frame constituting portion 11d are made of aluminum alloy. Each of the frame components 11a to 11d is assembled in a rectangular frame shape as a whole by a detachable fastener such as a screw.

  An upper hinge 81 and a lower hinge 82 are attached to the upper and lower ends of the left side frame constituting portion 11c (see FIG. 1). The upper and lower hinges 81 and 82 support the upper and lower portions of the inner frame 12 so that the inner frame 12 can be rotated. As a result, the inner frame 12 can be opened and closed. And the inner frame 12 etc. are accommodated in the space part formed inside the outer frame 11.

  The right side frame constituting portion 11d is formed with an extending wall portion 83 that protrudes from the vicinity of the rear end portion in the width direction toward the inside of the outer frame 11. The extending wall 83 covers the entire upper and lower sections corresponding to the locking device 600 (see FIG. 6) provided on the back side of the right side of the inner frame 12 from the back side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 5). In addition, as shown in FIG. 3, a pair of upper and lower receiving portions 84 and 85 to which the locking member of the locking device 600 is locked are provided on the front surface side of the extending wall portion 83. Further, a pressing portion 86 that abuts on an inner frame opening detection switch 92 described later is provided on the lower receiving portion 85 so as to protrude toward the inner side of the outer frame 11.

  Furthermore, a resin curtain decoration 87 is attached to the lower frame constituting portion 11b. A rib 88 projecting upward is integrally formed at the back of the upper surface of the curtain decoration 87. This makes it difficult to form a gap with the inner frame 12.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the opening / closing axis of the inner frame 12 is set up and down on the left side when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10, so that the inner frame 12 can be opened forward with the opening / closing axis serving as an axis. It has become. The inner frame 12 is mainly composed of a resin base 38 whose outer shape is rectangular, and a substantially elliptical window hole 39 is formed at the center of the resin base 38.

  A front frame set 14 is attached to the front side of the inner frame 12 so that it can be opened and closed. As with the inner frame 12, the front frame set 14 can be opened forward with an opening / closing axis set along the top and bottom on the left side when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, you may comprise the front frame set 14 so that it may be supported by the outer frame 11 so that opening is possible directly rather than via the inner frame 12.

  The front frame set 14 has a rectangular outer shape like the inner frame 12, and covers almost the entire front side of the inner frame 12 in the closed state. A substantially elliptical window 101 is formed at the center of the front frame set 14. Thereby, the game board 30 (game area) attached to the rear surface of the inner frame 12 can be visually recognized from the outside through the window portion 101 of the front frame set 14 and the window hole 39 of the inner frame 12. The detailed configuration of the game board 30 will be described later.

  As shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, a front plate of the front frame set 14 is provided with a lower plate 15 as a ball receiving tray at the center of the lower portion, and the game balls discharged from the discharge port 16 are placed in the lower plate 15. It can be stored inside. In addition, on the front side of the lower plate 15, a ball removal lever 25 for discharging the game ball from the lower plate 15 is provided.

  A game ball launching handle (hereinafter referred to as “handle 18”) is provided on the right side of the lower plate 15 so as to protrude to the front side. The handle 18 is provided with a touch sensor (not shown) and an operation amount detection means (variable resistor) (not shown) for detecting the operation amount of the operation unit of the handle 18. When the handle 18 is rotated clockwise, a game ball is launched by a launching device 60 serving as launching means described later with a strength corresponding to the amount of pivoting operation. Further, the handle 18 is provided with a firing prohibiting button 18 a that can be pressed with the thumb of the right hand that holds the handle 18. In the state where the firing prohibition button 18a is pressed, even if the handle 18 is held, the launching device 60 is prohibited from launching the game ball. Therefore, the rotation of the handle 18 can be performed while prohibiting the launch of the game ball, or the launch of the game ball can be temporarily stopped while the handle 18 is held.

  An upper plate 19 is provided above the lower plate 15. The upper plate 19 is a ball tray that temporarily stores the game balls and guides them toward a launching device 60 described later while aligning them in a row. When the upper plate 19 is full of game balls, the game balls to be paid out are guided to the lower plate 15 via the lower plate communication passage 71 and the discharge port 16 described later.

  A ball lending button 121 and a return button 122 are provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 19. Thereby, in the game hall or the like, when the ball lending button 121 is operated with a bill or a card inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, depending on the operation Rental balls are supplied to the upper plate 19. On the other hand, the return button 122 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted into the card unit. However, the ball lending button 121 and the return button 122 are not necessary for a pachinko machine in which game balls are directly lending to the upper plate 19 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, so-called cash machine.

  Further, a ball removal button 123 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 19. When the ball removal button 123 is pressed, a communication hole (not shown) provided on the downstream side of the ball guide path of the upper plate 19 and communicating with the lower plate 15 is opened and stored in the upper plate 19. The game ball is guided (dropped) to the lower plate 15. That is, the player can move the game ball on the upper plate 19 to the lower plate 15 at any time by operating the ball removal button 123.

  In addition, an effect button 125 and a cross button 126 with built-in LEDs are provided on the top plate 19. By pressing the effect button 125 and the cross button 126, a decorative symbol display device 42 to be described later, etc. The corresponding production is performed or the production content is changed.

  In addition, light emitting means such as various lamps are provided around the front surface of the front frame set 14. These light emitting means play a role of enhancing the effect of the game while the light emission mode is changed and controlled according to a change in the gaming state. For example, at the periphery of the window portion 101, an annular illumination portion 102 incorporating a light emitting means such as an LED is provided. In addition, error display lamps 104 that are turned on when a predetermined error occurs are provided on both sides of the annular illumination portion 102. In addition, a large number of small through holes are formed in the annular illumination portion 102 above the error display lamps 104 corresponding to the speakers SP (see FIG. 3) provided on the back surface of the front frame set 14. .

  A glass unit 137 is attached to the back side of the front frame set 14. The glass unit 137 is not attached to a pair of conventional front and rear rectangular glass plates separately in front and rear pairs, but is formed into a round shape as a whole and attached after being assembled.

  Next, the inner frame 12 will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, the game board 30 is mounted on the inner frame 12 in a state where the game board 30 is in contact with the back side of the resin base 38 on the rear side of the window hole 39. Accordingly, the substantially central portion of the front surface of the game board 30 is exposed to the front surface side of the inner frame 12 through the window hole 39.

  Further, a launching device 60 and a launching rail 61 for guiding a game ball immediately after being launched by the launching device 60 are attached to the lower part of the front surface of the inner frame 12 (resin base 38), that is, a position below the window hole 39. Yes. In the present embodiment, a solenoid-type firing device is employed as the firing device 60. Further, above the launching device 60, a ball feeding device that guides the game balls guided from the upper plate 19 one by one to the firing position of the launching device 60 by driving a built-in driving means (for example, a solenoid). 63 is provided.

  Next, the configuration of the game board 30 (game area) will be described with reference to FIG. The game board 30 includes a general winning opening 31, a first variable winning device 32a, a second variable winning device 32b, a first starting winning device 33a, a second starting winning device 33b, a through gate 34, a variable display device unit 35, and a variable. A first special display device 43L and a second special display device 43R serving as display means, a variation specifying lamp 40, and the like are provided. As is well known, when a game ball enters (wins) various winning ports such as the general winning port 31, the variable winning devices 32a and 32b, and the starting winning devices 33a and 33b, it is detected by various detection switches, and the upper plate 19 or lower A predetermined number of prize balls are paid out to the plate 15.

  In the present embodiment, 10 balls are entered when the general winning opening 31 is entered, 14 pieces are entered when the first variable winning device 32a is entered, and the second variable winning device 32b is entered. There are 13 balls when there is a ball, 2 balls when there is a ball entering the first start winning device 33a, and 1 game ball when there is a ball entering the second start winning device 33b. Is configured to be paid out. Further, even if the game ball passes through the through gate 34 that does not enter the game ball only by passing through (not discharged to the back side of the game board 30), the game ball is not paid out.

  In addition, the game board 30 is provided with an out port 36 corresponding to the lowermost part of the game area, and a game ball that has not won a prize in various winning ports such as the general winning port 31 is provided with the out port 36. It is discharged out of the game area. In addition, the game board 30 is provided with a large number of nails for appropriately dispersing and adjusting the falling direction of the game balls, and various members such as windmills (servants).

  A variable display device unit 35 is disposed substantially at the center of the game area. The variable display device unit 35 is provided with a center frame 47 so as to surround a decorative symbol display device 42 described later.

  A ball entrance 151 is provided on the left side of the center frame 47, and a game ball that has entered the ball entrance 151 passes through a warp channel 152 formed inside the center frame 47, as a decorative symbol. It is guided on a stage 153 formed below the display device 42. The game ball guided on the stage 153 rolls down on the stage 153 or the like and falls from the stage 153 to the front game area, or extends to the front and rear formed at the center of the stage 153. Or drop into the lead-out groove 154 guided forward.

  A first start winning device 33a is disposed below the variable display device unit 35. The first start winning device 33a protrudes forward from the front surface portion of the game board 30, and a winning opening through which a game ball can always win is opened on the upper side. In particular, the game ball guided to the lead-out groove 154 of the stage 153 is configured to enter the first start winning device 33a with a relatively high probability. Note that the first start winning device 33a of the present embodiment is not provided with an opening / closing member that changes the ease of entering a game ball into the first start winning device 33a.

  A first variable winning device 32a is disposed below the first start winning device 33a. The first variable winning device 32a is normally in a closed state in which a game ball cannot be won, and is in an open state in which the game ball can win in the case of a corresponding type of jackpot state or the like. Although not shown, the first variable prize winning device 32a has a big prize opening leading to the rear of the game board 30, a big prize shutter for opening and closing the big prize opening, and a big prize for operating the big prize shutter. The first variable winning device is provided with a mouth solenoid and a first count switch 223a for detecting a game ball that has entered the grand prize winning opening, and driving and controlling the big winning prize solenoid to open and close the big winning shutter. 32a (large winning opening) is switched between a closed state and an open state.

  Hereinafter, for convenience, a region located on the left side of the variable display device unit 35 in the game region is referred to as a “left side region”, and a region located on the right side of the variable display device unit 35 is referred to as a “right side region”.

  At the lower part of the left side region, a general winning opening 31 is arranged along the peripheral portion (inner rail constituting portion 51) of the game region. The general winning opening 31 protrudes forward from the front surface portion of the game board 30, and a winning opening through which a game ball can always win is opened on the upper side.

  A through gate 34 is disposed in the right side region. The through gate 34 is configured such that game balls flowing down the game area can pass one by one. As will be described in detail later, the through gate 34 includes a through gate switch 225 that can detect a game ball passing through the through gate 34.

  Further, a second start winning device 33b is disposed downstream of the through gate 34 in the right side region. The second start winning device 33b is provided with a pair of blade members 37 that can be rotationally displaced adjacent to the left and right sides of the winning opening (start winning port) of the second start winning device 33b in which a game ball can enter. Yes.

  In addition, when a game ball is detected by the through gate switch 225, a ball support support lottery is performed as to whether or not the second start winning device 33b is to be opened, and the normal symbol display device 41 receives the game ball. A variation display for teaching the result of the ball support lottery is performed. If the winning support lottery is won, the second start winning device 33b is opened for a specified time after the end of the variation display.

  In the present embodiment, the game nail is disposed immediately above the start winning opening of the second start winning device 33b, and when the blade member 37 is in the closed posture extending vertically, the game There is no room for the game ball to pass between the nail and the blade member 37, and the second start winning device 33b is in a closed state in which the game ball cannot enter the start winning port. On the other hand, when the blade member 37 is changed to an open posture that opens outward, the second start winning device 33b is in an open state in which a game ball can enter the start winning port.

  Further, a second variable winning device 32b is disposed downstream of the second start winning device 33b. The second variable winning device 32b is normally in a closed state in which game balls cannot be won, and is in an open state in which game balls can be won in the corresponding type of jackpot state. Although not shown in the drawings, the second variable winning device 32b has a large winning opening that leads to the rear of the game board 30, a large winning shutter that opens and closes the large winning opening, and a large winning for operating the large winning shutter. The second variable winning device is provided with a mouth solenoid and a second count switch 223b that detects a game ball that has entered the grand prize opening, and controls the driving of the big prize opening solenoid to open and close the big prize shutter. 32b (large winning opening) is switched between a closed state and an open state.

  The first prize shutter of the first and second variable prize winning devices 32a and 32b of the present embodiment is pivotally supported so that the lower edge portion of the big prize shutter is rotatable along the lower edge portion of the big prize opening. In the closed state of the first and second variable winning devices 32a and 32b, the big winning shutter extends vertically and closes the big winning opening, so that the game ball can pass in front of the big winning shutter. On the other hand, in the open state of the first and second variable winning devices 32a and 32b, the big winning shutter rotates forward and extends forward and backward (the upper surface is inclined slightly downward toward the rear), The game ball that has flowed forward is received by the back (upper surface) of the big prize shutter and guided to the big prize opening.

  Further, an assist prize opening 48 through which a game ball moving in the game area can be entered is provided immediately above the second start prize-winning device 33b of the present embodiment. When a game ball is detected by the assist winning detection switch 227 that counts the game balls that have entered the assist winning port 48, three game balls are paid out to the upper plate 19 or the lower plate 15.

  As will be described in detail later, the first start winning device 33a and the second starting winning device 33b include a first start winning switch 224a and a second starting winning switch as condition establishment detecting means for detecting a winning game ball, respectively. 224b is provided, and when a game ball is detected by the start winning switches 224a and 224b, whether or not to generate a big hit state or the like is determined, and a special display device 43L, which will be described later, 43R (and the decorative symbol display device 42) is configured to perform variable display. Then, when winning in the winning / losing lottery, a big hit state where the first variable winning device 32a or the second variable winning device 32b is opened is given.

  In the present embodiment, there are a “low probability state” in which the jackpot is won with a predetermined probability in the winning lottery and a “high probability state” in which the jackpot is won with a higher probability than the low probability state in the winning lottery. Furthermore, the blade member 37 of the second start winning device 33b is opened relatively frequently, and the “highly-entered state” in which the game ball can easily enter the second start winning device 33b, and the blade member 37 is almost open. There is a “low pitch state” in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second start winning device 33b. Hereinafter, the low probability state and the low entry state are referred to as “normal mode”, and the low probability state and the high entry state are referred to as “time reduction mode”. A certain state is referred to as a “probability change mode”, and a state that is in a high probability state and a low entry state is referred to as a “latent probability mode”.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the normal mode, the probability variation mode, and the latent probability mode are continued until the big hit state occurs, whereas the time reduction mode is the special display device 43L, even if the big hit state does not occur. When the variable display on the 43R and the decorative symbol display device 42 is performed a predetermined number of times set in advance, the display is terminated and the mode is changed to the normal mode.

  In the probability variation mode and the time reduction mode, the blade member 37 of the second start winning device 33b is released relatively frequently to facilitate entering the ball, while the first starting winning device 33a enters the ball. Since it is not easy, when the player enters the probability change mode or the time reduction mode, the player fires a game ball toward the right side region (so-called “right-handed”). In addition, at the timing of such right-handed strikes, an announcement for prompting a right-handed strike is made on the decorative symbol display device 42 or the like.

  In the present embodiment, when the winning ball is won in the first start winning device 33a (so-called “navel”) and the second start winning device 33b (so-called “electronic tulip”). , Denchu ”), the winning type is changed depending on whether the winning ball is won or not when the game ball enters the ball (the type determination referred to when determining the hit state type) The table is different).

  More specifically, as a jackpot type when winning the jackpot state based on the entry to the first start winning device 33a, the 16-round probability variation jackpot (hereinafter referred to as “16RS”) and the 8-round probability variation jackpot ( Hereinafter referred to as “8RS”), 8-round normal jackpot (hereinafter “8RN”), and 2-round probability variable jackpot (hereinafter referred to as “2RS”). Regarding “16RS”, “8RS”, and “8RN”, the first variable winning device 32a is opened for 30 seconds, or the first variable winning device 32a is opened and then eight pieces are provided in the first variable winning device 32a. It is assumed that a game ball of 1 is entered as one round, and “16RS” is repeated 16 times, and “8RS” and “8RN” are repeated 8 times, and then the jackpot state ends. . On the other hand, regarding “2RS”, the first variable winning device 32a is opened for 0.4 seconds as one round, and is repeated twice, and then the jackpot state ends. In other words, “16RS”, “8RS”, and “8RN” are big hits (so-called “hit with big balls”) in which a large increase in game balls can be expected during the big hit state, but “2RS” This is a big hit that cannot be expected to increase significantly (so-called “no big hit”).

  In addition, “probability change mode” is given after the jackpot state of “16RS” and “8RS”, “latency mode” is given after the jackpot state of “2RS”, and after the jackpot state of “8RN” is finished “Time reduction mode” (in this example, 90 times of variable display) is given. In other words, after the big hit state of “16RS”, “8RS”, and “8RN” ends, the second start winning device 33b is in a high-pitch state in which the player is likely to be in an open state. A ball will be fired. In the present embodiment, in the case of winning or winning lottery based on entering the first start winning device 33a, 5% is “16RS”, 55% is “8RS”, 30% is the percentage. Becomes “8RN” and becomes “2RS” at a rate of 10%.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, there may be a case where “small hit” is won in the winning / notting lottery based on the ball entering the first start winning device 33a. In the winning lottery based on the winning to the first start winning device 33a, when a small hit is made, the first variable winning device 32a is opened for 0.4 seconds as one round, which is repeated twice. From this, the small hit state ends. In other words, the first variable winning device 32a is the same as “2RS” in appearance. However, the game mode does not change before and after the small hit state occurs. In other words, when “2RS” is won in the normal mode, the mode shifts to the latent mode, but the normal mode is continued even if a small win is won. As a result, in the winning lottery based on the winning to the first start winning device 33a, the first variable winning can be achieved without performing the allocation such as winning the two round big hit (two round normal big hit) to which the high probability state is not given. It is possible to avoid a situation in which it is always known that the device 32a has been shifted to the high probability state by being opened twice.

  On the other hand, as the types of jackpots when winning the jackpot state based on the entry to the second start winning device 33b, the 16-round probability variation jackpot, the 8-round probability variation jackpot, and the two-round regular jackpot (hereinafter “2RN”) Say). Note that when the winning lottery based on the entry to the second start winning device 33b is won, the second variable winning device 32b is opened instead of the first variable winning device 32a (in this example, the round end) Although the conditions are the same, the number of payouts (14 and 13 are different) when game balls enter the variable winning devices 32a and 32b, respectively, but for convenience of explanation, the second starting winning device 33b. The same name (“16RS”, “8RS”) is also used for convenience for the type of jackpot in the case of winning in the winning or failing lottery based on the entry to the ball. In addition, in this embodiment, the round end condition in the jackpot state in which the first variable winning device 32a is in the open state and the round end condition in the jackpot state in which the second variable winning device 32b is in the open state are the same. Certain (eight winnings, or one round after 30 seconds) may be different (for example, the upper limit of winnings for gaming balls in the round is eight and nine).

  For “2RS”, the second variable prize-winning device 32b is opened for 0.4 seconds as one round, and is repeated twice, and then the jackpot state ends. That is, regarding “16RS” and “8RS”, although a significant increase in game balls can be expected during the jackpot state, “2RN” is a jackpot where a significant increase in game balls cannot be expected.

  In addition, “time reduction mode” is given after the end of the big hit state of “2RN”. In this example, “2RN” is also divided into three parts, “2RN30” to which a time reduction mode corresponding to 30 fluctuation displays is given, and “2RN60” to which a time reduction mode for 60 fluctuation indications is given. There is “2RN90” to which a time reduction mode for 90 displays is given. In the present embodiment, when winning a lottery in the winning lottery based on the entry to the second start winning device 33b, it becomes “16RS” at a rate of 35%, “8RS” at a rate of 35%, and a rate of 20% Becomes “2RN30” at a rate of 5%, and becomes “2RN90” at a rate of 5%.

  Further, in the present embodiment, there may be a case where a small win is won in the winning / notch lottery based on the ball entering the second start winning device 33b. In the winning lottery based on the winning to the second start winning device 33b, when a small hit is made, the second variable winning device 32b is opened for 0.4 seconds as one round, and this is repeated twice. From this, the small hit state ends. That is, the second variable winning device 32b is the same as “2RN” in appearance. However, the game mode does not change before and after the small hit state occurs. In other words, a high probability state such as probability variation mode basically shifts to a low probability state (time reduction mode, etc.) by winning “2RN”. The mode continues. As a result, the second variable prize-winning device 32b is opened twice shortly without performing the assignment to win the 2-round probability variable big hit “2RS” in the winning / not-winning lottery based on the winning to the second starting prize-winning device 33b. Thus, it is possible to avoid a situation where it is always known that the state has shifted to the low probability state.

  In addition, the first special display device 43L that teaches the result of the winning / losing lottery based on the ball entering the first start winning device 33a and the second that teaches the result of the lottery based on the ball entering the second starting winning device 33b. Each of the two special display devices 43R includes two segment display devices, and is configured to be able to display symbols, characters, numbers, and the like as special symbols. The special display devices 43L and 43R are installed at positions that can be visually recognized by the player (in this example, positions at which the game ball at the lower left of the game area cannot pass).

  Then, when the game ball enters the first start winning device 33a, a special symbol switching display (variation display) is performed on the first special display device 43L, and the game ball is displayed on the second start winning device 33b. The special symbol switching display (fluctuation display) is performed on the second special display device 43R in response to the entry. Note that the display contents of the special display devices 43L and 43R are directly controlled by a main control device 261 as main control means described later.

  Further, after the special symbols are displayed on the first and second special display devices 43L and 43R, the result of the lottery determination, that is, “big hit”, “ It is definitely displayed that “small hit” or “off”. For example, when a game ball enters the first start winning device 33a, a special symbol (a combination of segments to be lit) is switched at a high speed (for example, every 4 msec) on the corresponding first special display device 43L (variable display). When a predetermined time elapses, any special symbol is stopped and displayed (for example, stopped for a few seconds). Then, for example, when “hit” is won in the winning / losing lottery, the corresponding special symbol is displayed when the fluctuation is stopped, and a big win state occurs.

  Further, in the special display devices 43L and 43R, depending on the special symbol to be stopped, the jackpot type, that is, “16RS”, “8RS”, “8RN”, “2RS” or “2RN” is also taught. The Further, there are a plurality of stop modes of the special display devices 43L and 43R that teach one jackpot type instead of one, and any one of them is selected and stopped and displayed. In addition, when either the first special display device 43L or the second special display device 43R is performing variable display or determination display, the other is turned off ("-" is displayed). However, if neither the change display nor the determination display is performed in either case, “-” is displayed in both cases.

  Further, the variable display unit 35 includes a normal symbol display device 41 (a position above the stage 153 of the center frame 47) that changes and displays when the through gate 34 passes, and the first and second special display devices 43L and 43R. There is provided a decorative symbol display device 42 that performs variable display according to the variable display.

  The decorative symbol display device 42 is configured by a liquid crystal display device, and is configured to be capable of variably displaying decorative symbols as identification information. The display contents of the decorative symbol display device 42 are controlled by a sub-control device 262 and a display control device 45 which will be described later. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 42, the sub-control device 262 supports the auxiliary design based on the command from the main control device 261 so as to correspond to the results displayed on the first and second special display devices 43L and 43R. Display content is determined, and display is performed by the display control device 45 based on the determination.

  The decorative symbol display device 42 is provided with, for example, three symbol display areas (left symbol display area 401, middle symbol display area 402, right symbol display area 403; see FIG. 45) of left, middle, and right. In the display areas 401, 402, and 403, a plurality of types of decorative symbols (for example, numeric symbols with numbers 1 to 9) are sequentially displayed (variably displayed), and then in turn for each symbol display region (for example, left The decorative symbols are stopped and displayed (in the order of symbol display region 401 → right symbol display region 403 → middle symbol display region 402). For example, when the occurrence of the big hit state is determined by the main control device 261, a display corresponding to the big hit is made on the first or second special display device 43L, 43R, and the decorative symbol is hit on the decorative symbol display device 42. (For example, the same decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a line in the left symbol display area 401, the middle symbol display area 402, and the right symbol display area 403), and the jackpot state is started. The Of the left symbol display area, the middle symbol display area, and the right symbol display area, the left symbol display area where the decorative symbol is to be stopped first is basically “first symbol display area”. And the right symbol display area where the decorative symbol is to be stopped and displayed second is also referred to as “second symbol display area”, and the decorative symbol is finally stopped and displayed. This is also referred to as “third symbol display area”.

  Further, when the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination corresponding to the jackpot, as the previous step, for example, the same decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 401 and the right symbol display area 403. Become. In this way, the same symbol is stopped and displayed on a predetermined active line in the left symbol display area 401 and the right symbol display area 403, and the state where the variable symbol display is still being performed in the middle symbol display area 402 is the reach state. is there. Of course, the occurrence of a reach condition does not necessarily result in a big hit, but may be missed.

  In the present embodiment, after the reach state occurs, in the middle symbol display area 402, the same decorative symbol as the decorative symbol (reach symbol) stopped and displayed in the left symbol display region 401 and the right symbol display region 403 is on the same effective line. When a stop display is displayed (when a double-eyed stop is displayed), a jackpot state is given. Further, in the case of an odd-numbered slot, “16RS” or “8RS” occurs, and in the case of an even-numbered slot, either “16RS”, “8RS”, or “8RN” occurs.

  The combination of decorative symbols other than the doublet basically teaches “displacement”. However, in this embodiment, even if the jackpot is “2RS” or “2RN”, the decorative symbol is a doublet. Instead of being stopped and displayed in combination, it is stopped and displayed in a combination that is out of reach reach. In addition, “small hit” is also stopped and displayed in a combination that is out of reach reach.

  In the present embodiment, a plurality of effect stages are prepared in the decorative symbol display device 42 as effects that teach or suggest the game mode in which the user is staying. More specifically, either the “probability stage” in which it is determined that the user is staying in the probability change mode, the “normal stage” in which it is determined that the user is staying in the normal mode, or the probability change mode or the time reduction mode. There are a “retraction stage” staying and a “precursor stage” staying in either the normal mode or the latent mode.

  For example, when “2RN” is won in the probability variation stage and the probability variation mode is ended, or when “small hit” is selected, the probability variation stage is terminated and the pullback stage is displayed. If “2RN” is won and the assigned time reduction mode period ends, the pull-back stage ends and the normal stage is displayed. In addition, when the “small hit” is won, there is no change in the game mode before and after the “small hit”, so the probability variation mode remains. Therefore, although it moves to the pull-back stage, it is easy to hit a big hit, and furthermore, when it exceeds the period corresponding to the maximum of the time reduction mode (for 30 times, 60 times, or 90 times of the special symbol variation display), It is possible to grasp that the mode is the probability variation mode.

  In addition, in the case where a big win is won in the winning lottery performed based on the entry to the second start winning device 33b, only “16RS” and “8RS” are the only types of jackpots that display the doublet on the decorative symbol display device 42. Absent. For this reason, basically (except when the variation display corresponding to the first start winning device 33a that has been put on hold is digested), in the probability variation stage and the pull back stage, that is, in the probability variation mode and the time reduction mode. When the jackpot instruction is given with the flat eyes in the decorative symbol display device 42, the assignment of the probability change mode is confirmed, and after the jackpot state, the process proceeds to the probability change stage.

  Further, for example, when “2RS” is won in the normal stage and the mode is changed to the latent probability mode, or when “small hit” is won, the normal stage is ended and the precursor stage is displayed. In the present embodiment, this precursor stage is a period of about 10 to 50 times with a special symbol variation display when “small hit” is a transition opportunity, that is, when staying in the normal mode. After being derived in step 1, it returns to the normal stage. On the other hand, when “2RS” is a transition opportunity, that is, when staying in the latent mode, it is basically a precursor stage until a big hit. A lottery may be performed to determine whether or not to return from the precursor stage to the normal stage, or after returning from the precursor stage to the normal stage, the lottery to determine whether or not to move to the precursor stage again (in the case of the latent mode). It is also possible to increase the probability of returning to the precursor stage or to win only in the latent mode. In addition, when the winning lottery based on the first start winning device 33a is won, “8RN” is won, and even though “8RS” is won, the probability change mode is given until the end of the jackpot state. If the instruction is not taught, the process moves to the pull-back stage after the big hit state.

  As described above, when the correspondence between the special symbol stop mode in the special display devices 43L and 43R and the jackpot type is grasped, if the special symbol variation display stop mode is confirmed, It is possible to determine which type of jackpot is won.

  In addition, when a game ball newly enters the first or second start winning device 33a, 33b during the variation display of the first or second special display device 43L, 43R, the corresponding variation display is It is configured to be performed after the end of the variable display performed at the time. That is, the variable display is on standby (held). The maximum number of the variable display to be held is determined for each model of the pachinko machine, but in this embodiment, the game ball won in the first start winning device 33a and the second start winning device 33b won. Corresponding to the game balls, up to 4 variation displays (total of 8 variation displays) are put on hold.

  Furthermore, the number of holdings of the variation display (hereinafter referred to as “first variation display”) based on the game ball entering the first start winning device 33a is disposed immediately above the first special display device 43L. The number of holdings of the fluctuation display (hereinafter referred to as “second fluctuation display”) that is lit and displayed by the first holding lamp 46a that can emit blue light and is based on the game ball entering the second start winning device 33b is as follows: It is arranged directly above the second special display device 43R and is lit and displayed by a second holding lamp 46b that can emit red light. Four hold lamps 46a and 46b are provided in the same number as the maximum number of hold of each of the first change display and the second change display, and the same number as the number of the first change display or the second change display held. Light. The display contents of the hold lamps 46a and 46b are controlled by a sub-control device 262 as sub-control means described later. When a new game ball wins the start winning devices 33a and 33b during the big hit state, the corresponding change display is also suspended.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the fact that the variable display performed based on the game ball entering the start winning devices 33a and 33b is suspended (the right to execute the variable display is obtained) is a decorative symbol. The display device 42 is also taught. As will be described in detail later, as shown in FIG. 45, a hold icon 411 indicating that the variable display is held is displayed in the lower left part (hold display area 405) of the decorative symbol display device. Up to four hold icons 411 are displayed and are sequentially digested from the left one. That is, regarding the function of “holding the variable display”, as described above, a total of eight variable displays can be held, four corresponding to each of the first start winning device 33a and the second starting winning device 33b. However, the decorative symbol display device 42 displays a maximum of four hold icons 411 corresponding to the ones that are digested first. Note that the hold icon 411 does not have information on whether the hold icon 411 corresponds to the first fluctuation display or the second fluctuation display, and the same mode can be used regardless of which one is supported. There is no.

  Note that the suspended variation display is basically digested in the suspended sequence, but both the first variation display and the second variation display are suspended (hold lamp 46a, When one or more of 46b is lit, the second variation display is preferentially digested. That is, if the second variation display triggered by winning in the second start winning device 33b is not fully digested, the first variation display triggered by entering the first starting winning device 33a is performed. It has no configuration. For example, in the state where one first hold lamp 46a is lit, when a game ball enters the second start winning device 33b and one second hold lamp 46b is lit, the first variation display is delayed. Thus, the second variation display is performed first.

  In the variable display device unit 35 of this embodiment (in this example, the position above the stage 153 of the center frame 47), the variable display performed by the decorative symbol display device 42 is the first start winning device 33a, and A variation specifying lamp 40 is provided which indicates which one of the second starting winning devices 33b corresponds to which ball is entered (whether it is the first variation display or the second variation display). The variation specifying lamp 40 includes an LED whose emission color is blue and an LED whose emission color is red. When the first variation display is performed on the decorative symbol display device 42, the variation specifying lamp 40 emits blue light, and the second variation. It emits red light when it is being displayed.

  The normal symbol display device 41 is configured so that “O” or “X” can be turned on as a normal symbol. When the game ball passes through the through gate 34, for example, the normal symbol is changed from “O” to “X”. → "○" → ... and so on, display the display at a high speed (change display). Then, when the change display is stopped for a few seconds with the “◯” symbol (winning symbol), the second start winning device 33b (blade member 37) is opened for a predetermined time. The display contents of the normal symbol display device 41 are directly controlled by a main control device 261 described later.

  Further, when a game ball newly passes through the through gate 34 during normal symbol variation display in the normal symbol display device 41, the corresponding variation display is performed after the end of the variation display performed at that time. It is configured to be performed. That is, the variable display is on standby (held). The maximum number of times the variable symbol display is held is determined for each model of the pachinko machine, but in this embodiment, it is held up to four times. In addition, the number of times that the normal symbol variation display is held is arranged in the variable display unit 35 and is lit and displayed by a holding lamp 44 that can emit white light. Four hold lamps 44 are provided in the same manner as the maximum number of hold of each variable symbol display, and the number of the hold lamps 44 is lit as many as the number of the variable display being held.

  Note that the high pitched state includes, for example, (1) a state in which the fluctuation display time in the normal symbol display device 41 is shorter than that in the low pitched state, and (2) one opening time of the second start winning device 33b ( A state in which the specified time) is longer than that in the low entry state, and (3) a state in which the prescribed number of game balls that can be entered per one opening of the second start winning device 33b is larger than in the low entry state, (4) A state in which the number of times the second start winning device 33b is released per winning of the winning support lottery is larger than that in the low entering state, (5) the winning probability of the winning support lottery is lower than in the low entering state. And so on. The high pitched-in state in the present embodiment adopts the configurations (1), (2), and (5). Of course, the present invention is not limited to this, and any one of the configurations (1) to (5) or any combination of these configurations (1) to (5) may be adopted as the “high support mode”. As a result, it becomes easier for the game balls to win the second start winning device 33b frequently, and the number of times that the winning lottery is executed is increased, and a decrease in the number of balls held by the player is suppressed. .

  The game board 30 includes an inner rail component 51 and an outer rail component 52, and a rail 50 that guides a game ball launched from the launch device 60 to the upper part of the game board 30 is attached. As a result, the game balls fired in accordance with the turning operation of the handle 18 are guided through the launch rail 61 and the rail 50 into a game area formed between the game board 30 and the glass unit 137.

  A return ball preventing member 53 is attached to the tip portion of the inner rail constituting portion 51 (the upper left portion in FIG. 4). This prevents a situation in which the game ball once guided from the rail 50 to the game area returns to the rail 50 again. Further, a return rubber 54 is attached to a substantially distal end portion (upper right portion in FIG. 4) of the outer rail constituting portion 52. The game ball fired at a predetermined momentum or more hits the return rubber 54 and is returned to, for example, the substantially central portion of the game board 30.

  In the present embodiment, the outer rail component 52 is interrupted at the upper right portion of the game board 30, and the inner rail component 51 is interrupted at the lower right portion of the game board 30. For this reason, the game area is defined by the inner peripheral surface of the rail 50 and the window hole 39 of the resin base 38. However, since the game ball launched by the launching device 60 may flow backward through the rail 50 until it passes through the return ball prevention member 53, the parallel portions of the inner and outer rail constituting portions 51 and 52 are excluded from the game area. It is burned.

  As shown in FIG. 3, a ball passage unit 70 is provided on the back side of the front frame set 14 below the window portion 101. The ball passage unit 70 includes a lower plate communication passage 71 connected from a payout mechanism portion 352 described later to the discharge port 16 of the lower plate 15, and an upper plate communication passage 73 connected from the payout mechanism portion 352 to the upper plate 19. In addition, there is a predetermined gap between the firing rail 61 provided on the front side of the inner frame 12 and the rail 50 (outer rail constituting portion 52), and the ball path unit 70 of the front frame set 14 includes the above-described gap. A foul ball passage 72 is formed to guide the game ball dropped from the gap to the lower plate 15. Thereby, if the game ball launched from the launching device 60 does not reach the return ball prevention member 53 and returns to the rail 50 as a foul ball, the foul ball is returned to the lower plate 15 via the foul ball passage 72. Discharged.

  3 and 4 is a payout passage for guiding a game ball paid out by a payout mechanism portion 352, which will be described later, to the front of the inner frame 12, and an upper plate communication passage 73 (upper plate 19). And a passage leading to the lower plate communication passage 71 (lower plate 15). A shutter 68 is provided below the payout passage 67. When the front frame set 14 is opened, the shutter 68 protrudes forward by an urging force of a spring or the like so that the outlet of the payout passage 67 is almost closed. ing. When the front frame set 14 is closed, the shutter 68 is pushed open by the inlet side rear end of the lower plate communication path 71. In addition, the inlets (sphere inflow portions) of the lower plate communication passage 71 and the upper plate communication passage 73 are adjacent to each other, and in the closed state of the front frame set 14, the inlets and the discharge passage 67 are separated by a predetermined distance. A game ball can pass through the gap between the two. For this reason, when the upper plate 19 and the upper plate communication passage 73 are filled with game balls, the game balls to be dispensed flow to the lower plate communication passage 71 side (overflow to the inlet side of the lower plate communication passage 71), and the lower plate connection It will be paid out to the lower plate 15 through the passage 71.

  In addition, the ball path unit 70 is provided with a full detection switch (not shown) that detects a game ball located in the lower dish communication path 71. Due to the presence of the full detection switch, it is grasped that the lower plate 15 is full of game balls (the lower plate 15 is full of game balls and the game balls are retained in the lower plate communication path 71). be able to. In the present embodiment, based on the fact that a game ball is continuously detected for a predetermined time by the full detection switch, an error notification that teaches that the lower plate 15 is full using a display or sound on the decorative symbol display device 42 is used. Is controlled. When the game ball stays in the lower tray communication path 71 and the game ball is not detected by the full detection switch (when it is not detected continuously for a predetermined time), the error notification state is canceled.

  Next, the back configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. Various control boards are arranged on the back of the pachinko machine 10 so as to be lined up, down, left and right, and partially overlapped in the front and back, and further, a game ball supply device (payout mechanism) for supplying game balls And a protective cover made of resin. The dispensing mechanism and the protective cover are integrated as one unit, and the resin portion is generally sometimes referred to as a back pack. Therefore, this unit is referred to as a “back pack unit 203”.

  First, the back configuration of the game board 30 will be described. As shown in FIG. 6, on the back side of the variable display device unit 35 (see FIG. 4) arranged corresponding to the through hole in the center of the game board 30, a resin frame cover that covers the center frame 47 from the back side. 213 is provided to protrude rearward. Further, on the back side of the frame cover 213, a decorative symbol display device 42, a display control device 45, and a sub control device 262, which are liquid crystal display devices facing forward from the opening of the frame cover 213, can be attached and detached in a state where they are stacked in front and back. Is attached.

  The decorative symbol display device 42 is housed in a housing box 42 a in which an opening for exposing the display unit (liquid crystal screen) of the decorative symbol display device 42 to the front side of the pachinko machine 10 is formed, and the rear surface of the frame cover 213. It is fixed on the side. The display control device 45 is accommodated in the substrate box 45a and fixed to the back side of the decorative symbol display device 42 (accommodation box 42a). The sub-control device 262 is accommodated in the substrate box 262a and fixed to the back side of the display control device 45 (substrate box 45a). In the frame cover 213, an LED control board for driving LEDs and the like built in the center frame 47 is disposed. The storage box 42a and the substrate boxes 45a and 262a are made of a transparent resin material or the like so that the inside can be visually recognized.

  Under the frame cover 213, a back frame set 215 is attached to the game board 30 so as to cover the general winning opening 31, the variable winning device 32, the starting winning device 33, and the like from behind. The back frame set 215 includes a ball collection mechanism (not shown) for collecting game balls that have won prizes in various winning ports. The game balls collected by the ball collection mechanism are guided to a discharge passage portion 217 described later, and discharged from the discharge chute of the discharge passage portion 217 to the outside of the pachinko machine 10.

  In the present embodiment, the back frame set 215 functions as a mounting base for the main controller 261. More specifically, the board box 263 on which the main controller 261 is mounted is pivotally supported with respect to the back frame set 215 and can be opened rearward.

  The main controller 261 is accommodated in a substrate box 263 made of a transparent resin material or the like. The substrate box 263 includes a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected by a sealing member. The board | substrate box 263 connected with the sealing member becomes a structure which cannot be opened unless a predetermined trace is left. As a result, it is possible to easily find out that the board box 263 has been illegally opened.

  In addition, the game board 30 is provided with a ball entry detection switch for detecting game balls that have entered the various winning ports corresponding to various winning ports such as the general winning port 31. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 4, a winning opening switch 221 is provided at a position corresponding to the general winning opening 31, and the first variable winning device 32a and the second variable winning device 32b have a first count switch. 223a and a second count switch 223b are provided, and an assist winning detection switch 227 is provided at the assist winning opening 48. The first start winning device 33a and the second start winning device 33b are provided with a first start winning switch 224a and a second start winning switch 224b. Further, a through gate switch 225 is provided at a position corresponding to the through gate 34.

  Although not shown, the back frame set 215 is electrically connected to the prize opening switch 221, the first count switch 223a, the second count switch 223b, the assist prize detection switch 227, the through gate switch 225, and the cable connector. A first board surface relay board to be connected is provided. The first board surface relay board relays the prize opening switch 221 and the like and the main control device 261, and is electrically connected to the main control device 261 through a cable connector. On the other hand, the first start winning switch 224a and the second start winning switch 224b are directly connected to the main controller 261 via the connector cable without passing through the relay board.

The detection results detected by the various entrance detection switches are taken into the main controller 261. Then, a payout command (the number of game balls to be paid out) corresponding to the winning situation at each time is transmitted from the main control device 261 to the payout control device 311, and a predetermined number of game balls are based on the output signal from the payout control device 311. Is dispensed (except when detected by the through gate switch 225).
In addition, although not shown in the drawings, the back of the game board 30 is provided with a big prize opening solenoid that opens the big prize opening in the first variable prize winning device 32a and the second variable prize winning device 32b. A prize opening solenoid for opening and closing the blade member 37 by the start winning apparatus 33b is provided. The back frame set 215 is also provided with a second board surface relay board (not shown) that relays between the solenoid and the main controller 261.

  Next, the configuration of the back pack unit 203 will be described. As shown in FIG. 5, the back pack unit 203 is a unit in which a back pack 351 formed of resin and a payout mechanism portion 352 for a game ball are integrated. Further, the back pack unit 203 is supported so as to be openable and closable with respect to the left side portion (right side in FIG. 5) of the inner frame 12, and can be opened rearward with an open / close axis extending along the vertical direction as an axis. ing. In addition, an external terminal board 240 is provided on the upper left part of the back pack unit 203 (upper right part in FIG. 5).

  The external terminal board 240 is for relaying various information transmissions to a hall computer or the like in a game hall, and is provided with a plurality of external connection terminals. For convenience, no reference numerals are given, but for example, a terminal for outputting information relating to the current gaming state (such as jackpot state or probability variation mode), front frame set 14 or inner frame detected by opening detection switches 91 and 92 described later. Terminals for outputting information related to the opening of 12, terminals for outputting information on various error states such as a ball entry error, a lower tray full tank error, a tank ball no error, a payout error, and a prize paid out from the payout control device 311 Terminals for outputting information on the number of balls are provided.

  The back pack 351 is integrally formed of, for example, ABS resin, and includes a protective cover portion 354 that protrudes rearward from the pachinko machine 10 and has a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape. The protective cover 354 has a shape in which the left and right side surfaces and the upper surface are closed and only the lower surface is opened, and has a size sufficient to cover at least the frame cover 213. However, in the present embodiment, the protective cover portion 354 covers the upper portion and the right portion of the substrate box 263 (the left portion in FIG. 5). Thereby, in the closed state of the back pack unit 203, the sealing member provided at the right part of the board box 263 and the terminal part (board side connector) provided along the upper edge part of the main controller 261 are covered. It will be.

  The payout mechanism 352 is arranged so as to bypass the protective cover 354. That is, a tank 355 opened upward is provided above the protective cover portion 354, and game balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall are sequentially supplied to the tank 355. Below the tank 355, for example, a tank rail 356 that has two rows of ball passages in the horizontal direction and that is gently inclined toward the downstream side is connected. Further, a case rail 357 is formed vertically on the downstream side of the tank rail 356. It is connected. The payout device 358 is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 357, and a required number of game balls are paid out appropriately according to a predetermined electrical configuration such as a payout motor 358a. Then, the game balls paid out from the payout device 358 are supplied to the upper plate 19 and the like.

  The payout mechanism 352 is provided with a payout relay board 381 for relaying a payout command signal from the payout control device 311 to the payout device 358, and a power switch board 382 for taking in the main power from the outside. Yes. The power switch board 382 is supplied with, for example, an AC 24V main power supply via a voltage converter, and the power switch 382a is switched on or off by a switching operation of the power switch 382a.

  Below the back pack unit 203 (substrate box 263), there is provided a lower frame set 251 that is pivotally supported at the left side of the inner frame 12 (right side in FIG. 5) and can be opened rearward. As shown in FIG. 6, the lower frame set 251 is formed with a discharge passage portion 217 into which the game balls collected by the ball collection mechanism described above flow, and a game ball is placed in the most downstream portion of the discharge passage portion 217. A discharge chute (not shown) for discharging to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 is formed. In other words, the game balls that have won the respective winning openings such as the general winning opening 31 are gathered through the ball collecting mechanism of the back frame set 215 and further discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 through the discharge chute of the discharge passage portion 217. In addition, the out port 36 leads to the discharge passage portion 217 in the same manner, and the game balls that have not won any winning port are discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 through the discharge chute. In this embodiment, the back pack unit 203 and the lower frame set 251 are configured separately and can be opened and closed independently. However, the back pack unit 203 and the lower frame set 251 are integrally formed. It is also good to do.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 5, the payout control device 311, the firing control device 312, the power supply device 313, and the card unit connection board 314 are detachably attached to the back side of the lower frame set 251 in a state where they are stacked in front and back. Is attached.

  The launch control device 312 and the power supply device 313 are accommodated in the substrate box 313a and fixed to the back side of the lower frame set 251. Although the launch control device 312 and the power supply device 313 are described as independent control devices for convenience, they are actually configured by a single board (printed board).

  The payout control device 311 is housed in the substrate box 311a and is fixed to the back side of the substrate box 313a (the launch control device 312 and the power supply device 313). The substrate box 311a in which the dispensing control device 311 is accommodated is provided with a sealing member in the same manner as the substrate box 263 in which the main control device 261 is accommodated, so that an unsealed trace of the substrate box 311a remains. It has become.

  In addition, the card unit connection board 314 is accommodated in the board box 314a and fixed to the back side of the board box 313a (the firing control device 312 and the power supply device 313). Each of the board boxes 311a, 313a, and 314a is made of a transparent resin material or the like so that the inside can be visually recognized.

  Further, the dispensing control device 311 is provided with a state return switch 321 that protrudes outward from the substrate box 311a. For example, when the state return switch 321 is pressed when a payout error occurs, such as a ball clogged in the payout motor 358a, the payout motor 358a rotates forward and backward to eliminate the ball clogging (return to a normal state).

  Further, the power supply device 313 is provided with a RAM erase switch 323 that protrudes outward from the substrate box 313a. This pachinko machine 10 has a backup function, so that even if a power failure occurs, the pachinko machine 10 retains the state at the time of the power failure and can be restored to the state at the time of the power failure when returning from the power failure (power recovery). it can. Therefore, if the power is turned off in a normal procedure (for example, when the game hall is closed), the state before the power is turned off is stored. If you want to return to the initial state when the power is turned on, hold down the RAM erase switch 323 and hold the power .

  As shown in FIG. 6, a locking device 600 is provided on the back side of the right side of the inner frame 12. The locking device 600 includes a cylinder lock 700 (see FIG. 1 and the like) exposed on the front surface side of the front frame set 14, and a key is inserted into the key hole of the cylinder lock 700, and the inside is operated by rotating to one side. The frame 12 can be unlocked, and the front frame set 14 can be unlocked by rotating to the other side. In the present embodiment, the inner frame 12 is locked to the outer frame 11, and the front frame set 14 is locked to the inner frame 12.

  In addition, as described above, the extending wall portion 83 that covers the entire upper and lower sections corresponding to the locking device 600 from the back side of the inner frame 12 is formed in the right side frame constituting portion 11d of the outer frame 11 (FIG. 5). reference). Thereby, it becomes difficult to make a wire etc. approach from the back side of outer frame 11, and to operate locking device 600 with the wire etc. As a result, the defense performance can be improved. Further, the extending wall portion 83 is configured to cover the right end portion (the left end portion in FIG. 5) of the back pack unit 203 and the lower frame set 251 from the back side, and in the closed state of the inner frame 12, The back pack unit 203 and the lower frame set 251 cannot be opened.

  As shown in FIG. 4, a front frame open detection switch 91 for detecting the opening of the front frame set 14 is provided on the lower right side of the front side of the inner frame 12 (on the right side of the launching device 60). As shown in FIG. 5, an inner frame opening detection switch 92 for detecting the opening of the inner frame 12 is provided on the lower right side on the back side of the inner frame 12 (lower left in FIG. 5). Each of the front frame opening detection switch 91 and the inner frame opening detection switch 92 includes a detection unit that can move in and out of the switch main body, and the front frame opening detection switch 91 is provided so that the detection unit faces forward. The inner frame opening detection switch 92 is provided so that the detection unit faces rearward. When the detection unit is in a state of protruding from the switch main body, an ON signal is output to the main controller 261, and when the detection unit is pressed toward the switch main body and is immersed in the switch main body, an OFF signal is output. It is configured to output to the main controller 261. That is, when the front frame set 14 is closed, the front frame opening detection switch 91 is turned off when the detection unit is pressed on the back surface of the front frame set 14, and when the front frame set 14 is opened, the detection unit returns to the protruding state. Turns on. Similarly, when the inner frame 12 is closed, the inner frame opening detection switch 92 is turned off by the pressing portion 86 integrally formed with the receiving portion 85 of the outer frame 11 and is detected when the inner frame 12 is opened. The part returns to the protruding state and is turned on.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 7 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. A main controller 261 (main board) as main control means is equipped with a CPU 501 as a one-chip microcomputer as an arithmetic unit. The CPU 501 includes a ROM 502 that stores various control programs executed by the CPU 501 and fixed value data, and a RAM 503 that is a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 502 is executed. Various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated. However, the CPU, the ROM, and the RAM may not be integrated into one chip but may be configured as a chip for each function.

  The RAM 503 is a stack area that stores the contents of the internal registers of the CPU 501, the return address of a control program executed by the CPU 501, and a work area (work area) that stores various flags, counters, I / O values, and the like. ) And a backup area 503a.

  The RAM 503 is configured to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 313 even after the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, and is stored in the stack area, work area, and backup area 503a. All data is backed up.

  In the backup area 503a, when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, the power of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power is turned off when the power is turned on again. (Similarly) is an area for storing stack pointers, values of registers, I / O, and the like. Writing to the backup area 503a is executed when the power is turned off by the main process. Conversely, the return of each value written to the backup area 503a is the main process at the time of power-on (including power-on due to power failure cancellation, and so on). Executed in Note that a power failure signal SK1 output from a power failure monitoring circuit 542, which will be described later, is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the CPU 501 when a power failure occurs due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. Due to the occurrence, the power failure process (NMI interrupt process) is immediately executed.

  Note that if data stored in at least the stack area and the backup area 503a is backed up, it is not always necessary to back up data stored in all areas. For example, the data stored in the stack area and the backup area 503a may be backed up, and the data stored in the work area may not be backed up.

  An input / output port 505 is connected to the CPU 501 incorporating the ROM 502 and RAM 503 via a bus line 504 including an address bus and a data bus. A RAM erase switch circuit 543, a payout control device 311, a sub-control device 262, first and second special display devices 43L and 43R, a normal symbol display device 41, and the like are connected to the input / output port 505. With this configuration, the special display devices 43L and 43R and the normal symbol display device 41 described above are directly controlled by the main control device 261. On the other hand, the decorative symbol display device 42 is controlled via the sub-control device 262.

  In addition, although illustration of various relay boards and the like is omitted for convenience, the input / output port 505 includes a prize opening switch 221, count switches 223a and 223b, start winning prize switches 224a and 224b, through gate switches 225, and various switches of the handle 18. And various electrical components such as a solenoid for opening and closing the variable winning device 32 are connected. That is, the main controller 261 is provided with a plurality of terminal portions (board side connectors) for connecting connectors of various cable connectors, and the input / output port 505 is configured by these terminal portions.

  A sub-control device 262 (sub-control board) as a sub-control means includes a CPU 551 that is an arithmetic device, various control programs executed by the CPU 551, a ROM 552 that stores fixed value data, and a control program that is stored in the ROM 552. RAM 553, which is a memory for temporarily storing various data during execution, input / output port 554, bus line 555, and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit (not shown) It has. The RAM 553 is a memory that temporarily stores work data and flags used when the CPU 551 executes various programs.

  A CPU 551, ROM 552, and RAM 553 are connected to the input / output port 554 via a bus line 555 and a display control device 45 is connected. Further, the speaker SP, the holding lamps 46 a and 46 b, the effect button 125, the cross button 126, various illumination units and the lamps 102 and 104 are connected to the input / output port 554.

  The CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 causes the display control device 45 to execute display control based on, for example, a command signal (for example, a variation pattern command) transmitted from the main control device 261 and causes the decorative symbol display device 42 to display the display control device. As described above, in the present embodiment, it is displayed that the jackpot is won by the first and second special display devices 43L and 43R controlled by the main control device 261, and the sub control device 262 is displayed. In the decorative symbol display device 42 controlled by, the decorative symbol variation display is performed as the effect display in accordance with the special symbol variation display in the special display devices 43L and 43R.

  The payout control device 311 controls payout of prize balls and rental balls by the payout device 358. The CPU 511 that is an arithmetic unit includes a ROM 512 that stores a control program executed by the CPU 511, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 513 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 513 of the payout control device 311, like the RAM 503 of the main control device 261, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the CPU 511 and the return address of the control program executed by the CPU 511, various flags and counters, A work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored, and a backup area 513a are provided.

  The RAM 513 is configured to hold (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 313 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, and all stored in the stack area, work area, and backup area 513a. Data is backed up. Note that if data stored in at least the stack area and the backup area 513a is backed up, it is not always necessary to back up data stored in all areas. For example, the data stored in the stack area and the backup area 513a may be backed up, and the data stored in the work area may not be backed up.

  The backup area 513a has a stack pointer, each register at the time of power off, each register, so that the power of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power is turned off when the power is turned off. This is an area for storing values such as I / O. The writing to the backup area 513a is executed when the power is turned off by the main process, and the restoration of each value written to the backup area 513a is executed in the main process when the power is turned on. As with the CPU 501 of the main controller 261, the power failure signal SK1 is input to the NMI terminal of the CPU 511 from the power failure monitoring circuit 542 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the CPU 511, NMI interrupt processing as power failure processing is immediately executed.

  In the work area, a payout permission flag for which the payout control device 311 is set to allow the payout of prize balls, a command reception flag set when a command transmitted from the main control device 261 is received, and the main control device 261 And a command buffer for storing a command transmitted from.

  The payout permission flag is a flag for setting a prize ball payout permission, and is turned on when a specific command for permitting the payout of the prize ball is transmitted from the main control device 261 and received, and is initially set. It is turned off when it is restored before the process or power shutdown. In the present embodiment, the specific commands are a payout initialization command for instructing the initial processing of the RAM 513 of the payout control device 311, a prize ball command for instructing payout of a prize ball, and the main controller 261 having been restored to power. There are three payout return commands to be transmitted in this case.

  The command reception flag is a flag for confirming whether or not the payout control device 311 has received a command, and is turned on when any command is received. Similar to the payout permission flag, an initial setting process or power-off is performed. It is turned off when returning to the front, and turned off when the command received by the command determination process is determined.

  The command buffer is configured by a ring buffer that temporarily stores commands transmitted from the main control device 261. The ring buffer has a predetermined storage area, and commands are stored with regularity from the beginning to the end of the storage area. When commands are stored in all storage areas, the ring buffer is at the start of the storage area. The return command is configured to be updated. Therefore, when the command is stored and when the command is read, the storage pointer and the read pointer in the command buffer are updated, and the command is stored and read based on each pointer.

  An input / output port 515 is connected to the CPU 511 incorporating the ROM 512 and the RAM 513 through a bus line 514 including an address bus and a data bus. A RAM erase switch circuit 543, a main controller 261, a launch controller 312 and a payout device 358 are connected to the input / output port 515, respectively.

  The card unit connection board 314 includes a ball rental operation unit (a ball rental button 121 and a return button 122) on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10, and a card unit (a ball rental unit) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10 in a game hall or the like. Are electrically connected to each other, and receive a ball lending operation command from the player and output it to the card unit. In a cash machine in which game balls are lent directly to the upper plate 19 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, the card unit connection board 314 can be omitted.

  The launch control device 312 permits or prohibits the launch of the game ball by the launch device 60, and the launch device 60 is permitted to drive when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, a firing permission signal is output from the payout control device 311, a sensor signal is detected that the player is touching the handle 18, and a firing prohibit button 18 a ( 1 is not operated, the launching device 60 is driven, and a game ball is launched with an intensity corresponding to the amount of operation of the handle 18.

  The display control device 45 executes the variable display of the decorative symbols on the decorative symbol display device 42 in accordance with an instruction from the sub-control device 262. The display control device 45 includes a CPU 521, a program ROM 522, a work RAM 523, a video RAM 524, a character ROM 525, a video display processor (VDP) 526, an input port 527, an output port 529, and bus lines 530 and 531. And. An input / output port 554 of the sub control device 262 is connected to the input port 527. Further, a CPU 521, a program ROM 522, a work RAM 523, and a VDP 526 are connected to the input port 527 through a bus line 530. An output port 529 is connected to the VDP 526 via a bus line 531, and a decorative symbol display device 42 as a liquid crystal display device is connected to the output port 529.

  The CPU 521 of the display control device 45 receives the display command transmitted from the sub-control device 262 via the input port 527, analyzes the received command, or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received command to control the VDP 526. (Specifically, generation of an internal command for the VDP 526) is performed. Thereby, display control in the decorative symbol display device 42 is performed.

  The program ROM 522 is a memory that stores various control programs executed by the CPU 521 and fixed value data. The work RAM 523 is a memory that temporarily stores work data and flags used when the CPU 521 executes various programs. It is.

  The video RAM 524 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42, and the display content of the decorative symbol display device 42 is changed by rewriting the contents of the video RAM 524. The character ROM 525 is a memory that stores character data such as symbols displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42.

  The VDP 526 is a kind of drawing circuit that directly operates an LCD driver (liquid crystal driving circuit) incorporated in the decorative symbol display device 42. Since the VDP 526 is an IC chip, it is also referred to as a “drawing chip”, and the substance of the VDP 526 can be said to be a microcomputer chip with a dedicated firmware for drawing processing. The VDP 526 adjusts the respective timings of the CPU 521, the video RAM 524, etc. to intervene in reading and writing data, and reads the display data stored in the video RAM 524 at a predetermined timing and causes the decorative symbol display device 42 to display it.

  The power supply device 313 includes a power supply unit 541 that supplies power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 542 that monitors power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM erase switch circuit 543 connected to the RAM erase switch 323. And.

  The power supply unit 541 supplies necessary operation power to the main control device 261, the payout control device 311 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As its outline, the power supply unit 541 takes in AC 24 volt power supplied from the outside, generates + 12V power for driving various switches and motors, + 5V power for logic, backup power for RAM backup, etc. These + 12V power supply, + 5V power supply and backup power supply are supplied to the main control device 261, the payout control device 311 and the like. Note that operation power (+12 V power, +5 V power, etc.) is supplied to the launch control device 312 via the payout control device 311. Similarly, operating power is supplied to various switches, motors and the like via a control device to which these are connected.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 542 is a circuit that outputs a power failure signal SK1 to each NMI terminal of the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 and the CPU 511 of the payout control device 311 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 542 monitors the DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 541, and determines that a power failure (power failure) has occurred when this voltage is less than 22 volts. The power failure signal SK1 is output to the main controller 261 and the payout controller 311. Based on the output of the power failure signal SK1, the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311 recognize the occurrence of a power failure and execute a power failure process (NMI interrupt processing).

  The power supply unit 541 normally outputs an output of 5 volts, which is a drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the process at the time of a power failure even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Configured to maintain the value. Therefore, the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311 can normally execute and complete the power failure process.

  The RAM erase switch circuit 543 is a circuit that takes in the switch signal of the RAM erase switch 323 and clears backup data in the RAM 503 of the main controller 261 and the RAM 513 of the payout controller 311 in accordance with the state of the switch 323. When the RAM erase switch 323 is pressed, the RAM erase switch circuit 543 outputs a RAM erase signal SK2 to the main controller 261 and the payout controller 311. When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on with the RAM erase switch 323 pressed (including power-on due to power failure cancellation), the data in the respective RAMs 503 and 513 are cleared in the main controller 261 and the payout controller 311. The

  Next, the operation of the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above will be described. In this embodiment, the CPU 501 provided in the main control device 261 as the main control means performs lottery using various counter information in the game. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8, a success / failure random number counter C1 as a success / failure random number generating means used for success / failure lottery for determining whether or not to generate a big hit state, and a type used for determination of a jackpot type (type lottery) A determination counter C2, a variation selection counter C3 used to determine whether or not the reach state is generated in the decorative symbol display device 42, an initial value random number counter CINI used to set an initial value of the failure random number counter C1, a first In addition, the first variation type counter CS1, the second variation type counter CS2 used for determining the variation display time of the second special display devices 43L and 43R (decorative symbol display device 42), and the normal symbol display device 41 are selected (input). The normal symbol random number counter C4 used for the ball support lottery) is used. Note that the variation selection counter C3 is also used for reach type lottery when the decorative symbol display device 42 is deviated and varied. The variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are also used for variation pattern selection (effect pattern selection) of the decorative symbol display device 42. Specifically, the variation time of the special display devices 43L and 43R is determined according to the determined variation pattern, and the variation mode and variation time in the decorative symbol display device 42, that is, the effect pattern, are determined.

  Each of the counters C1, C2, C3, CINI, CS1, CS2, and C4 is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value every time it is updated and returns to the lower limit value of 0 after reaching the upper limit value. Each counter is periodically updated, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 503 (except for the random number initial value counter CINI).

  The RAM 503 stores a special fluctuation holding area as a holding storage area for storing the values of the success / failure random number counter C1, the type determination counter C2, and the fluctuation selection counter C3, and the normal symbol random number counter C4. A variable holding area is provided. The normal variation holding area includes one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to holding fourth areas). In each holding area of the normal variation holding area, the value of the normal symbol random number counter C4 is stored in time series in accordance with the passing history of the game ball to the through gate 34. By adopting this configuration, the variable display on the normal symbol display device 41 can be suspended up to four times.

  The special variable reserved area includes a first special variable reserved area and a second special variable storage area each having four reserved areas (first to fourth reserved areas), and one execution area. In each holding area of the first special variation holding area, the values of the success / failure random number counter C1, the type determination counter C2, and the variation selection counter C3 are set according to the winning history of the game balls to the first start winning device 33a. Stored serially. In each holding area of the second special fluctuation holding area, the values of the success / failure random number counter C1, the type determination counter C2, and the fluctuation selection counter C3 are set according to the winning history of the game balls to the second start winning device 33b. Stored serially. By adopting this configuration, the variable display on the special display devices 43L and 43R can be suspended up to four times.

  Explaining in detail each counter, the success / failure random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 599, for example, and after reaching an upper limit value (that is, 599) as a closing price, 0 is a lower limit value as a starting price. It is the composition which returns to. Normally, when the success / failure random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the initial value random number counter CINI at that time is read as the next initial value of the success / failure random number counter C1. The initial value random number counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the success / failure random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 599), and is updated once for each timer interrupt and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the normal processing. On the other hand, the success / failure random number counter C1 is updated periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interruption), and the value of the success / failure random number counter C1 is stored in the success / failure random number counter buffer. Then, at the timing when the game ball wins the first start winning device 33a or the second start winning device 33b, the value of the success / failure random number counter C1 stored in the success / failure random number counter buffer is stored in the special variation holding area.

  In this embodiment, the number of values of the success / failure random number counter C1 that is a big hit in the low probability state (normal mode, time reduction mode) is two, and the value is “7, 307”. In the state (probability variation mode, latent probability mode), the number of values of the success / failure random number counter C1 that is a big hit is 20, and the values are “7 to 16, 307 to 316”. In the present embodiment, the ROM 502 is provided with two success / failure determination tables as winning value storage means that are referred to when determining whether or not the value of the success / failure random number counter C1 corresponds to the jackpot. There are a first winning / failing determination table storing “7, 307” as a jackpot value and a second winning / failing determination table storing “8-16, 308-316” as a jackpot value.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the winning / randomizing counter C1 is used to draw a lottery based on whether or not the winning combination is won when the winning combination is not won. In the low probability state (normal mode, time reduction mode), the number of values of the random number counter C1 that is a small hit is one and the value is “404”, and the high probability state (probability change mode, latent probability mode). ), The number of values of the success / failure random number counter C1 which is a small hit is 10, and the value is “404 to 413”. For determining whether or not to win a small hit, a first small hit determination table storing “404” as a winning value and a second small hit determining table storing “405 to 413” as a winning value are referred to.

  In the normal mode, the probability of winning a jackpot in the winning / losing lottery (probability of jackpot) is 1/300, the probability of winning a jackpot (small jackpot probability) is 1/600, When the variation time in the normal symbol display device 41 for teaching the result is 8 seconds, and the winning support lottery is won, the second start winning device 33b is opened for 0.4 seconds.

  In the probability variation mode, the big hit probability is 1/30 and the small hit probability is 1/60, which is easier to hit than in the normal mode. In the probability variation mode, the variation time of the normal symbol display device 41 based on the entrance support lottery is 0.4 seconds, which is shorter than that in the normal mode. The start winning device 33b is opened three times and each opening time is 4 seconds (opening for 4 seconds is repeated three times with a closing period of 0.4 seconds). That is, in the probability variation mode, the variation time in the normal symbol display device 41 is shorter than in the normal mode, and the opening time of the second start winning device 33b per winning of the winning support lottery is increased and the number of times of opening is increased. Will increase. As a result, the time period during which the second start winning device 33b is in the open state becomes longer, so that the game balls frequently enter the second start winning device 33b (becomes a high winning state). The lottery is continuously performed and the ball is in good condition. In the high pitching state, the probability that the “O” symbol is stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display device 41 (the winning probability of the pitching support lottery) may be higher than that in the normal mode.

  In the time reduction mode, the big hit probability is 1/300 and the small hit probability is 1/600. In the time reduction mode, the variation time of the normal symbol display device 41 based on the winning support lottery is 0.4 seconds, and when the winning support lottery is won, the second start winning device 33b is released three times. In addition, each opening time is 4 seconds. That is, the time shortening mode is the same as the probability variation mode when only the operation of the second start winning device 33b is seen, although the jackpot probability is the same low probability as in the normal mode. In this embodiment, after the end of the jackpot state of “8RN” or “2RN”, the first and second special display devices 43L and 43R display a total of a predetermined number of fluctuations (a total of 90 times after “8RN”). Thus, “2RN” is set to the time reduction mode over 30 times (“2RN30”), 60 times (“2RN60”), and 90 times (“2RN90”). Further, the time reduction mode ends when the special display devices 43L and 43R display the specified number of fluctuations even if the big hit state does not occur, and then shifts to the normal mode.

  In the latent mode, the big hit probability is 1/30 and the small hit probability is 1/60. In the latent mode, the variation time of the normal symbol display device 41 is 8 seconds, and when the winning support lottery is won, the second start winning device 33b is opened only once for 0.4 seconds. In other words, the latent probability mode has the same high probability as the jackpot probability in the probability variation mode, but is the same as the normal mode when only the operation of the second start winning device 33b is viewed. In the present embodiment, the latent mode is set after the end of the “2RS” jackpot state, and continues at least until the jackpot state occurs. In the present embodiment, when winning in the winning lottery based on the entry to the first start winning device 33a, there is no allocation that “2RN” is won, so the latent probability mode ends quietly. This situation is avoided (continues until winning the jackpot with a lottery).

  For example, the type determination counter C2 is incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 19, for example, and after reaching the upper limit value (that is, 19), the type determination counter C2 returns to 0 that is the lower limit value. The ROM 502 also includes a first type determination table (corresponding to the first start winning device 33a) and a second type determination that are referred to when determining which jackpot type the value of the type determination counter C2 corresponds to. A table (corresponding to the second start winning device 33b) is provided. Then, when the jackpot is won in the winning / losing lottery, the type of the jackpot state type given based on the value of the type determination counter C2 is determined (type lottery is performed), and the jackpot state of the determined type is determined. Will be granted.

  The type determination counter C2 is updated periodically (once every timer interruption in this embodiment), and the value of the type determination counter C2 is stored in the type determination counter buffer. The value of the type determination counter C2 stored in the type determination counter buffer is stored in the special variation holding area of the RAM 503 at the timing when the game ball wins the first start winning device 33a or the second start winning device 33b. .

  The variation selection counter C3 is configured so that, for example, one by one is added in order within a range of 0 to 238, for example, and after reaching the upper limit value (that is, 238), it returns to the lower limit value of 0. In this embodiment, the reach selection state is generated by the variation selection counter C3, and after the reach state is generated with respect to the decorative symbol, the final stop symbol is shifted by one before and after the reach symbol and stopped. The final stop symbol after the stop is to draw lots of “reach other than front / rear off” that stops before and after the reach symbol and “complete out” that does not cause reach. In the present embodiment, the ROM 502 is provided with a reach determination table that stores the correspondence between the value of the variation selection counter C3 and the reach type. The reach determination table stores a value of “0 to 238”, C3 = 0, 1 corresponds to the back and forth reach, C3 = 2 to 21 corresponds to the reach other than back and forth, and C3 = 22 to 238 is complete. It has a configuration corresponding to the detachment.

  The fluctuation selection counter C3 is updated periodically (once every timer interruption in this embodiment), and the value of the fluctuation selection counter C3 is stored in the fluctuation selection counter buffer. The value of the variation selection counter C3 stored in the variation selection counter buffer is stored in the special variation holding area of the RAM 503 at the timing when the game ball has won the first start winning device 33a or the second start winning device 33b. .

  In addition, one of the two variation type counters CS1 and CS2 is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 59, for example, and reaches the upper limit value (that is, 59), and then reaches the lower limit value. The other variation type counter CS2 is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 37, for example, and reaches the upper limit value (that is, 37), and then returns to the lower limit value of 0. It has become. For example, the first variation type counter CS1 determines the reach pattern of decorative symbols such as so-called normal reach, super reach, premium reach, and other rough symbol variation modes, and the second variation type counter CS2 determines the final stop symbol after the occurrence of reach. A more detailed symbol variation mode is determined, such as an elapsed time until the middle symbol (in this example) stops. Accordingly, a variety of variation patterns can be easily realized by combining these variation type counters CS1 and CS2. It is also possible to determine the symbol variation mode only by the first variation type counter CS1, or to determine the symbol variation mode in combination by combining the first variation type counter CS1 and the stop symbol.

  Further, the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are updated once every time a normal process described later is executed once, and are repeatedly updated even within the remaining time of the normal process. Then, the buffer values of CS1 and CS2 are acquired when determining the variation pattern at the start of variation of the decorative symbol by the decorative symbol display device 42.

  In addition, the magnitude | size and range of each counter are only examples, and can be changed arbitrarily. However, the sizes of the success / failure random number counter C1, the type determination counter C2, the variation selection counter C3, and the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are all different prime numbers, and it is desirable that they are values that are not synchronized in any case.

  Further, the normal symbol random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter in which, for example, one by one is added in the range of 0 to 99, for example, and after reaching the upper limit (that is, 99, the lower limit is returned to 0). The random number counter C4 is updated periodically (once every timer interruption in this embodiment), and the value of the normal symbol random number counter C4 is acquired when the game ball passes through the left or right through gate 34. The number of random number values to be won in the ball state is one and the range is “1.” On the other hand, the number of random number values to be won in the high ball state is 99, The range is “1 to 99.” When the value of the winning normal symbol random number counter C4 is acquired, the symbol corresponding to the winning is displayed after the normal symbol display device 41 performs variable display for a predetermined time. ("○" in this example) stops Shown, it is opened in a pattern in which the second start winning device 33b is corresponding to the game mode at that time.

  Next, each control process executed by the CPU 501 in the main controller 261 will be described with reference to a flowchart. The processing of the CPU 501 is broadly divided into a main process that is started when the power is turned on, a timer interrupt process that is started periodically (in this embodiment, at a cycle of 2 msec), and a stop signal to the NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal). For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process will be described first, and then the main process will be described.

  FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing. This processing is executed by the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 every 2 msec, for example. First, in step S301, various winning switch reading processes are executed. That is, the state of various switches (except for the RAM erase switch 323) connected to the main controller 261 is read, and the state of the switch is determined and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored. On the other hand, if there is no detection information, the process proceeds to the next process.

  When there is detection information of various winning switches, the value of the corresponding winning ball counter is added. Further, in an external output process of a normal process described later, a prize ball command based on the value of each prize ball counter is output to the payout control device 311 and a prize ball is given based on the prize ball command (a game ball is paid out). ) Further, when the prize ball command is output, the value of each prize ball counter is reset.

  In step S302, random number initial value update processing is executed. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (599 in this example).

  In step S303, random number update processing is executed. Specifically, the success / failure random number counter C1, the type determination counter C2, the variation selection counter C3, and the normal symbol random number counter C4 are each incremented by 1 and their counter values are maximized (in this embodiment, 599, 19 respectively). 238, 99) is cleared to 0 respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1, C2, C3, and C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 503.

  Thereafter, in step S304, a start winning process associated with winning the start winning device 33 is executed, and in step S305, a through gate passing process accompanying passing of the game ball to the through gate 34 is executed. Thereafter, the timer interrupt process is temporarily terminated.

  Here, the start winning process in step S304 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. Note that the RAM 503 has a first hold counter Na for counting the number of variable display hold times triggered by winning in the first start winning device 33a, and a variable display hold time triggered by winning in the second start winning device 33b. A second holding counter Nb for counting the number is provided.

  In addition, the execution area of each special variable holding area and each holding area include a random number storage area for storing the value of the random number counter C1, a winning random number storage area for storing the value of the type determination counter C2, and a variable selection counter C3. A reach random number storage area for storing values is provided. In the present embodiment, the success / failure random number storage area stores the value of the success / failure random number counter C1 using 2 bytes. Each of the winning type random number storage area and the reach random number storage area uses 1 byte to store the value of the type determination counter C2 and the value of the variation selection counter C3.

  Furthermore, in the execution area of the special variation holding area, there is a variation display (first variation display) based on the entry to the first start winning device 33a, or based on the entry to the second start winning device 33b. A fluctuation storage area is provided in which information indicating whether the display is a fluctuation display (second fluctuation display) is stored. Hereinafter, “the information indicating that the first variation display is stored in the variation storage area” is also referred to as “the first variation flag is turned on”, and “the second variation display is performed in the variation storage area”. The information indicating “is stored” is also referred to as “the second variation flag is set to ON”.

  First, in step S501, whether or not the game ball has won the second start winning device 33b is determined based on the detection information of the second start winning switch 224b. If an affirmative determination is made in step S501, it is determined in step S502 whether or not the value of the second hold counter Nb is less than the upper limit value (“4” in the present embodiment). If a negative determination is made in step S501 or S502, the process proceeds to step S509. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S502, the process proceeds to step S503, and the second hold counter Nb is incremented by one.

  In the subsequent step S504, the values of the random number counter C1, the type determination counter C2, and the variation selection counter C3 updated in the random number update process in step S303 (the random number counter buffer, the type determination counter buffer, and the variation selection counter buffer are updated). Each stored value) is stored in a first area (a random number storage area, a winning type random number storage area, a reach random number storage area) among the reserved areas that are free in the special variable reservation area. After step S504, the process proceeds to step S505.

  In step S505, a success / failure determination process is performed to determine whether or not the value of the success / failure random number counter C1 newly stored in the special variation holding area is a value corresponding to a big win or a small win. Details of the success / failure determination process will be described later.

  In subsequent step S506, when it is determined in step S505 that the value of the random number counter C1 is a value corresponding to the jackpot, the jackpot is newly determined based on the value of the type determination counter C2 newly stored in the special variable holding area. A type determination process is performed to determine the type. Details of the type determination process will be described later.

  In the subsequent step S507, when it is determined in step S505 that the value of the random number counter C1 is not a value corresponding to the jackpot, the deviation is determined based on the value of the variation selection counter C3 newly stored in the special variation holding area. Reach determination processing for determining the type of reach at the time of change is performed. Details of the reach determination process will be described later.

  Here, the details of the success / failure determination processing in step S505 will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S5101, whether or not the value of the success / failure random number counter C1 newly stored in the special fluctuation holding area matches either “7” or “307” which is the value stored in the first success / failure determination table. Is determined. Incidentally, “7” and “307” are values that are big hits in both the low probability state and the high probability state.

  In FIG. 14, for convenience, the process of step S5101 is simplified. However, in actuality, whether or not the value of the random number counter C1 is “7” is determined, and the determination is negative. If it is determined, it is determined whether or not the value of the random number counter C1 is “307”, and if an affirmative determination is made in either of these determinations, an affirmative determination is made in step S5101, and which determination is made. If a negative determination is made in step S5101, a negative determination is made in step S5101.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S5101, the process ends after turning on the first success / failure flag in step S5102. In this embodiment, in addition to the success / failure random number storage area for storing the value of the success / failure random number counter C1, a separate success / failure flag is not provided, but information on whether or not a big hit state occurs in the failure / randomness storage area. Is stored (overwritten). As described above, the success / failure random number storage area uses 2 bytes. In step S5102, for example, “101010101010101010” is set for the success / failure random number storage area. In the present embodiment, for the sake of convenience, the setting for the success / failure random number storage area is referred to as turning on the first success / failure flag.

  If a negative determination is made in step S5101, the value of the success / failure random number counter C1 newly stored in the special fluctuation holding area in step S5103 is the value stored in the second success / failure determination table “8-16, 308”. ˜316 ”or not. Incidentally, “8 to 16, 308 to 316” are values that are jackpots only in the probability variation mode. In the determination process, in practice, it is determined one by one whether or not the value of the pass / fail random number counter C1 matches each value corresponding to the jackpot as described above.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S5103, the second success / failure flag is turned on in step S5104, and then the process ends. Note that turning on the second success / failure flag here means that, for example, “1100110011001100” is set in the success / failure random number storage area.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S5103, that is, if the result is “out” even in a high probability state, the value of the success / failure random number counter C1 newly stored in the special variable holding area in step S5105 is the first. It is determined whether or not the value matches “404” which is a value stored in the small hit determination table. Incidentally, “404” is a value that is a small hit in both the low probability state and the high probability state.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S5105, the first small hit flag is turned on in step S5106, and then the process ends. In the present embodiment, information on whether or not a small hit state occurs is also stored (overwritten) in the corresponding random number storage area.

  If a negative determination is made in step S5105, the value of the success / failure random number counter C1 newly stored in the special fluctuation holding area in step S5107 is the value stored in the second small hit determination table “405 to 413”. It is determined whether or not any of the above. Incidentally, “405 to 413” is a value that is a big hit only in a high probability state. If an affirmative determination is made in step S5107, the second small hit flag is turned on in step S5108, and then this process ends. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S5107, the present process is terminated as it is.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the information related to success / failure is stored using 2 bytes. For example, when noise occurs, the success / failure flag (the content stored in the failure random number storage area) is rewritten. It is possible to prevent a situation in which a big hit state is generated even though it is not a win, or a big win state does not occur even though it is a win. Further, the pattern (the combination of “1” and “0”) set in the success / failure determination process is a pattern that is not used when the value of the success / failure random number counter C1 is stored in the success / failure random number storage area. is there.

  In addition to the pass / fail random number storage area that stores the value of the pass / fail random number counter C1, a pass / fail flag is additionally provided, and at this time, the value of the pass / fail random number counter C1 is kept stored, and a variable display described later is displayed. In the variable display setting process that is performed at the start, the determination may be made by referring to the corresponding table based on the value of the success / failure random number counter C1. Further, a random number counter for small hits may be provided separately from the success / failure random number counter C1 used for the big hit determination.

  Next, the second type determination processing in step S506 will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S5401, it is determined whether or not the first or second success / failure flag is set to ON in the previous / failure determination processing performed immediately before. If a negative determination is made in step S5401 (there is no possibility of a jackpot state), the process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S5401 (there is a possibility that a jackpot state may occur), in step S5402, the type determination counter newly stored in the special variation holding area is referred to the second type determination table. It is determined whether or not the value of C2 matches the value “0” corresponding to “16RS”. If an affirmative determination is made in step S5402, the process ends after the 16RS flag is turned on in step S5403.

  In the present embodiment, in addition to the winning type random number storage area for storing the value of the type determining counter C2, a 16RS flag or the like is not separately provided, and “16RS” or the like is indicated in the winning type random number storage area. This information is stored (overwritten). As described above, the winning type random number storage area uses 1 byte. In step S5403, for example, “10101010” is set for the winning type random number storage area. In the present embodiment, for convenience, setting a pattern indicating a jackpot type such as “16RS” in the winning type random number storage area is referred to as turning on a flag indicating a jackpot type (such as a 16RS flag). explain. Note that the pattern (the combination of “1” and “0”) set in the winning type random number storage area in the type determining process is not used when the value of the type determination counter C2 is stored in the winning type random number storage area. It is a pattern.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S5402, in step S5404, the value of the type determination counter C2 newly stored in the special variation holding area is set to a value corresponding to “8RS” in consideration of the second type determination table. It is determined whether or not it matches any of “7 to 13”. If an affirmative determination is made in step S5404, then in step S5405, the 8RS flag is turned on (for example, “00011111” is set for the winning type random number storage area), and then this process ends.

  If a negative determination is made in step S5404, in step S5406, the value of the type determination counter C2 newly stored in the special variable reservation area is set to a value corresponding to “2RN30” in consideration of the second type determination table. It is determined whether or not it matches any of “14-17”. If an affirmative determination is made in step S5406, the 2RN30 flag is turned on in step S5407, and then this process ends.

  If a negative determination is made in step S5406, in step S5408, the value of the type determination counter C2 newly stored in the special variation holding area is set to a value corresponding to “2RN60” in consideration of the second type determination table. It is determined whether or not it matches “18”. If an affirmative determination is made in step S5408, the process is terminated after the 2RN60 flag is turned on in step S5409.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S5408, since the value of the type determination counter C2 newly stored in the special variation holding area is the value “19” corresponding to “2RN90”, in step S5410, 2RN90 After the flag is turned on, this process ends. In the type determination process, it is only necessary to be able to determine the jackpot type. For example, instead of determining whether the value corresponding to “16RS” having a large number of random values corresponding to winning matches the acquired random number value, It may be configured to determine whether the value corresponding to “2RN90” matches the acquired random number value.

  Next, the reach determination process in step S507 will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S5301, it is determined whether or not the first hit / no-go flag is set in the hit / no-go determination process performed immediately before. If an affirmative determination is made in step S5301, that is, if the jackpot is large in both the low probability state and the high probability state (a jackpot state always occurs), this processing is terminated.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S5301, that is, if a big hit state does not occur at least in a low probability state (there is a possibility of losing), a reach determination table is referred to in step S5302, and a new determination is made. It is determined whether or not the value of the fluctuation selection counter C3 stored in the special fluctuation holding area coincides with one of the values “0, 1” corresponding to “front / rear out of reach”. If the determination in step S5302 is affirmative, in step S5303, the front / rear flag indicating the occurrence of front / rear out of reach is turned on, and then the process ends.

  In the present embodiment, in addition to the reach random number storage area for storing the value of the variation selection counter C3, a separate front / rear flag is not provided, but information indicating that “rear / rear reach” is in the reach random number storage area. Is stored (overwritten). As described above, the reach random number storage area uses 1 byte. In step S5303, for example, “10101010” is set for the reach random number storage area. In the present embodiment, for convenience, the setting for the reach random number storage area will be referred to as turning on the front / rear flag.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S5302, the value of the fluctuation selection counter C3 newly stored in the special fluctuation holding area in consideration of the reach determination table in step S5304 corresponds to “reach other than forward / backward deviation”. It is determined whether or not the value matches any of the values “2 to 21”. If an affirmative determination is made in step S5304, the flag is turned on other than before and after in step S5305, and then the present process ends. Note that turning on the flags other than the front and rear here means that, for example, “11001100” is set in the reach random number storage area.

  If a negative determination is made in step S5304, that is, if the change display ends without complete reach, the process is terminated as it is. The pattern (the combination of “1” and “0”) set in the reach random number storage area in the reach determination process is a pattern that is not used when the value of the variation selection counter C3 is stored in the reach random number storage area. is there.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 13, in step S508 following step S507, a process for setting a starting command is performed. In the advance command, the fluctuation information stored on hold (predetermined information used for determining the contents of the fluctuation display) is triggered by either the first start winning device 33a or the second starting winning device 33b. And information indicating the results of the determination processing, the type determination processing, and the reach determination processing are included and output to the sub-control device 262 in the next external output processing (see step S201). .

  After the process of step S508, or when a negative determination is made in step S501 or step S502, in step S509, whether or not the game ball has won the first start winning device 33 is determined by the first start winning switch 224a. It discriminate | determines by the detection information of. If a negative determination is made in step S509, the process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made, in step S510, the value of the first hold counter Na that counts the number of hold of the variable display triggered by winning the first start winning device 33a is the upper limit value (in this embodiment, It is determined whether or not it is less than “4”). If a negative determination is made in step S510, the process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if a positive determination is made in step S510, the process proceeds to step S511, and the first hold counter Na is incremented by one.

  In the subsequent step S512, the values of the success / failure random number counter C1, the type determination counter C2 and the variation selection counter C3 are stored in a reserved area (a success / failure random number storage area, a winning type random number storage area, a reach random number storage area) in the special variation reservation area. ). After step S512, the process proceeds to step S513.

  In step S513, a success / failure determination process is performed to determine whether or not the value of the success / failure random number counter C1 newly stored in the special change reservation area is a value corresponding to the jackpot. The details of the success / failure determination process have already been described above.

  In the subsequent step S514, if it is determined in step S513 that the value of the success / failure random number counter C1 is a value corresponding to the jackpot, based on the value of the type determination counter C2 newly stored in the special variable holding area, the jackpot A first type determination process for determining the type is performed. In the present embodiment, a case where a big win is won in the winning lottery based on the winning in the first start winning device 33a, and a case where the big win is won in the winning lottery based on the winning in the second starting winning device 33b, Therefore, the distribution of the jackpot type to be given is different.

  Here, the first type determination processing in step S514 will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S5201, it is determined whether or not the first or second success / failure flag is set to ON in the previous / failure determination processing performed immediately before. If a negative determination is made in step S5201 (there is no possibility of a jackpot state), the process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S5201 (there is a possibility that a jackpot state may occur), in step S5202, the type determination counter newly stored in the special variation holding area is referred to by referring to the first type determination table. It is determined whether or not the value of C2 matches the value “0” corresponding to “16RS”. If an affirmative determination is made in step S5202, the process ends after the 16RS flag is turned on in step S5203.

  On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in step S5202, in step S5204, the value of the type determination counter C2 newly stored in the special variation holding area is set to a value corresponding to “8RN” in consideration of the first type determination table. It is determined whether or not it matches any of “12-17”. If an affirmative determination is made in step S5204, the process is terminated after the 8RN flag is turned on in step S5205.

  If a negative determination is made in step S5204, the value of the type determination counter C2 newly stored in the special variable holding area is set to a value corresponding to “2RS” in consideration of the first type determination table in step S5206. It is determined whether or not it matches any of “18, 19”. If an affirmative determination is made in step S5206, the process is terminated after the 2RS flag is turned on in step S5207. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S5206, the process is terminated after the 8RS flag is turned on in step S5208.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 13, in step S515 following step S514, if it is determined in step S513 that the value of the success / failure random number counter C1 is not a value corresponding to the jackpot, the fluctuation newly stored in the special fluctuation holding area A reach determination process for determining the type of reach is performed based on the value of the selection counter C3. Details of the reach determination process have already been described above.

  After step S515, a starting command setting process is performed in step S516, and this process is terminated. In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the first start winning device 33a or the second start winning device 33b, the value of the pass / fail random number counter C1 or the like is directly stored in the special variation holding area, and then the pass / fail determination process. The type determination process and the reach determination process are executed. However, the present invention is not particularly limited to such a configuration. For example, provisional storage areas (working areas) for temporarily storing these counter values when the values of the validity random number counter C1 are acquired are provided, and the information for determining whether or not the information is stored in the temporary storage area. After executing the determination process and the reach determination process, a configuration may be adopted in which the information is stored in the corresponding reserved area of the special fluctuation reserved area.

  Note that the process of extracting the value of the pass / fail random number counter C1 in steps S504 and S512 constitutes the discriminant value extraction process, and the value of the pass / fail random number counter C1 extracted in steps S504 and S512 is also stored in the special variable holding area. The process constitutes the discriminant value storage process. In addition, the process for determining whether or not the value of the pass / fail random number counter C1 in steps S505 and S513 (step S5101, step S5103, step S5105, and step S5107) is a value corresponding to winning constitutes the first pass / fail determination process. Then, the determination result is stored (the correspondence flag is set), and the processing of step S5102, step S5104, step S5106, and step S5108 constitutes the result storage processing.

  Next, the through gate passing process in step S305 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In step S601, whether or not the game ball has passed through the through gate 34 is determined based on detection information of the through gate switch 225. If a negative determination is made in step S601, the present process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S601, that is, if it is determined that the game ball has passed through the through gate 34, the number of suspensions of the variable display performed on the normal symbol display device 41 is counted in step S602. It is determined whether or not the value of the normal hold counter Nc is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment). If a negative determination is made here, this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S602, that is, if the passing of the game ball to the through gate 34 is confirmed and the value of the normal holding counter Nc <4, the process proceeds to step S603, where the normal holding counter Nc is incremented by one.

  In subsequent step S604, a random number related to the success or failure is acquired. Specifically, the value of the normal symbol random number counter C4 updated by the random number update process in step S303 is stored in the first area of the free storage area of the normal variation holding area of the RAM 503. Thereafter, the through gate passing process is terminated.

  FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing the NMI interrupt process. This process is executed by the CPU 501 of the main controller 261 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. By this NMI interruption, the state of the main controller 261 at the time of power-off is stored in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503.

  That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SK1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 542 to the NMI terminal of the CPU 501 in the main controller 261. Then, the CPU 501 interrupts the control being executed and starts the NMI interrupt process. In step S401, the CPU 501 stores the power interruption occurrence information in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503 as the setting of the power interruption occurrence information, and performs the NMI interruption process. finish.

  The above NMI interrupt processing is executed in the same manner in the payout control device 311, and information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the backup area 513 a of the RAM 513 by the NMI interrupt. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SK1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 542 to the NMI terminal of the CPU 511 in the payout control device 311 and the CPU 511 interrupts the control being executed. The NMI interrupt process in FIG. 12 is started. The contents are as described above.

  Next, the flow of main processing executed by the CPU 501 in the main controller 261 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This main process is started upon reset when power is turned on.

  First, in step S101, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed. Specifically, for example, 1 is set in order to set a predetermined value in the stack pointer and wait for the sub-side control device (sub-control device 262, payout control device 311, etc.) to become operable. Wait processing is performed for about 2 seconds. In the subsequent step S102, RAM access is permitted.

  Thereafter, data backup processing is executed for the RAM 503 in the CPU 501. That is, in step S103, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 323 provided in the power supply device 313 is pressed (ON), and if it is pressed, the process proceeds to step S112 to clear (erase) the backup data. To do. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 323 has not been pressed, it is determined in the subsequent step S104 whether or not occurrence information of power supply interruption is set in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503. Here, if it is not set, no backup data is stored, so in this case as well, the process proceeds to step S112. If power failure occurrence information is set in the backup area 503a, a RAM determination value is calculated in step S105, and in the subsequent step S106, whether or not the RAM determination value matches the RAM determination value stored when the power is turned off. That is, the effectiveness of the backup is determined. If the RAM determination value calculated here does not match the RAM determination value stored when the power is turned off, the backed up data has been destroyed, and in this case, the process also proceeds to step S112.

  In the process of step S112, an initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the sub control device 262, the payout control device 311 and the like. Thereafter, the process proceeds to RAM initialization processing (step S113 and the like). Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 503. Instead of the RAM determination value, it is possible to determine the effectiveness of backup based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 503 is correctly stored.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 323 when it is desired to return to the initial state when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall starts business. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 323 is ON, the process proceeds to a RAM initialization process (step S113, etc.). Similarly, when the information on occurrence of power interruption is not set, or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by a RAM determination value (checksum value or the like), the process proceeds to initialization processing of the RAM 503 (step S113 or the like). That is, the use area of the RAM 503 is cleared to 0 in step S113, and the initial value of the RAM 503 is set in subsequent step S114. Thereafter, interrupt permission is set in step S111, and the process proceeds to normal processing described later.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 323 has not been pressed (step S103: NO), it is a condition that the information on occurrence of power interruption is set and the RAM judgment value (checksum value etc.) is normal. In addition, the process at the time of power recovery (process at the time of power failure recovery) is executed. That is, in step S107, the stack pointer before the power interruption is restored, and in step S108, the information on the occurrence of the power interruption is cleared.

  In step S109, a command for returning the sub-side control device to the gaming state at the time of power-off is transmitted. In step S110, the used register is restored from the backup area 503a of the RAM 503. Thereafter, interrupt permission is set in step S111, and the process proceeds to normal processing described later.

  Next, the flow of normal processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In this normal process, the main process of the game is executed. As an outline, the processing of steps S201 to S211 is executed as a periodic processing with a period of 4 msec, and the counter update processing of steps S212 and S213 is executed with the remaining time.

  First, in step S201, a control signal based on the setting contents of the special display devices 43L and 43R and the start winning device 33 updated in the previous normal processing is transmitted to each device, and output data such as commands is sent to the sub-side. External output processing to be transmitted to each control device is executed.

  For example, when the decorative symbol display device 42 displays the variation of the decorative symbol, a variation pattern command, a symbol command, or the like is transmitted to the sub-control device 262. That is, the variation pattern command and the symbol command are output to the sub-control device 262 in order to cause the decorative symbol display device 42 to perform a display effect in accordance with the display performed on the first and second special display devices 43L and 43R. Command. On the other hand, the sub-control device 262 that has input the variation pattern command, the symbol command, etc. determines the variation mode (variation time, effect mode, etc.) of the decorative symbol display device 42 based on the various commands, and the variation mode. Is indicated to the display control device 45 so as to be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42 (variable display).

  For convenience, the variation pattern command and the like will be described here. The variation pattern command includes information for specifying the variation type of the decorative symbol such as normal reach, super reach, and premium reach. Note that the fluctuation pattern command and the like are originally 2-byte binary numbers (the same output method as the hold information command), but for convenience, they are expressed in hexadecimal numbers of every 4 bits. In the present embodiment, for example, in the normal mode and the latent mode, any one of “FF10”, “FF11”, “FF12”, “FF13”, “FF14”, “FF15”, and “FF16” is used as the variation pattern command. Is set. In the probability changing mode and the time reduction mode, “FD10”, “FD11”, “FD12”, “FD13”, “FD14”, “FD15”, and “FD16” are set. On the other hand, the sub-control device 262 stores the relationship between these variation pattern commands and the variation types of the decorative symbols in a table. Then, the sub-control device 262 determines a variation display effect pattern and the like based on the variation pattern command, and controls the display control device 45 and sound.

  Hereinafter, the variation type of the decorative symbol and the correspondence between the variation type and the variation pattern command will be described.

  Normal reach is a reach pattern that does not display any special effects other than the variation of the decorative design. Then, “FF11” or “FD11” is set in the variation pattern command corresponding to the normal reach according to the mode. In the probability variation mode and the time reduction mode, the variable display time is shortened compared to the normal mode and the latent accuracy mode even in various reach cases. For example, the variable display time from which the normal reach is derived is “15 seconds” in the normal mode and the latent accuracy mode, and “10 seconds” in the probability variation mode and the time reduction mode.

  Super Reach is a reach pattern in which characters and the like are displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42 in addition to the decorative symbol during the variation display of the decorative symbol (after the reach state is established), thereby giving the player a sense of expectation. is there. In this embodiment, three types of super reach SR1, SR2, and SR3 are prepared as super reach, and the variable display time is different for each type of super reach. Then, “FF12” or “FD12” is set as the fluctuation pattern command for the super reach SR1, “FF13” or “FD13” is set for the super reach SR2, and “FF14” or “FD14” is set for the super reach SR3. Is set.

  Premium reach is an effect that can be derived only when a big hit state occurs. During the decorative symbol variation display (after reaching the reach state), in addition to the decorative symbol, a character with a different pattern from the super reach is displayed. This is a reach pattern that makes the player have a sense of expectation. Two types of premium reach PR1 and PR2 are prepared for the premium reach of the present embodiment, and the variable display time is different for each type of premium reach. If the premium reach PR1, then “FF15” or “FD15” is set as the variation pattern command. If it is premium reach PR2, “FF16” or “FD16” is set.

  In addition, “FF10” or “FD10” is set as the variation pattern command corresponding to the mode for the variation pattern command corresponding to “completely out” that does not reach any reach state. In the present embodiment, the fluctuation display time that is completely off is set to “10 seconds” in the normal mode and the latent accuracy mode, and “6 seconds” in the accuracy variation mode and the time reduction mode.

  Further, the sub-control device 262 determines a stop symbol (combination of stop symbols) based on the symbol command, and displays it after the fluctuation time has elapsed. The symbol command is a command that causes the sub-control device 262 to determine a stop symbol, a combination of probability variation jackpot symbol, a combination of normal jackpot symbol, a combination of front / rear off symbol, a combination of symbols other than front / rear off symbol, a completely out symbol The five categories of combinations are designated. These divisions are indicated by, for example, “AA11”, “AA12”, “AA13”, “AA14”, “AA15”, and any of these is set as a symbol command. On the other hand, the sub-control device 262 stores the relationship between these commands and stop symbols in a table. Then, the sub-control device 262 stops displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the symbol command.

  Hereinafter, the stop symbol classification and the correspondence between the stop symbol and the symbol command will be described. If you win a promising jackpot ("16RS" and "8RS" that can be expected to increase game balls) (hereinafter also referred to as "probable jackpot with a ball"), or a normal jackpot ("8RN") where you can expect an increase in gaming balls. In the following, when the winning combination is also called “Normal jackpot with a ball”, the decorative symbol display device 42 is stopped and displayed with the combination of the decorative symbols with numerical patterns. It becomes. In the present embodiment, in the case of “probable big hit with a ball”, a probable big hit symbol that is a combination of decorative symbols made up of odd numbers 1, 3, 5, 7, or 9 or 2 , 4, 6 and 8, the variable display is stopped for any combination of the normal jackpot symbol, which is a combination of decorative symbols consisting of even-numbered slotted eyes. Usually, the variable display is stopped and displayed by the combination of the jackpot symbol.

  Then, “AA11” is set in the symbol command when there is a promising big hit with a ball, and “AA12” is set in the symbol command when there is a normal jackpot with a ball. Then, when “AA11” is set in the symbol command, the sub-control device 262 determines one of the symbol combinations consisting of any one of the first to ninth symbols as a stop symbol, and “AA12” "Is set, one of the combinations of symbols of any of 2, 4, 6 and 8 is determined as a stop symbol.

  The combination of back and forth symbols corresponds to the combination of back and forth symbols, where after reaching, the final stop symbol is stopped by one shift before and after the reach symbol. “AA13” is set in the symbol command. In the present embodiment, the stop mode corresponding to “2RS”, “2RN”, and “small hit” is also a combination of out-of-front and back symbols. The combination of symbols other than front / rear detachment corresponds to the “reach other than front / rear detachment” that occurs after reach occurs, and the final stop symbol stops other than before / after the reach symbol. “AA14” is set in the command. The combination of completely out symbols corresponds to “complete out” which does not even reach, and “AA15” is set in the symbol command corresponding to the combination of complete out symbols. In the present embodiment, when the decorative symbol display device 42 stops and displays a combination of symbols that are out of front and back, a combination of symbols other than front and back, and a combination of completely out symbols.

  As will be described in detail later, when “AA13” to “AA15” are set in the symbol command, the sub-control device 262 stops the combination of symbols stored in the counter buffer of the corresponding RAM 553. Determine as. In the present embodiment, three commands “AA13” to “AA15” are prepared as the symbol commands for removal. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, there is only one symbol command for removal, The sub-control device 262 may determine the combination of decorative symbols.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 10, in step S202, update of the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 is executed. More specifically, as with the other counters, the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are incremented by 1, and are cleared to 0 when the counter values reach the upper limit values (59 and 37 in this embodiment), respectively. To do. Then, the update values of the variation type counters CS 1 and CS 2 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 503.

  In the subsequent step S203, the prize ball counting signal received from the payout control device 311 is read. Next, in step S204, the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 311 is read.

  Thereafter, in step S205, a special display control process is executed. In this process, control related to the first and second special display devices 43L and 43R is performed, and determination of jackpot and setting of variable display in the special display devices 43L and 43R and the decorative symbol display device 42 are performed. Details of this special display control process will be described later.

  In step S206, a first variable winning device control process is executed. In this process, control related to the first variable winning device 32a is performed. In the present embodiment, when winning in the winning / losing lottery based on entering the first start winning device 33a, a big win state or a small win state in which the first variable winning device 32a is opened is derived. Yes. Details of the first variable winning device control process will be described later.

  In step S207, a second variable winning device control process is executed. In this process, control related to the second variable winning device 32b is performed. In the present embodiment, when the winning lottery based on the winning to the second start winning device 33b is won, a big win state or a small win state in which the second variable winning device 32b is opened is derived. Yes. Details of the second variable winning device control process will be described later.

  In step S208, normal display control processing is executed. In this process, control related to the normal symbol display device 41 is performed. Details of this normal display control processing will be described later.

  In step S209, a start winning device control process is executed. In this process, control related to the start winning device 33 is performed. Details of the start winning device control process will be described later.

  After that, in step S210, it is determined whether or not occurrence information of power interruption is set in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503. Here, if the occurrence information of the power interruption is not set in the backup area 503a, it is determined in step S211 whether or not the next normal process execution timing has been reached, that is, a predetermined time (4 msec in this example) from the start of the previous normal process. ) Or not. And if predetermined time has already passed, it will transfer to Step S201 and will repeat the processing after the above-mentioned Step S201.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed since the start of the previous normal process, the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are updated within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process. Repeatedly execute (step S212, step S213).

  That is, in step S212, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (599 in this example).

  In step S213, the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are updated (similar to step S202). Specifically, the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are incremented by 1, and are cleared to 0 when the counter values reach the maximum values (59 and 37 in this example). Then, the change values of the variation type counters CS 1 and CS 2 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 503.

  Here, since the execution time of each process of steps S201 to S210 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant but varies. Therefore, by repeatedly executing the update of the random number initial value counter CINI using the remaining time, the random number initial value counter CINI (that is, the initial value of the pass / fail random number counter C1) can be updated at random and similarly fluctuated. The type counters CS1 and CS2 can also be updated at random.

  Further, if the information on occurrence of power interruption is set in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503 (step S210: YES), the power is cut off, so that the processing after step S214 is performed as a power failure process at the time of power interruption. Is called. In the power failure process, first, the generation of each interrupt process is prohibited in step S214, the contents of each register used by the CPU 501 are saved in the stack area in step S215, and the value of the stack pointer is saved in the backup area 503a in step S216. To remember.

  Thereafter, in step S217, a power-off notification command indicating that the power has been cut off is transmitted to other control devices (such as the payout control device 311). In step S218, a RAM determination value is calculated and stored in the backup area 503a. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 503. Thereafter, the RAM access is prohibited in step S219, and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut down and the processing cannot be executed.

  The process in step S210 is performed at the end of a series of processes corresponding to the game state change performed in steps S201 to S209, or at the end of one cycle of the processes in steps S212 and S213 performed within the remaining time. It is executed at the timing. Therefore, in the normal process of the main controller 261, the occurrence information of the power interruption is confirmed at the end of each process, so that the amount of data stored in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503 is less than that in the middle of each process. And can be easily memorized. Further, when returning to the state before power-off, since the amount of data stored in the backup area 503a is small, it can be easily restored and the processing load of the main control device 261 can be reduced. . Furthermore, since the generation of interrupt processing is prohibited before the data is stored (step S214), it is possible to prevent data from being changed when the power is shut off, and to reliably store the state before the power is shut off. .

  Next, the special display control process of step S205 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. First, in step S801, the winning situation storage area described later in detail is referred to, and it is determined whether or not the current state is a state other than the big hit state or the small hit state. During the jackpot state, an opening period from when the display mode corresponding to the jackpot is stopped and displayed on the specific display devices 43L and 43R until the first or second variable winning device 32a or 32b is opened, A special display device after the round period in which the first or second variable winning device 32a, 32b is opened, the interval period in which the first or second variable winning device 32a, 32b is closed, and the final round There is an ending period until the change display of 43L and 43R can be started. During the small hit state, an opening period from when the display mode corresponding to the small hit on the special display devices 43L and 43R is stopped and displayed until the first or second variable winning device 32a or 32b is opened, A special display device after the round period in which the first or second variable winning device 32a, 32b is opened, the interval period in which the first or second variable winning device 32a, 32b is closed, and the final round There is an ending period until the change display of 43L and 43R can be started.

  In the hit state storage area of the present embodiment, “0” is stored in a state other than the big hit state or the small hit state, and in the big hit state or the small hit state, “1” is stored during the opening period and the interval period. “2” is stored during the round period, and “3” is stored during the ending period. That is, in the step S801, it is determined whether or not “0” is stored in the winning status storage area, and whether or not the big hit state or the small hit state is being determined. It should be noted that the numerical value such as “0” to “3” is stored in the hit status storage area for convenience, and the hit status storage area actually uses 2 bytes.

  If a negative determination is made in step S801, that is, if the big hit state or the small hit state is in effect, the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S801, details will be described later in step S802. In view of the setting state of the special figure display flag to be determined, it is determined whether or not the first or second special display device 43L, 43R (decorative symbol display device 42) is in a variable display. Specifically, when the special figure display flag is on, it is considered that the variable display is being performed, and when the special figure display flag is off, it is considered that the variable display is being stopped. . As will be described in detail later, the special figure display flag is turned on when starting the variable display of the first and second special display devices 43L and 43R and the first and second special display devices 43L and 43R. Turned off when the variable display is stopped.

  If a negative determination is made in step S802, that is, if neither the big hit state or the small hit state is in addition to the fluctuation display, the process proceeds to step S803, and the ball is entered into the second start winning device 33b as an opportunity. It is determined whether or not the value of the second hold counter Nb that counts the number of hold of the change display (second change display) is greater than zero.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S803, that is, if at least one second variation display is held, 1 is subtracted from the second hold counter Nb in step S804. In the present embodiment, when the second variation display is suspended and stored by the determination processing in step S803, the second variation display is executed without executing the first variation display. In other words, even when the first variation display is stored on hold earlier than the second variation display, the second variation display is preferentially digested (the first variation display is postponed). ing.

  In a succeeding step S805, a process for shifting the data stored in the second special variation holding area is executed. This data shift process is a process for sequentially shifting the data stored in the holding first to fourth areas of the second special variable holding area to the execution area side. The holding first area → the execution area, the holding second Data in each area is shifted, such as area → holding first area, holding third area → holding second area, holding fourth area → holding third area. After step S805, in step S806, a process for causing the variation specifying lamp 40 to emit red light is performed. Thereafter, in step S807, a variable display setting process, which will be described in detail later, is performed, and then this process is terminated.

  In addition, when a negative determination is made in step S803, that is, when no second variation display is stored on hold, a variation display triggered by entering the first start winning device 33a (step S808) It is determined whether or not a first hold counter Na that counts the number of holds in the first variation display) is greater than zero. If a negative determination is made in step S808, the present process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S808, 1 is subtracted from the first hold counter Na in step S809. In a succeeding step S810, a process for shifting the data stored in the first special variation holding area is executed. This data shift process is a process for sequentially shifting the data stored in the holding first to fourth areas of the first special variable holding area to the execution area side. The holding first area → the execution area, the holding second Data in each area is shifted, such as area → holding first area, holding third area → holding second area, holding fourth area → holding third area. After step S810, in step S811, a process for causing the variation specifying lamp 40 to emit blue light is performed. Then, after performing the variable display setting process in step S807, this process is terminated. In the present embodiment, the execution area of the special variable reservation area is one, and the data stored in the first special variable reservation area and the second special variable reservation area are displayed when the variable display based on the data is performed. Therefore, it is shifted to a common execution area.

  Here, details of the variable display setting process in step S807 will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S901, a mode storage area to be described later is referred to in detail to determine whether or not a high probability state (probability change mode or latent probability mode) is set. In the mode storage area, discrimination information for discriminating the game mode is stored. In the present embodiment, the mode storage area stores any value of “11”, “12”, “21”, “22”, “11” corresponds to the normal mode, and “12”. Corresponds to the time reduction mode, “21” corresponds to the probability variation mode, and “22” corresponds to the latent probability mode. That is, in step S901, it is determined whether or not a high probability state is obtained by determining whether “21” or “22” is stored in the mode storage area.

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S901, that is, in the case of a high probability state (probability change mode, latent probability mode), in step S902, the success / failure random number storage area of the execution area of the special variable hold area is referred to, It is determined whether or not one of the first and second success / failure flags (see the success / failure determination process in FIG. 14) is set to ON. If an affirmative determination is made in step S902, that is, if it is determined that a big win is won in the high-probability state, the process proceeds to step S904.

  If a negative determination is made in step S901, that is, if the low probability state (normal mode, time reduction mode) is set, in step S903, whether or not the first success / failure flag is turned on in consideration of the success / failure random number storage area. Determine whether or not. If an affirmative determination is made in step S903, that is, if it is determined that a big win is won in the winning lottery in a low probability state, the process proceeds to step S904.

  In step S904, a jackpot confirmation flag indicating that the occurrence of the jackpot state has been confirmed is set on. In the present embodiment, storing a value corresponding to the fact that the occurrence of the jackpot state is confirmed in the random number storage area is referred to as turning on the jackpot confirmation flag.

  In the following step S905, whether or not the second variation flag is set to ON, that is, whether or not the second variation flag is turned on in consideration of the variation storage area of the execution area of the special variation suspension area, is displayed to the second start winning device 33b. It is determined whether or not it is the second variation display for teaching the result of the lottery determination with the entry of the ball. If an affirmative determination is made in step S905, the 16RS flag (see the type determination process in FIGS. 15 and 16) is set to ON in step S906 in consideration of the winning type random number storage area in the execution area of the special variable hold area. It is determined whether or not it has been done.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S906, that is, if "16RS", a 16RS pattern setting process (a process for setting a variation pattern command and a symbol command) is performed in step S907. The 16RS pattern setting process is a process for executing fluctuation display for teaching the occurrence of “16RS”, and is based on the values of the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 503. The variation patterns (variation display time, effect pattern, etc.) of the display devices 43L and 43R and the decorative symbol display device 42 are determined, and the variation pattern command and the symbol command are set based on the determination and various flags. The relationship between the numerical value of the first variation type counter CS1 and the reach pattern and the relationship between the numerical value of the second variation type counter CS2 and the variation time are defined in advance by a table or the like. After step S907, the process proceeds to step S931 described later.

  If a negative determination is made in step S906, it is determined in step S908 whether or not the 8RS flag is set on in consideration of the winning type random number storage area in the execution area of the special variable holding area. If an affirmative determination is made in step S908, that is, if “8RS”, 8RS pattern setting processing is performed in step S909. After step S909, the process proceeds to step S931.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S908, it is determined in step S910 whether the 2RN30 flag is set on. If an affirmative determination is made in step S910, a 2RN30 pattern setting process is performed in step S911. After step S911, the process proceeds to step S931.

  Further, if a negative determination is made in step S910, it is determined in step S912 whether or not the 2RN60 flag is set on. If an affirmative determination is made in step S912, a 2RN60 pattern setting process is performed in step S913. After step S913, the process proceeds to step S931.

  In addition, if a negative determination is made in step S912, that is, if the 2RN90 flag is set on, a 2RN90 pattern setting process is performed in step S914. After step S914, the process proceeds to step S931.

  In addition, when a negative determination is made in step S905, that is, when the variation display performed this time is the first variation display for teaching the result of the lottery determination with the ball entering the first start winning device 33a. In step S915, it is determined whether or not the 16RS flag is set on in consideration of the winning type random number storage area in the execution area of the special variable suspension area.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S915, a 16RS pattern setting process is performed in step S916. After step S916, the process proceeds to step S931 described later.

  If a negative determination is made in step S915, it is determined in step S917 whether or not the 8RS flag is set on in consideration of the winning type random number storage area in the execution area of the special variable holding area. If an affirmative determination is made in step S917, that is, if “8RS”, 8RS pattern setting processing is performed in step S918. After step S918, the process proceeds to step S931.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S917, it is determined in step S919 whether or not the 8RN flag is set on. If an affirmative determination is made in step S919, an 8RN pattern setting process is performed in step S920. After step S920, the process proceeds to step S931.

  Furthermore, if a negative determination is made in step S919, that is, if the 2RS flag is set on, a 2RS pattern setting process is performed in step S921. After step S921, the process proceeds to step S931.

  Also, if a negative determination is made in step S902, that is, if the jackpot is not won in the high probability state, in step S922, the success / failure random number storage area of the execution area of the special variable holding area is considered, and the first or It is determined whether or not the second small hit flag is set on. If an affirmative determination is made in step S922, that is, if it is determined that the winning lottery is won in the high-probability state, a small amount indicating that the occurrence of the small hit state is confirmed in step S923. Set the hit confirmation flag on. In the present embodiment, storing a value corresponding to confirming the occurrence of the small hit state in the random number storage area is referred to as turning on the small hit determination flag. Thereafter, in step S924, a small hit pattern setting process is performed, and then the process proceeds to step S931.

  If a negative determination is made in step S903, that is, if the jackpot is not won in the low probability state, in step S925, the success / failure random number storage area of the execution area of the special variable holding area is considered, and the first small It is determined whether or not the hit flag is on. If an affirmative determination is made in step S925, that is, if it is determined that a small win has been won in the winning lottery in a low probability state, a small hit determination flag is set on in step S923, and in step S924 After performing the small hit pattern setting process, the process proceeds to step S931.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S922 or step S925, that is, if neither big win nor small win is found, in step S926, the reach random number storage area of the execution area of the special variable holding area is taken into consideration, and the front and rear flags (FIG. It is determined whether or not (see 17 reach determination processing) is ON. When an affirmative determination is made in step S926, that is, in the case of “rearward / rearward reach”, a front / rear reach pattern setting process is performed in step S927, and then the process proceeds to step S931.

  If a negative determination is made in step S926, in step S928, the reach random number storage area of the execution area of the special variable holding area is taken into consideration, and it is determined whether or not the other than front and rear flags are on. If an affirmative determination is made in step S928, that is, if “reach other than front / rear out”, a reach pattern setting process other than front / rear is performed in step S929, and then the process proceeds to step S931.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S928, that is, if it is “completely off”, a deviation variation pattern setting process is performed in step S930, and then the process proceeds to step S931.

  In step S931, a special figure display flag indicating whether or not the special display devices 43L and 43R are performing variable display is set on. Thereby, it is shown that the condition for performing the switching display (variation display) is established in the special display devices 43L and 43R. In the subsequent step S932, a special figure display timer for measuring the variation time (the remaining time of variation display) in the special display devices 43L and 43R is set. The special figure display timer is considered when determining whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variable display.

  In addition, the value corresponding to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 is set as the variation display time of the special display devices 43L and 43R in the present embodiment. Based on the setting of the special figure display timer, when a control signal for starting the switching display (variation display) is output to the special display devices 43L and 43R in the next external output process of the normal process. In the special display devices 43L and 43R, switching display (variation display) is started. The sub-control device 262 that has received the variation pattern command and the symbol command starts variation display in the decorative symbol display device 42 based on the variation pattern command simultaneously with the start of variation of the special display devices 43L and 43R. Simultaneously with the stop display of 43L and 43R, the variable display on the decorative symbol display device 42 is stopped and displayed by a combination of symbols based on the symbol command. After step S932 ends, the variable display setting process ends.

  In the present embodiment, in the start winning process, the process of acquiring the value of the success / failure random number counter C1 in steps S504 and S512 and storing it in the special variable hold area, the success / failure determination process in steps S505 and 513, and the variable display setting. In the process, the winning / raising lottery is constituted by the processing of steps S901 to S903, step S922, and step S925 for determining whether or not the winning / failure flag and the small hit flag are determined based on the situation at that time. In addition, the second determination processing is configured by the processing in steps S901 to S903, S922, and S925, and the like. The variable display setting process is configured by the processes of step S927, step S929, and step S930.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 19, if an affirmative determination is made in step S <b> 802, that is, if the variable display is being performed, the process proceeds to step S <b> 812, and a special figure display timer is subtracted. Each time this process is performed, the value of the special figure display timer is subtracted by 4 msec. For example, when the fluctuation time is 10 seconds (10000 msec), “2500” is set for the special figure display timer, and 1 is subtracted every 4 msec.

  Subsequently, the process proceeds to step S813, and it is determined whether or not a predetermined fluctuation time has elapsed with reference to the value of the special figure display timer after the subtraction. At this time, when a predetermined fluctuation time has elapsed, that is, when the value of the special figure display timer becomes “0”, an affirmative determination is made in step S813.

  When a negative determination is made in step S813, in step S817, a switching display setting for continuously performing switching display (variable display) of the special display devices 43L and 43R is performed, and this process is terminated. Based on the setting contents of the switching display setting, a control signal for switching display is output to the special display devices 43L and 43R in the external output processing in the next normal processing. Thereby, the switching display (variable display) of the special display devices 43L and 43R is realized at the timing of the special display control process, that is, every 4 ms.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S813, the special figure display flag is turned off in step S814, and stop display setting is performed to perform stop display in the special display devices 43L and 43R in step S815. Based on the setting contents of the stop display setting, a control signal for performing stop display is output to the special display devices 43L and 42R in the external output process in the next normal process. That is, the stop display is performed in a stop mode corresponding to each jackpot type or loss. In addition, a control signal to stop display of the decorative symbol display device 42 is also output to the sub-control device 262. Thereby, the synchronization of the stop timings of the special display devices 43L and 42R and the decorative symbol display device 42 is ensured. However, since the stop mode of the decorative symbol display device 42 has already been determined by the sub-control device 262 based on the symbol command or the variation pattern command output at the start of the variable display, information regarding the stop mode of the decorative symbol display device 42 is again obtained. There is no need to add. Again, the display is mainly the stop display by the special display devices 43L and 43R, and the display of the decorative symbols by the decorative symbol display device 42 is only auxiliary (for production). Yes.

  Subsequently, in step S816, after performing the discrimination information setting process for initializing the hit state and measuring the period of the time reduction mode, this process is terminated. Here, the discrimination information setting process will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S1001, the success / failure random number storage area of the execution area of the special variable suspension area is referred to, and it is determined whether or not the jackpot determination flag is set on. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1001, it is determined in step S1002 whether or not the 16RS flag is set on in consideration of the winning type random number storage area of the execution area of the special variable holding area.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1002, “16” is set in a round number counter for determining the number of rounds executed during the jackpot state (the number of times the variable winning device 32 is opened) in step S1003. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1002, it is determined in step S1004 whether the 2RS flag or the 2RN flag (2RN30, 2RN60, 2RN90) is set on.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1004, that is, if the 8RS flag or the 8RN flag is set to ON, “8” is set to the round number counter in step S1005. After step S1003 or step S1005, the process proceeds to step S1006.

  In step S1006, “1” is set for the winning situation storage area. In the subsequent step S1007, a value “2000” corresponding to an opening period of, for example, 8 seconds is set for a special variable timer used for the control in the winning state (opening / closing control of the first and second variable winning devices 32a and 32b). Set. Subsequently, in step S1008, 8 pieces that are the maximum number of balls entered per round are calculated with respect to a prize counter for counting the number of game balls that have entered the first and second variable prize-winning devices 32a and 32b. “8” shown is set. It should be noted that the value of the winning counter indicates whether the first and second variable winning devices 32a and 32b have been entered in the first and second count switches 223a during the switch reading process (see FIG. 11) of the timer interrupt process. 223b, and 1 is subtracted when it is determined that there is a ball entering the first and second variable winning devices 32a and 32b.

  Then, in step S1009, an opening command for notifying the sub-control device 262 of the start of the hit state is set. The opening command includes hit type information and the like, and the sub-control device 262 can grasp the total number of rounds in the win state. After step S1009, this process ends.

  In addition, in the jackpot state, the promotion effect of the appearance of the jackpot type, etc. (for example, when an even number of blue eyes are stopped and displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42, “8RS” or “16RS” is won in the jackpot state immediately after Or instructing that “16RS” has been won in the jackpot state immediately after the odd symbol is stopped and displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42). .

  If a negative determination is made in step S1001, that is, if it is determined that the jackpot is not a big hit, the process proceeds to step S1010. In step S1010, it is determined whether or not the small hit determination flag is set to ON by referring to the execution random number storage area in the execution area of the special variable holding area.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1010 (small hit), or an affirmative determination is made in step S1004 (“2RS” or “2RN”), “2” is set in the round number counter in step S1011. Set. After step S1011, in step S1012, "1" is set for the winning situation storage area. In subsequent step S1013, for example, a value “500” corresponding to an opening period of 2 seconds is set for the special variable timer, in step S1014, “8” is set for the winning counter, and in step S1015, the opening is performed. Set the command. Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  If neither the big hit nor the small win is determined and a negative determination is made in step S1010, whether or not “12” is stored in the mode storage area in step S1016, that is, the time reduction mode is set. It is determined whether or not. If a negative determination is made in step S1016, the present process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1016, in step S1017, 1 is subtracted from the value of the variation counter in order to measure the duration of the time reduction mode. As will be described in detail later, in the present embodiment, at the end of the big hit state of “8RN”, “2RN30”, “2RN60”, and “2RN90”, the fluctuation display corresponding to the period of the time reduction mode is shown for each fluctuation counter. Each time the variable display of the special display devices 43L and 43R (decorative symbol display device 42) is performed once, 1 is subtracted in step S1010.

  In a succeeding step S1018, it is determined whether or not the value of the variation counter is “0”. If a negative determination is made in step S1018, that is, the variation display of the special display devices 43L and 43R (decorated symbol display device 42) for the specified number of times set as the period of the time reduction mode is still performed at the end of the hit state. If not, the process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1018, “11” indicating the normal mode is set in the mode storage area in step S1019. That is, when the variable display is performed a specified number of times in the special display devices 43L and 43R, the time reduction mode ends and the mode is shifted to the normal mode. After step S1019, in step S1020, a short-time end command is set to notify the sub-control device 262 of the end of the time reduction mode, and then the process ends. In the present embodiment, the process for performing the initial setting for the small hit state and the process for performing the initial setting for the 2RS and 2RN big hit states are shared, but may be performed separately.

  Next, the first variable winning device control process for opening and closing the first variable winning device 32a in step S206 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S1201, it is determined whether or not the value set in the winning situation storage area is “0”, thereby determining whether the state is a state other than the big hit state or the small hit state. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1201, that is, if the jackpot state or the jackpot state is not reached, this processing is terminated as it is. Incidentally, at the start of the big hit state or the small hit state, “1” is set in the hit state storage area in the discrimination information setting process.

  On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in step S1201, that is, when the big hit state or the small hit state is in effect (when any of “1” to “3” is set in the hit state storage area), step S1202 is performed. In step S1, it is determined whether or not the first variation flag is turned on in the execution area of the special variation holding area. If a negative determination is made in step S1202, the present process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1202, the process proceeds to step S1203 and 1 is subtracted from the value of the special variable timer. Incidentally, “2000” or “500” is set in the special variable timer in the discrimination information setting process at the start of the big hit state or the small hit state.

  In a succeeding step S1204, it is determined whether or not the value of the special variable timer is “0”. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1204, it is determined in step S1205 whether or not “1” is set in the winning situation storage area.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1205, “2” is set for the winning situation storage area in step S1206. In a succeeding step S1207, it is determined whether or not there is a big hit with a ball. Here, any of “16RS”, “8RS”, and “8RN”, which is a big hit with a ball that can be awarded when winning in the winning lottery performed with the first start winning device 33a as a trigger. It is determined whether or not it exists (whether it is other than “2RS”).

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1207, in step S1208, a value “7500” corresponding to the time (30 seconds) for which the first variable winning device 32a is kept open is set in the special variable timer. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1207, in step S1209, the value “100” corresponding to the time (0.4 seconds) for maintaining the open state of the first variable winning device 32a for the special variable timer. Set.

  After step S1208 or step S1209, in step S1210, the first variable winning device 32a is opened, and in step S1211, the sub-control device 262 is notified of information indicating that a round is to be started. Set the command. Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1205, it is determined in step S1212 whether or not “3” is set in the hit situation storage area. As will be described in detail later, when all rounds in the big hit state or the small hit state are completed and the ending period is started, “3” is set for the hit state storage area. If a negative determination is made in step S1212, that is, if it is not yet time to end the big hit state or the small hit state, 1 is subtracted from the value of the round number counter in step S1213.

  In a succeeding step S1214, it is determined whether or not the value of the round number counter is “0”. If a negative determination is made in step S1214, that is, if there is still a round to be executed, the process proceeds to step S1215, and “1” is set for the hit situation storage area. Thereafter, in step S1216, it is determined whether or not there is a big hit with a ball.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1216, in step S1217, a value “1000” corresponding to the interval time (4 seconds) is set in the special variable timer. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1216, a value “250” corresponding to the interval time (1 second) is set in the special variable timer in step S1218.

  After step S1217 or step S1218, in step S1219, “8” is set to the winning counter. Further, in step S1220, a process for closing the first variable winning device 32a is performed, and in step S1221, an interval command for informing the sub-control device 262 that the interval is to be started is set. Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1204, that is, if there remains a time (opening time or closing time) for maintaining the open state or the closed state of the first variable winning device 32a, the process proceeds to step S1222. Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the winning counter for measuring the number of balls entered into the first variable winning device 32a is “0”. The winning counter is set to “8”, which is the upper limit (prescribed number) of winnings per round at the start of the big win state or the small win state and at the start of the interval. Then, 1 is subtracted every time one game ball enters the first variable winning device 32a.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1222, this process ends. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1222, that is, if a round end opportunity has come without waiting for the set period of the round to pass, the process proceeds to step S1213. As a result, if eight game balls have entered the variable winning device 32 during one round, the round will end immediately at that point even if the opening period of 30 seconds has not elapsed. Become.

  Further, when an affirmative determination is made in step S1214, that is, when all rounds in the big hit state or the small hit state are exhausted, the process proceeds to step S1223, and “3” is set for the hit state storage area. After step S1223, in step S1224, it is determined whether or not there is a big hit with a ball. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1224, a value “2500” corresponding to the ending time (10 seconds) is set in the special variable timer in step S1225. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1224, a value “250” corresponding to the ending time (1 second) is set in the special variable timer in step S1226.

  After step S1225 or step S1226, “7” is set to the winning counter in step S1227. Note that when the process of setting the ending after step S1223 is performed in the flow after the positive determination is made in step S1222, the value of the winning counter is “0”. If the value of the winning counter is set to “0” as it is at the start of the ending period, an affirmative determination is made in step S1222 in the first variable winning device control process after 4 msec, so that the ending period is completed. Can not. For this reason, a tentative numerical value other than “0” (“7” in this example) is entered in the winning counter in step S1227 to complete the ending period. Of course, the ending period may be completed by another method.

  After step S1227, in step S1228, the first variable winning device 32a is closed, and in subsequent step S1229, an ending command is transmitted to inform the sub-control device 262 that ending is to be started. . Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1212, that is, if it is time to end the jackpot state after the ending period ends, the process proceeds to step S1230 to perform end setting processing. In the end setting process, a mode storage area and a variation counter are set.

  Here, the end setting process will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S1401, it is determined whether or not the small hit determination flag is set to ON by referring to the execution random number storage area of the execution area of the special variable suspension area. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1401, this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1401, in step S1402, the winning type random number storage area of the execution area of the special variable holding area is referred to and it is determined whether or not the 8RN flag is set on.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1402, a value “12” corresponding to the time reduction mode is set in the mode storage area in step S1403. As a result, the time reduction mode is given after the end of the big hit state.

  In the subsequent step S1404, “90” is set to the variation counter. The variation counter is a display of variation for a specified number of times set as the period of the time reduction mode when “12” is set in the mode storage area, that is, when the time reduction mode is started. It is for grasping. After step S1404, in step S1415, a short time start command for notifying the sub-control device 262 of the start of the time reduction mode is set. Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1402, it is determined in step S1405 whether or not the 2RN90 flag is set on with reference to the winning type random number storage area in the execution area. When an affirmative determination is made in step S1405, the process proceeds to step S1403, as in the case where the 8RN flag is set on.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1405, it is determined in step S1406 whether or not the 2RN60 flag is set on. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1406, “12” is set in the mode storage area in step S1407, “60” is set in the variation counter in step S1408, and a time reduction start command is set in step S1415. After this is set, this process ends.

  Furthermore, if a negative determination is made in step S1406, it is determined in step S1409 whether or not the 2RN30 flag is set on. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1409, “12” is set in the mode storage area in step S1410, “30” is set in the variation counter in step S1411, and a time reduction start command is set in step S1415. After this is set, this process ends.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1409, it is determined in step S1412 whether the 2RS flag is set on. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1412, "22" is set in the mode storage area in step S1413. As a result, the latent mode is given after the end of the big hit state. After step S1413, in step S1416, a latent probability start command for notifying the sub control device 262 of the start of the latent probability mode is set. Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1412, "21" is set in the mode storage area in step S1414. As a result, the probability variation mode is given after the end of the big hit state. After step S1414, in step S1417, a probability change start command is set to notify the sub control device 262 of the start of the probability change mode. Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 22, after step S1230, in step S1231, “0” indicating that the hit state storage area is not the big hit state or the small hit state is set. Thereafter, in step S1232, a hit end command is transmitted to inform the sub-control device 262 that the big hit state or the small hit state is to be ended, and then this processing is ended. The hit end command includes the number information of the variation counter set in the end setting process.

  Note that the second variable prize-winning device control process in step S207 of the normal process (see FIG. 10) is basically the second variable prize-winning device 32b as the target of the opening / closing control with respect to the first variable prize-winning device control process. This is executed when the second variation flag is set on, and the only difference is whether or not it is 16RS or 8RS when determining whether or not it is a big hit with a ball. To do.

  Next, the normal display control process of step S208 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S2101, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol display flag indicating whether or not the normal symbol display device 41 is performing variable display is ON. When the normal figure display flag is on, it is considered that the normal symbol display device 41 is in a variable display.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2101, the process proceeds to step S2102, and it is determined whether or not the value of the normal hold counter Nc is greater than zero. At this time, if the value of the normal hold counter Nc is 0, this processing is terminated as it is.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2102, that is, if no normal symbol variation display is held, this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2102, 1 is subtracted from the normal hold counter Nc in step S2103.

  In a succeeding step S2104, a process for shifting the data stored in the normal variation holding area is executed. This data shift process is a process for sequentially shifting the data stored in the holding first to fourth areas of the normally variable holding area to the execution area side. The holding first area → the execution area, the holding second area → The data in each area is shifted such as the first hold area, the third hold area → the second hold area, the fourth hold area → the third hold area.

  Thereafter, in step S2105, normal symbol variation setting processing for setting and starting normal symbol variation display on the ordinary symbol display device 41 is executed.

  Here, the common map variation setting process will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S2301, the normal symbol display flag indicating that the normal symbol change display is being performed on the normal symbol display device 41 is set to ON. In subsequent step S2302, the winning situation storage area is referred to, and it is determined whether or not “0” is stored, that is, whether the current state is a state other than the big hit state or the small hit state. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3202, that is, if neither the big hit state nor the small hit state is set, whether or not a value of “12” or “21” is stored in the mode storage area in step S2303. That is, it is determined whether or not it is a high pitched state (time reduction mode or probability variation mode).

  If the determination in step S2303 is affirmative, in step S2304, the normal symbol change display time is set to the normal symbol display timer for measuring the change time (remaining time) of the change display performed in the normal symbol display device 41. “100” is set to 0.4 seconds.

  Thereafter, in step S2305, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol random number counter C4 in the execution area of the normal variation holding area is “0”. It should be noted that in the high pitching state, the winning is made when the value of the normal symbol random number counter C4 taking a value in the range of “0 to 99” is “1 to 99”.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2305, that is, if a winning ballot support lottery indicating whether or not the second start winning device 33b is to be opened is won, it is determined in step S2306 that the winning ball winning support lottery has been won. Turn on the indicated entry support flag. After step S2306 or when an affirmative determination is made in step S2305, this process ends.

  In addition, when a negative determination is made in step S2302 or step S2303, that is, in the case of a big hit state, a small hit state, or a low entry state, in step S2307, a normal symbol is displayed with respect to the general symbol display timer. “2000” is set in order to set the variable display time of 8 seconds. Further, in step S2308, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol random number counter C4 in the execution area of the normal variation holding area is “1”. In the low entry state, the winning symbol is won when the value of the normal symbol random number counter C4 taking a value in the range of “0 to 99” is “1”.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S2308, that is, if the winning support lottery is won, in step S2309, the incoming support flag indicating that the winning support lottery has been won is set on. After step S2309 or when a negative determination is made in step S2308, this process ends.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 24, after step S2105, the present process is terminated. If the control signal for starting the variable display is output to the normal symbol display device 41 in the next external output processing of the normal processing based on the setting in the normal symbol variation setting processing, the normal symbol display device In 41, the variable display is started. As described above, the normal symbol display device 41 is configured to display “O” or “X” as the normal symbol. If the displayed symbol is “O”, “X” and “X” are displayed. If so, it is switched (changed) to “○”.

  If the determination in step S2101 is affirmative, that is, if the normal symbol display device 41 is performing variable display, the process advances to step S2106 to perform a process of subtracting the general symbol display timer. Each time this processing is performed once, the count value of the general-purpose display timer is decremented by one.

  In step S2107, it is determined whether or not the count value of the normal display timer is “0”, that is, whether or not the variation time has elapsed. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2107, the normal symbol display flag is turned off in step S2108, and a normal symbol stop display setting for performing stop display on the normal symbol display device 41 is performed in step S2109. Then, based on the setting contents of the general symbol stop display setting, a control signal for performing a stop display is output to the normal symbol display device 41 in the next external output processing in the normal processing. That is, when winning (when the entry support flag is set to ON), the “○” symbol (winning symbol) is stopped (for example, lit only for a few seconds), and when it is off, “×” is displayed. Stop displaying symbols.

  Subsequently, the process proceeds to step S2110 to perform a general-purpose discrimination information setting process, and this process ends. Here, the common figure discrimination information setting process will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S2401, it is determined whether or not the entrance support flag is set on. If a negative determination is made in step S2401, this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2401, in step S2402, a normal variable flag for determining whether or not the second start winning device 33b is in an open state is set on.

  In a succeeding step S2403, it is determined whether or not any one of “12, 21” is stored in the mode storage area, that is, whether or not it is a high pitching state. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2403, in step S2404, the opening time of the second start winning device 33b is set to 4 with respect to the normal variable timer for measuring the opening time (remaining time) of the second start winning device 33b. Set "1000" to seconds.

  Furthermore, in step S2405, “3” is set to open the second start winning device 33b three times with respect to the opening number counter for counting the number of times (the remaining number of times) the second starting winning device 33b is opened. After step S2405, the pitch support flag is turned off in step S2408, and the flag during the support period is turned on in step S2409. Furthermore, in step S2410, the second start winning device 33b is set to be in an open state, and then this process is terminated.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2403, that is, if there is a low pitching state, in step S2406, the opening time of the second start winning device 33b is set to 0.4 seconds with respect to the normal variable timer. “100” is set. In step S2407, “1” is set to the opening number counter so that the second start winning device 33b is opened once. After step S2407, the pitch support flag is turned off in step S2408, the flag during the support period is turned on in step S2409, and the second start winning device 33b is set in the open state in step S2410. This process ends.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 24, if a negative determination is made in step S2107, in step S2111 a switching display setting for continuously performing switching display (variable display) of the normal symbol display device 41 is performed, and this processing is performed. finish. Based on the setting contents of the switching display setting, a control signal for performing switching display is output to the normal symbol display device 41 in the external output processing in the next normal processing. Specifically, if the current lighting is “◯”, “×” is displayed, and if “×”, the display is switched to “◯”. Thereby, the normal display control processing timing, that is, the switching display (variation display) of the normal symbol display device 41 is realized every 4 ms.

  Next, the start winning device control process of step S209 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S2201, it is determined whether or not the support period flag is on. If a negative determination is made in step S2201, this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2201, 1 is subtracted from the value of the normal variable timer in step S2202. In the following step S2203, it is determined whether or not the normal variable flag is on. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2203, that is, if the second start winning device 33b is in the open state, it is determined in step S2204 whether the value of the normal variable timer is “0”. If a negative determination is made in step S2204, that is, if the predetermined opening time of the second starting prize-winning device 33b has not yet elapsed, this processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2204, the process proceeds to step S2205, and the normal variable flag is turned off. In subsequent step S2206, 1 is subtracted from the value of the number-of-opening counter, and in step S2207, setting is made to close the second start winning device 33b.

  Thereafter, in step S2208, it is determined whether or not the value of the number-of-releases counter is “0”. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2208, the flag during the support period is turned off in step S2209, and then this process ends.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S2208, that is, the winning entry support lottery is performed in the probability variation mode or the time reduction mode, the second start winning device 33b is released three times based on it. If there is a remaining number of times, a value (for example, “100”) corresponding to the interval time is set for the normal variable timer in step S2210. After step S2210, this process ends.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2203, that is, if it is an interval period during which the second start winning device 33b is opened three times (the second starting winning device 33b is in a closed state), the process proceeds to step S2211. Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the normal variable timer is “0”. If a negative determination is made in step S2211, that is, if the interval period has not yet elapsed, the present process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2211, the normal variable flag is turned on in step S2212, and a value ("1000" in this example) corresponding to the open time is set for the normal variable timer in step S2213. In step S2214, the second start winning device 33b is set to be in an open state, and then this process is terminated.

  Next, payout control executed by the CPU 511 in the payout control device 311 will be described. For convenience of explanation, the reception interrupt process will be described first with reference to FIG. 28, and then the main process will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing a reception interrupt process executed by the payout control device 311. The reception interrupt process is a process executed by interruption when the payout control device 311 receives a command transmitted from the main control device 261. When the payout control device 311 confirms that the command transmitted from the main control device 261 has been received, the other processing executed by the CPU 511 in the payout control device 311 is temporarily waited, and the reception interrupt process is executed. When the reception interrupt process is executed, the command transmitted from the main control device 261 in step S3001 is first stored in the command buffer of the RAM 513, and the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is stored in step S3002. Turns on the command reception flag and ends this reception interrupt processing. As described above, when a command is stored in the command buffer, the storage pointer is referred to and stored in a predetermined storage area, and the storage pointer is stored in order to store the next received command in the next storage area. Is updated.

  In the present embodiment, the reception process of the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is performed by the interrupt process executed when the command is received. For example, as illustrated in FIG. In the timer interrupt process, before the command determination process (step S3201) is performed, it is confirmed whether or not a command is received. If a command is received, the command is stored in the command buffer of the RAM 513. The command reception flag may be turned on, and if no command is received, the process may proceed to command determination processing. In such a case, it is confirmed whether or not a command has been received by confirming a port corresponding to the command input of the input / output port at predetermined intervals.

  Next, main processing of the payout control apparatus 311 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the main process of the payout control device 311. This main process is started upon reset when the power is turned on.

  First, in step S3101, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed. Specifically, a predetermined value set in advance is set in the stack pointer, and an interrupt mode is set. In step S3103, the RAM access is permitted, and in step S3104, an external interrupt vector is set.

  Thereafter, in step S3106, it is determined whether or not occurrence information of power interruption is set in the backup area 513a of the RAM 513. If the information on occurrence of power interruption is set in the backup area 513a, a RAM determination value is calculated in step S3107, and in step S3108, whether the RAM determination value matches the RAM determination value stored when the power is turned off. No, that is, the validity of the backup is determined. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at a work area address in the RAM 513. It should be noted that it is possible to determine the effectiveness of backup based on whether or not the keywords written in a predetermined area of the RAM 513 are correctly stored.

  If no power-off occurrence information is set in step S3106, or if a backup abnormality is confirmed by a RAM determination value (checksum value or the like) in step S3108, the process proceeds to initialization processing of the RAM 513 after step S3115. Transition.

  In step S3115, the entire area of the RAM 513 is cleared to 0, and in step S3116, the initial value of the RAM 513 is set. Thereafter, in step S3117, the CPU peripheral device is initialized, and the process proceeds to step S3114 to permit interruption.

  On the other hand, on the condition that the power failure occurrence information is set in step S3106 and the RAM judgment value (checksum value etc.) is normal in step S3108, the process at the time of power recovery (at the time of power failure recovery) Process). That is, in step S3109, the stack pointer before power-off is restored, power-off occurrence information is cleared in step S3110, and a payout permission flag that permits payout of prize balls is cleared in step S3111. In step S3112, the CPU peripheral device is initialized. In step S3113, the used register is restored from the backup area 513a of the RAM 513. In step S3114, an interrupt is permitted.

  After the interruption is permitted in step S3114, it is determined in the process of step S3122 whether power-off occurrence information is set in the backup area 513a. Here, if the information on occurrence of power supply interruption is set, the power supply is cut off. Therefore, the processing after step S3123 is performed as a power failure process at the time of power supply interruption. In the power failure process, first, the generation of each interrupt process is prohibited in step S3123, and a command determination process described later is executed in the next step S3124. Thereafter, the contents of each register used by the CPU 511 are saved in the stack area in step S3125, the stack pointer value is stored in the backup area 513a in step S3126, and the RAM determination value is calculated in step S3127 to calculate the backup area 513a. In step S3128, RAM access is prohibited, and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut down and processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area to be backed up in the RAM 513.

  Note that since the process of step S3122 confirms the occurrence information of the power-off after the process performed at the time of turning on the power, the amount of data stored in the backup area 513a of the RAM 513 is smaller than that in the middle of each process. Less and can be easily memorized. Further, when returning to the state before power-off, since the amount of data stored in the backup area 513a is small, it can be easily restored and the processing load of the payout control device 311 can be reduced. .

  Next, timer interrupt processing of the payout control device 311 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This timer interrupt process is started periodically (in this embodiment, at a cycle of 2 msec).

  In the timer interrupt process, first, a command from the main control device 261 is acquired, and a determination process for the command is performed (step S3201). This command determination process will be described below with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing command determination processing performed by the payout control device 311. In the command determination process (steps S3124 and S3201), first, it is determined whether or not the command reception flag is turned on in step S3301. The command reception flag is turned on when a command transmitted from the main controller 261 is received in the above-described reception interrupt process (see FIG. 28).

  If it is determined in step S3301 that the command reception flag is OFF, a new command has not been received from the main control device 261, and thus this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3301 that the command reception flag is on, the received command is read from the RAM 513 in step S3302, and the command reception flag is turned off in step S3303. By turning off the command reception flag in step S3303, the processing in steps S3302 to S3311 can be skipped until a new command is received, so that the control of the payout control device 311 can be reduced.

  The type of command read from the RAM 513 is determined in the processing of step S3304 to step S3306. In step S3304, it is determined whether or not the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is a payout initialization command. In step S3305, it is determined whether or not it is a payout return command. In step S3306, it is determined whether the command is a prize ball command. It is determined whether or not.

  If the command transmitted from the main controller 261 is a payout initialization command, it is determined in step S3307 whether or not the payout permission flag has already been turned on. If the payout permission flag has been turned off, the main power is turned on. Since the initialization of the RAM 513 is instructed from the control device 261, the work area (area) other than the stack area of the RAM 513 is cleared to 0 in step S3308, and the initial value of the RAM 513 is set in step S3309. Thereafter, in step S3311, the payout permission flag is turned on, and the payout permission for the winning ball is set.

  As described above, the main controller 261 performs initialization processing of the RAM 503 after transmitting the payout initialization command, and the payout control device 311 initializes processing of the RAM 513 after receiving the payout initialization command. Therefore, the timing at which the RAM 503 is initialized and the timing at which the RAM 513 is initialized are substantially at the same time. Therefore, even if the payout control device 311 receives a command transmitted from the main control device 261 due to a shift in the initialization timing, the RAM 513 is initialized, and control corresponding to the received command cannot be performed. The occurrence of adverse effects can be prevented. In addition, since the payout permission flag is turned on after the RAM 513 is initialized, it is possible to reliably set the payout allowance for prize balls.

  On the other hand, if the payout permission flag has already been turned on in step S3307, the command determination process is terminated without clearing the work area of the RAM 513 and the initialization process of the RAM 513. That is, the processing in step S3307 prohibits initialization of the RAM 513 with the payout permission flag set. The payout initialization command is a command that is transmitted only when the RAM erase switch 323 is turned on when the power is turned on. Therefore, the payout initialization command is not received in a state where the payout permission flag is turned on. It is conceivable that the payout control device 311 has recognized the payout initialization command due to the influence of noise or the like. Therefore, if the work area of the RAM 513 is cleared (step S3308) and the initial value setting of the RAM 513 (step S3309) is executed in a state where the payout permission flag is turned on, the payout is not made when a prize ball remains. Although an adverse effect occurs and causes a loss to the player, since the RAM 513 is prevented from being initialized while the payout permission flag is turned on, it is possible to prevent the player from being lost.

  Further, if the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is a payout return command (step S3304: NO, step S3305: YES), the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311 return to the state before the power cut-off. In order to permit the payout of the prize ball, the payout permission flag is turned on in step S3311. That is, when there is information on occurrence of power interruption and the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311 return to the state before the power interruption, the payout of the prize ball is permitted. When the payout permission flag is turned on in the process of step S3311, the process based on the command stored in the predetermined storage area of the command buffer is completed, so the read pointer is changed to the read pointer corresponding to the next storage area. Updated.

  Further, if the command transmitted from main controller 261 is a prize ball command (step S3305: NO, step S3306: YES), the received prize ball number is added to the total prize ball number and stored in step S3310. In order to permit the payout of prize balls, the payout permission flag is turned on in step S3311. At this time, the payout control device 311 sequentially reads out the prize ball commands stored in the command buffer (ring buffer), and adds the number of prize balls corresponding to the command to the total number of prize balls stored in a predetermined buffer area. And remember. Since a prize ball corresponding to the number of prize balls is paid out based on the prize ball command transmitted from the main controller 261, the prize ball command is a payout instruction command for instructing the prize ball to be paid out. . In addition, when a winning ball command is received, the payout permission is immediately set, so that the winning ball can be paid out early for winning. When the payout permission flag is turned on in the process of step S3311, the process based on the command stored in the predetermined storage area of the command buffer is completed, so the read pointer is changed to the read pointer corresponding to the next storage area. Updated.

  Note that the command transmitted from the main controller 261 is not a payout initialization command (step S3304: NO), is not a payout return command (step S3305: NO), and is not a prize ball command (step S3306: NO), The command determination process is terminated without turning on the payout permission flag.

  Returning to the flowchart of FIG. When the command determination process ends, it is determined in step S3202 whether or not the payout permission flag is turned on in the command determination process. Here, if the payout permission flag is not turned on, this processing is ended as it is. That is, it is possible to prevent award balls from being paid out before a command is transmitted from the main controller 261.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S3202, the launch permission is set for the launch control device 312 in step S3203, the state return switch 321 is checked in step S3204, and the state return operation is determined to be started. Perform a return operation. By this processing, when the state return switch 321 is pressed when a payout error occurs, such as a ball jam in the payout motor 358a, for example, the payout motor 358a is rotated forward and reverse to eliminate the ball jam (return to the normal state) Figured.

  Thereafter, in step S3205, setting of the lower plate full state or the lower plate full state is performed according to the change in the state of the lower plate 15. That is, when the lower pan 15 is detected based on the detection signal of the lower pan full switch, when the lower pan is full, the lower pan full state is set, and when the lower pan full is not reached , Set the lower pan full release state. In step S3206, setting of a tank ball absence state (out of ball state) or a tank ball absence release state (ball state) is executed in accordance with a change in the state of the tank ball. In other words, the tank ball no switch state is determined based on the detection signal of the tank ball no switch, and the special setting for the absence of the tank ball and the setting for the no tank ball state are executed. Perform configuration.

  Thereafter, in step S3207, for example, the presence / absence of a state to be notified, such as an error state, is determined. If there is a state to be notified, a notification is made.

  Subsequently, a payout control process for prize balls and rental balls is executed. Specifically, a payout number setting process is performed in step S3208, a motor control state acquisition process is performed in step S3209, and a motor drive process is performed in step S3210.

  In step S3211, the state return switch 321 is checked to execute the ball removal process by driving the payout motor 358a on the condition that the ball removal disabled state is not set and the ball removal operation is not started. In a succeeding step S3212, the control of the vibrator 360 (vibration motor control) is executed on condition that the ball is clogged. Thereafter, the process returns to the beginning of the timer interrupt process.

  Next, normal processing of the sub-control device 262 will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S3901, the port corresponding to the command input of the input / output port 554 is confirmed, and it is determined whether or not the command transmitted from the main controller 261 is received.

  If a command has been received, the command is stored in the command buffer of the RAM 553 in step S3902. The command buffer of the RAM 553 is a ring buffer that temporarily stores commands transmitted from the main control device 261. The ring buffer has a predetermined storage area, and commands are stored with regularity from the beginning to the end of the storage area. When commands are stored in all storage areas, the ring buffer is at the start of the storage area. The return command is configured to be updated. Therefore, when the command is stored and when the command is read, the storage pointer and the read pointer in the command buffer are updated, and the command is stored and read based on each pointer.

  In a succeeding step S3903, a hold information storage process is performed in which information on the advance command output from the main control device 261 is stored in a hold information storage area provided in the RAM 553 of the sub control device 262. The starting command includes, as described above, information indicating which of the first start winning device 33a and the second starting winning device 33b is a variable display triggered by the winning, and variable information corresponding to the jackpot. Information indicating whether or not there is, information indicating the type of jackpot, and information indicating the type of reach are included.

  The hold information storage area of the sub-control device 262 is similar to the special variable hold area of the main control device 261. The first hold information storage area and the second hold information area each having four hold areas (holding first to fourth holding areas). A holding information storage area and one execution area are provided. In the first hold information storage area, information on whether or not a big hit, a jackpot type, a small hit is made according to the reception history of the starting command based on the first fluctuation display (information stored in the first special fluctuation hold area). Information on whether or not and information on fluctuation display such as reach type (fluctuation information) are stored in time series. In the second hold information storage area, the change information is stored in time series in accordance with the reception history of the preceding command based on the second change display (information stored in the second special change hold area). By adopting this configuration, the variation information related to the first variation display triggered by entering the first start winning device 33a and the second variation display triggered by entering the second start winning device 33b. Four pieces of fluctuation information regarding each can be stored on hold. As a result, the sub-control device 262 can grasp not only the execution areas of the first and second special change reservation areas of the main control device 261 but also the change information stored in the reservation area. .

  Hereinafter, the hold information storage process will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S4101, it is determined whether or not a starting command has been received (whether or not the starting command has been stored in the command buffer of the RAM 553). If a negative determination is made in step S 4101, the present process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S4101, whether or not the starting command corresponds to a ball entering the second start winning device 33b (variation information stored in the second special variation holding area) in step S4102. Determine whether or not. If a negative determination is made here, that is, if the starting command corresponds to a ball entering the first start winning device 33a (variation information stored in the first special variation holding area), in step S4103 The first fluctuation hold counter Nd that counts the number of fluctuation information held in the first hold information storage area is incremented by one.

  In subsequent step S4104, information on whether or not the jackpot is included in the advance command, information on the jackpot type, information on whether or not the jackpot is reached, information on the reach type, etc. are stored in the vacant holding area of the first holding information storage area. Store in the first area.

  In subsequent step S4105, notice information storage processing is performed. In other words, in the present embodiment, there may be intentional derivations of effects related to each other in a plurality of continuous variable displays (so-called “continuous notice” is performed). Here, the value of the continuous notice counter for determining whether to perform continuous notice and the value of the notice type counter for determining the type of continuous notice are acquired, and the counter value is stored in the first hold information. Among the areas, the change information is stored in the newly stored reservation area in step S4104.

  The continuous notice counter is configured as a loop counter that is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 49, for example, and reaches the upper limit (that is, 49) and then returns to 0 that is the lower limit. The continuous notice counter is periodically updated, and the value of the continuous notice counter is stored in the corresponding counter buffer (continuous notice counter buffer) each time.

  The notice type counter is configured as a loop counter that is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 9, for example, and reaches the upper limit (that is, 9) and then returns to 0 that is the lower limit. The notice type counter is periodically updated, and each time the value of the notice type counter is stored in the corresponding counter buffer (notice type counter buffer).

  In the advance notice storage process, when the variation information is stored in the hold information storage area, the values of the continuous advance notice counter and the advance notice type counter stored in the continuous advance notice counter buffer and the advance notice type counter buffer are acquired. The Rukoto. Further, each of the holding area and the execution area of the holding information storage area is provided with a continuous notice flag that is turned on when it is determined that the continuous notice is derived.

  In the present embodiment, the ROM 552 is provided with a notice success / failure determination table that is taken into consideration when determining whether or not to carry out continuous notice, and a notice table that is taken into consideration when determining the mode of continuous notice. A plurality of advance notice determination tables and advance notice tables are provided, and the advance notice determination table and the advance notice table to be considered are selected according to the variation information.

  After step S4105, in step S4106, one of the first hold lamps 46a in the off state (for example, the leftmost lamp among the four first hold lamps 46a that is turned off) is turned on. State. The first holding lamp 46a of the present embodiment emits blue light. In subsequent step S4107, a continuous notice lottery process for determining whether or not to execute a continuous notice is performed. In this embodiment, the continuous notice lottery process in step S4107 constitutes the specific effect determining process.

  In the continuous notice lottery process in step S4107, when the value of the first variable hold counter Nd is “2” or more, based on the value of the continuous notice counter newly stored in the first hold information storage area, Whether or not to execute the continuous notice is determined by referring to the notice success / failure determination table corresponding to the jackpot type, the reach type and the game mode. Furthermore, when it is determined to execute the continuous notice, the notice table corresponding to the jackpot type, reach type, or game mode based on the value of the notice type counter newly stored in the first hold information storage area To determine whether to execute the continuous notice. In addition, the continuous notice flag is turned on for all the holding areas in which the variation information is stored among the holding areas of the first holding information storage area. However, the continuous notice flag in the execution area is not turned on.

  In the present embodiment, after step S4107, in step S4113, a hold icon setting process described later in detail is performed. That is, in the present embodiment, the “car” as a specific object that can be used for “car effect” as a specific effect, which will be described in detail later, can be customized according to the player's preference. After step S4113, this process ends.

  Further, when a negative determination is made in step S4102, that is, when the starting command corresponds to a ball entering the second start winning device 33b (variation information stored in the second special variation holding area). Then, the process proceeds to step S4108, and the second fluctuation hold counter Ne that counts the number of pieces of change information held in the second hold information storage area is incremented by one.

  Thereafter, in step S4109, information on whether or not the jackpot is included in the advance command, information on the jackpot type, information on whether or not the jackpot, information on the reach type, etc. Store in the first area. In subsequent step S4110, the values of the continuous notice counter and the notice type counter are acquired, and the counter values are stored in the reserved area in which the variation information is newly stored in step S4109 in the second reserved information storage area.

  After step S4110, in step S4111, one of the second hold lamps 46b in the extinguished state is turned on (for example, the leftmost lamp among the four second lamps 46b that is extinguished). And The second holding lamp 46b of the present embodiment emits red light. In a succeeding step S4112, a continuous notice lottery process for determining whether or not to execute a continuous notice is performed. Note that the continuous advance notice lottery process in step S4112 only corresponds to the continuous advance notice lottery process in step S4107 for entering the second start winning device 33b, and a description thereof will be omitted. After step S4112, in step S4114, a hold icon setting process, which will be described in detail later, is performed, and then this process ends.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 32, after step S3903 or when a negative determination is made in step S3901, the process proceeds to step S3904, whether or not the execution timing of the next normal process has been reached, that is, the start of the previous normal process It is determined whether or not a predetermined time (2 msec in this example) has elapsed since the start. If the predetermined time has already elapsed, the process proceeds to step S3905. On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed since the start of the previous normal process, the process proceeds to step S3915.

  In step S3905, various counter update processes are executed. The CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 uses various counter information when displaying decorative symbols. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 33, the left, middle, and right counters used for setting the out-of-place symbols of the jackpot decoration symbol counter CO, the left symbol display area, the middle symbol display area, and the right symbol display area. Each symbol counter CL, CM, CR is used. The symbol counters CL, CM, CR are configured such that register values are added using an R register (refresh register) in the CPU 551, and as a result, the numerical values change randomly.

  The jackpot decoration symbol counter CO determines a symbol when the fluctuation symbol of the decoration symbol display device 42 stops when the jackpot state occurs (in this embodiment, as a jackpot decoration symbol counter CO). 9 (0 to 8) counter values are prepared. That is, the jackpot decorative symbol counter CO is incremented by 1 in order within a range of 0 to 8, and after reaching the upper limit value (that is, 8), returns to 0.

  Then, when the symbol command transmitted from the main control device 261 is “AA11” indicating that the symbol corresponding to the probability variation jackpot is stopped, based on a table (a table for associating the counter value with the decorative symbol), For example, if the counter value is 0, the combination of jackpot symbols is determined in such a way that “1” (the slot) and 1 if it is “2” (the slot). The jackpot decorative symbol counter CO is periodically updated in the counter update process of step S3905, and is read from the counter buffer of the RAM 553 at the timing when the sub-control device 262 receives the symbol command as will be described later. In this embodiment, the jackpot decoration symbol counter CO is stored in the jackpot decoration symbol counter buffer of the RAM 553, but is not stored in the buffer, and the counter value is referred to at the timing when the symbol command is received. It may be.

  Further, when the symbol command is “AA12” indicating that the symbol corresponding to the normal jackpot is to be stopped, for example, if the counter value is 0, 1, it is “2”. The combination of jackpot symbols is determined such that “4” (for doublet), “6” (for doublet) if 5, 6 or “8” (for doublet) if 7, 8 .

  The left / middle / right symbol counters CL, CM, CR determine the combination of each stop symbol in the left / middle / right symbol display area when the winning / failing lottery is lost. Since any of the nine decorative symbols is displayed in the column, nine (0 to 8) counter values are prepared for each. The left symbol counter CL determines the stop symbol of the left symbol display area, the middle symbol counter CM determines the stop symbol of the middle symbol display area, and the right symbol counter CR determines the stop symbol of the right symbol display area.

  In the present embodiment, the values of the counters CL, CM, and CR are randomly updated by using the value of the R register built in the CPU 551. That is, when each symbol counter CL, CM, CR is updated, the lower 3 bits of the R register are added to the previous value, and when the addition result exceeds the upper limit value, 8 is subtracted to determine the current value. . Each symbol counter CL, CM, CR is updated so that the update times do not overlap, and the combination of these symbol counters CL, CM, CR is the reach / reverse symbol buffer of the RAM 553, the reach symbol buffer other than the front / rear out, and the complete Stored in one of the off symbol buffers.

  Here, the update process of each symbol counter CL, CM, CR will be described in detail. As shown in FIG. 34, in step S4001, it is determined whether or not it is time to update the left symbol counter CL, and in step S4002, it is determined whether or not it is time to update the middle symbol counter CM. The left, middle, and right symbol counters CL, CM, and CR are configured to be sequentially updated one by one in one update process. Therefore, if the right symbol counter CR has been updated in the previous update process, an affirmative determination is made in step S4001. If the left symbol counter CL has been updated in the previous update process, an affirmative determination is made in step S4002. If the update timing of the left symbol counter CL (step S4001 is YES), the process proceeds to step S4003, and the left symbol counter CL is updated. If the update time of the medium symbol counter CM (step S4002 is YES), the process proceeds to step S4004 to update the medium symbol counter CM. Furthermore, if the update timing of the right symbol counter CR (steps S4001 and S4002 are both NO), the process proceeds to step S4005, where the right symbol counter CR is updated. In updating the symbol counters CL, CM, CR in steps S4003 to S4005, the value of the lower 3 bits of the R register is added to the previous counter value, and when the addition result exceeds the upper limit value, 8 is subtracted, The calculation result is set as the current value of the off symbol counters CL, CM, CR.

  According to the above-described CL, CM, and CR update processing, the left, middle, and right symbol counters CL, CM, and CR are sequentially updated one by one, and the update times of the counter values overlap. There is no. Thereby, every time the update process is executed three times, one set of the symbol counters CL, CM, CR is updated.

  Thereafter, in step S4006, it is determined whether or not the combination of the updated symbol counters CL, CM, and CR is a combination of reach symbols (the symbol in the left symbol display area is the same as the symbol in the right symbol display area). If it is determined that the combination is a reach symbol (YES in S4006), then in step S4007, it is a combination of jackpot symbols (the symbols in the left and right symbol display areas are the same as the symbols in the middle symbol display area). Is determined. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4007, this combination is terminated without storing the combination of symbol counters CL, CM, and CR in the RAM 553.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S4007, it is determined in step S4008 whether or not the combination of symbol counters CL, CM, and CR is a combination of symbols that are out of front and rear. If the symbol counters CL, CM, CR are a combination of symbols that are out of front / rear (front / rear out of reach) (YES in S4008), the process proceeds to step S4009 and the combination of symbol counters CL, CM, CR at that time is The stored data is stored in the outreach symbol buffer and the process is terminated. If the symbol counters CL, CM, CR are a combination of symbols other than front / rear detachment (reach other than front / rear detachment) (NO in S4008), the process proceeds to step S4010, and the combination of symbol counters CL, CM, CR at that time is combined. Is stored in the reach symbol buffer except for the back and forth detachment of the RAM 553, and the process is terminated.

  Further, if the combination is other than the reach symbol (NO in S4006), the combination of the off symbol counters CL, CM, CR is the combination of the off symbol (completely off symbol). The combination of the out-of-clock symbol counters CL, CM, and CR is stored in the complete out-of- symbol buffer of the RAM 553, and this process is terminated.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 32, a hold process is performed in step S3906. Hereinafter, the hold process will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S4201, it is determined whether or not a variation pattern command is received (whether or not the variation pattern command is stored in the command buffer of the RAM 553). If an affirmative determination is made in step S4201, it is determined in step S4202 whether or not the value of the second fluctuation hold counter Ne is greater than “0”. If a negative determination is made in step S4202, that is, if the variation information of the second variation display is not stored, the process proceeds to step S4203, and the value of the first variation suspension counter Nd is decremented by one.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the second variation display is preferentially digested over the first variation display, and when the second variation display is stored on hold, the first variation display is digested. Never happen. That is, when the variation information of the second variation display is suspended and stored in the second suspension information storage area, the variation pattern command corresponding to the first variation display is not sent. For this reason, in this embodiment, in step S4202, it is determined whether or not the value of the second fluctuation hold counter Ne is greater than “0”, so that the fluctuation pattern command is displayed in the first fluctuation display and the second fluctuation display. Which variation information is possessed is discriminated. Of course, the variation pattern command is provided with information indicating which variation information of the first variation display or the second variation display is supported, and based on the variation pattern command, the variation pattern command is displayed in the first variation display and It may be determined which variation information of the second variation display is included.

  After step S4203, in step S4204, a process for shifting data stored in the first hold information storage area is executed. The data shift process is a process for sequentially shifting data (including the continuous notice flag) stored in the hold first to fourth areas of the first hold information storage area to the execution area side. The data in each area is shifted, such as execution area, second hold area, first hold area, third hold area, second hold area, fourth hold area, third hold area.

  In the following step S4205, one of the first hold lamps 46a that are lit (for example, the rightmost one of the lit first hold lamps 46a) is turned off. After step S4205, the process proceeds to step S4209.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S4202, that is, if even one piece of change information of the second change display is held, the value of the second change hold counter Ne is decremented by 1 in step S4206.

  In a succeeding step S4207, a process for shifting the data stored in the second reserved information storage area is executed. This data shift process is a process for sequentially shifting the data stored in the hold first to fourth areas of the second hold information storage area to the execution area side. The hold first area → the execution area, the hold second Data in each area is shifted, such as area → holding first area, holding third area → holding second area, holding fourth area → holding third area. In the present embodiment, there is one execution area for the hold information storage area, and the data stored in the first hold information storage area and the second hold information storage area is displayed with a variable display corresponding to the data. Will be shifted to a common execution area.

  In the subsequent step S4208, one of the second holding lamps 46b that is lit (for example, the rightmost one of the second holding lamps 46b that is lit) is turned off. After step S4208, the process proceeds to step S4209.

  In step S4209, a notice setting process for determining the type of display effect used for continuous notice is performed. In the notice setting process in step S4209, it is determined whether or not the continuous notice flag (see the continuous notice lottery process in step S4107) in the execution area of the hold information storage area is on. Since this is not performed, this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made, based on the variation information of the variation pattern command, it is determined whether or not it is a big hit, what is the type if it is a big win, and what is the reach type if it is not a big win, etc. The type of continuous notice is determined with reference to the corresponding table. The type of continuous notice determined here is derived at a predetermined timing when the corresponding change display is performed.

  After step S4209, in step S4210, a hold icon shift process for shifting the hold icon 411 displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42 is performed. Each holding area and execution area of the holding information storage area is provided with a holding icon storage area for storing the type of the holding icon, and based on the stored contents of the holding icon storage area, the maximum in digestion order. The four hold icons 411 are displayed in the hold display area 405 at the lower left of the decorative symbol display device 42, and the hold icon that is located on the leftmost is displayed every time the variable display is digested (executed). 411 is erased, and the hold icon 411 arranged on the right side is shifted to the left by one (the display location moves).

  After step S4210, in step S4211, it is determined whether or not the current variation display is a variation display corresponding to a big hit with a ball. If the determination in step S4211 is affirmative, in step S4212, the sub-control unit 262 resets the sub-side variation number counter for counting the number of variations of the special symbol (decorative symbol), and then ends this process. To do.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S4111, the sub-side variation number counter is incremented by 1 in step S4213, and then this process ends. In other words, the sub-side fluctuation number counter is not reset and continues to be incremented when there is no big hit (“2RS”, “2RN”) or “small hit”.

  In the present embodiment, since the second variation display is preferentially digested over the first variation display, such a first variation is performed when continuous notice is given for a plurality of first variation displays. If there is a ball entering the second start winning device 33b during the display variation display, the second variation display may interrupt between the plurality of first variation displays, and the continuous notice may be interrupted. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the effect used as the continuous notice is a display effect that can be derived even during normal variable display when the continuous notice is not performed (an effect that can be derived for a single variable display). Is used. For this reason, even if the continuous notice is interrupted, there is no sense of incongruity.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 32, display setting processing is performed in step S3907. Here, based on the information stored in the command buffer of the RAM 553, various arithmetic processes such as generating a display command to be output to the display control device 45 and command output setting are performed. That is, here, the display mode to be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42 is determined. For example, when a variation pattern command and a symbol command are received, the sub-control device 262 determines a display pattern and the like with reference to the corresponding table based on the variation type, variation time, stop symbol, and the like. Then, control is performed such as outputting the determined items to the display control device 45 as display commands.

  The display control device 45 performs a drawing process in response to a command from the sub-control device 262, and starts the decorative symbol display on the decorative symbol display device. Note that once the variation pattern command is received from the main control device 261, the symbol is coordinated with the sub-control device 262 and the display control device 45 until the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern elapses. Will continue to be displayed.

  Further, when starting the variable display, if the continuous notice flag in the execution area of the hold information storage area (see the continuous notice lottery process in step S4105) is on, each situation is determined based on the fluctuation information of the fluctuation pattern command. Referring to the table corresponding to, the type of the continuous notice to be derived for the variable display is determined, the derivation of the notice effect different from the continuous notice is determined, or the display corresponding to the operation of the effect button 125 or the like is performed. Or Furthermore, in the display setting process in step S3907, a process for performing effect control during a big hit or a small hit (a hit display process) is also performed.

  Here, the winning display process performed in the display setting process of step S3907 will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S4701, it is determined whether or not an opening command has been received from the main control device 261 to notify the start of the big hit state or the small hit state. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4701, in step S4702, the round grasp counter for grasping the number of remaining rounds is set to “16” if it is “16RS” based on the information included in the opening command. Set “8” for “8RS” and “8RN”, and “2” for “2RS”, “2RN”, and “small hit”.

  Thereafter, in step S4703, if there is a big hit with a ball, the setting of the opening effect for 8 seconds (the image of the decorative symbol display device 42, the sound of the speaker SP, the lighting mode of various lamps) is performed, and then this process is performed. finish. The sub-control device 262 is provided with a table or the like for storing the correspondence relationship between the jackpot type, the number of remaining rounds, and various rendering modes in the jackpot state. Select and let it run.

  If a negative determination is made in step S4701, it is determined in step S4704 whether an interval command has been received. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4704, in step S4705, if there is a big hit with a ball, an effect during a round of 30 seconds at the maximum is set, and then this process ends.

  If a negative determination is made in step S4704, it is determined in step S4706 whether an interval command has been received. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4706, the round grasp counter is decremented by 1 in step S4707, and if it is a big hit with a ball in step S4708, the effect is set during the 4-second interval, and then this process ends.

  If a negative determination is made in step S4706, it is determined in step S4709 whether an ending command has been received. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4709, the round grasp counter is decremented by 1 in step S4710, and if a big hit with a ball is set in step S4711, an ending effect is set for 10 seconds, and then this process ends.

  In the present embodiment, in the case of a big hit or a small win other than a big hit with a ball, an opening period (2 seconds), a round period (0.4 seconds), an interval period (1 second), and an ending period ( Instead of setting an effect by dividing each period (such as 1 second), settings are made so that an effect (announcement, etc.) is performed throughout the entire period.

  If a negative determination is made in step S4709, it is determined in step S4712 whether a hit end command has been received. If a negative determination is made in step S4712, this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S4712, the ending display is immediately ended in step S4713, and the normal gaming state mode in which the variable display is performed is set. Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 32, in steps S3908, S3909, and S3910, processing related to data transfer between the pachinko machine 10 and a portable communication terminal (for example, a smartphone) carried by the player is executed. . That is, in this embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 and the server operated by the gaming machine manufacturer can exchange data related to the player's game via the portable communication terminal carried by the player. It is configured.

  Here, an overall schematic configuration of the gaming system will be described with reference to FIG. As a method of sending information from the pachinko machine 10 to the mobile communication terminal, a QR code (registered trademark) as code information which is a two-dimensional code is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42 and read by the mobile communication terminal. Done. The mobile communication terminal according to the present embodiment includes a reading unit (such as a camera or a decoder) that can read a QR code displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42, a communication unit that can communicate with the server, and data ( Mobile display means (display) capable of displaying a web page or the like.

  By reading the QR code, the mobile communication terminal can obtain character string information in URL (Uniform Resource Locator) format by a conversion application (barcode reader) preinstalled in the mobile communication terminal. The server is accessed based on the server address information and the like included in the column information (a process indicated by the character string information is requested).

  The server performs display in response to a request from the mobile communication terminal, and displays various information included in the character string information for each model (game machine ID) of the pachinko machine 10 and a player (identification of the mobile communication terminal). It is stored for each information). Further, information determined from various information stored and stored (such as ranks given according to the number of jackpots and the number of fluctuations) and settings by the player are also stored. In response to a request from the mobile communication terminal, a password based on various information stored and stored corresponding to the player is issued.

  Then, when the player inputs the password to the pachinko machine 10, a game reflecting various information corresponding to the player can be performed. In the present embodiment, by inputting the password issued from the server into the pachinko machine 10, the balance of performance changes compared to the case where the game is performed without entering the password, or the game is performed without entering the password. When performing, it is possible to derive an effect that is not derived. Hereinafter, a game performed by inputting a password is referred to as a “mobile linked game”, and a game performed without inputting a password is referred to as a “no mobile linked game”.

  In addition, the sub-control device 262 of the present embodiment has a game information storage area as game information storage means that can store and store game information that is information related to the player's game, and selection information that is information related to the player's hobbies and preferences. And a selection information storage area as selection information storage means capable of accumulating and storing. The game information of this embodiment includes “variation count”, “big hit count”, and “information on whether or not the first to third premium reach has been derived”. Correspondingly, in the game information storage area, a fluctuation number counter that counts the number of fluctuations in the mobile linked gaming state, a jackpot counter that counts the number of jackpots in the mobile linked gaming state, and a first in the mobile linked gaming state. Three experienced flags that are turned on when the third various premium reach are derived are provided. In the present embodiment, the variation counter and the big hit counter constitute game information counting means.

  Note that only the first premium reach out of the first to third premium reach can be derived in the initial state even in the non-mobile linked game state or the mobile linked game state. On the other hand, if the first premium reach is derived even once in the mobile linked gaming state, the second premium reach can be derived in the subsequent mobile linked gaming state and has already been derived. The derivation probability of the first premium reach is increased. Further, when the second premium reach is derived in a state where the second premium reach can be derived, the third premium reach can be derived and the first and second premiums that have already been derived. The reach derivation probability is increased. Further, when the third premium reach is derived in a state where the third premium reach can be derived, the derivation probabilities of the first to third premium reach are increased.

  In addition, in the mobile linked gaming state, when the first premium reach is derived, the first experienced flag is turned on, and when the second premium reach is derived, the second experienced flag is turned on and the third premium When reach is derived, the third experienced flag is turned on. Incidentally, the premium reach corresponds to “16RS”, and when the premium reach is derived, it is possible to grasp that the jackpot state of “16RS” occurs at that time. In the present embodiment, when the probability of occurrence of premium reach is increased, the probability that odd-numbered double-eyed eyes will stop when the variable display is stopped when winning a promising big hit is reduced accordingly. .

  Further, as described above, in the present embodiment, the decorative symbol display device 42 is used to suggest or teach which game mode the user is in, the normal mode, the probability variation mode, the time reduction mode, or the latent probability mode. In FIG. 5, any stage of the normal stage, the probability variation stage, the pullback stage, and the precursor stage is displayed. Among them, for the “normal stage” indicating that the user is staying in the normal mode, there are three stages of the first stage, the second stage, and the third stage in which the background, appearance characters, and the like change and the production method also changes. It is prepared. For example, in the normal processing of the sub-control device 262, it is periodically determined whether or not the input information of the cross button 126 has been detected. It is determined whether or not the menu screen is in a non-display state) or a high-speed change state (a state in which all decorative symbols are changing). If the determination is affirmative, it is determined whether or not the input is “right or down” of the cross button 126. If the determination is affirmative, the first stage → second stage → third stage → first If the production stage is changed in the order of stage... And a negative determination is made, the production stage is changed in the order of third stage.fwdarw.second stage.fwdarw.first stage.fwdarw.third stage.

  In addition, three stages are also prepared for the big hit. More specifically, in the variable display of the decorative symbol display device 42, if even-numbered double-eyed eyes are stopped and displayed, one of the big hit states with a ball is generated (entering the second start winning device 33b). If it is a variable display based on a ball, a big hit state with a ball is determined), and if an odd number of double-eyes other than “7” is stopped and displayed, one of the big hit states with a ball will occur and “7 "16RS" is generated when the "" In the present embodiment, in the variable display of the decorative symbol display device 42, when even numbered eyes or odd numbered eyes other than “7” are stopped and displayed, the effect for teaching the jackpot type during the jackpot state ("Promotion effect") is performed, but the stage in the big hit state is divided into three (to be exact, including the one for "16RS" confirmation) due to the difference in such effect.

  In this embodiment, when the even-numbered double-eyes are stopped and displayed during the variation display, “high probability big hit” is displayed, and when odd-numbered double-eyes other than “7” are stopped and displayed, “16RS” is the higher-order jackpot type. “At the start of the jackpot round, suddenly the announcement stage (for example, when the top jackpot type is internal, the lottery to win at 50%, triggered by the operation of the production button 125, is performed once. “Successful production when winning and winning”) and “Final announcement stage (e.g., when it is a high-ranking jackpot type internally, which is announced at the end of the seventh round) In the second round to the seventh round, the player operates the production button 125, etc. " Promotion opportunity to participate in is derived “chance production stage (for example, in the case of a high-ranking jackpot type internally, the production during the promotion production period derived with a 50% probability at the start of the second to seventh rounds” "Successful production in the case of winning in a lottery that is won at 30% triggered by the operation of the button 125". Then, a selection screen for selecting a stage is displayed at the start of the big hit state, and when the effect button 125 is operated with the cursor corresponding to the option corresponding to the desired stage with the cross button 126, the big hit round is started at the corresponding stage. It will be.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, the decorative symbol display device 42 displays that prompts the user to operate the effect button 125 during the variable display, whether or not the effect button 125 is operated (pressed) during the set period, and the operation of the effect button 125. There is a case where a button effect is performed such that the effect derived according to the number of times (number of consecutive hits) changes.

  The selection information of this embodiment includes the number of changes in each stage in the normal gaming state, the number of selections of “sudden notice stage”, “final notice stage”, and “chance stage”, and the stage for button production. There is information on whether or not the button 125 has been operated and how many times the effect button 125 has been operated. That is, the selection information storage area includes a stay stage counter that counts the number of fluctuations in each of the “first stage”, “second stage”, and “third stage”, “sudden notification stage”, and “final notification stage”. The jackpot stage selection counter that counts the number of times of selection of the “chance production stage”, the button counter that is counted when the operation button 125 is not operated at the time of the button production, and the production button 125 is operated at the time of the button production. And a continuous hit counter for counting the total number of times. In particular, in this embodiment, two sets of stay stage counters, jackpot stage selection counters, button counters, and repeated hit counters are provided for individuals and for statistics.

  Further, as will be described in detail later, in the present embodiment, a customization function is provided that makes it possible to change the design of an image object (such as a character) displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42. Furthermore, the present embodiment is basically configured such that the customization function can be used only when a mobile linked game is being performed. In addition, the sub-control device 262 is provided with a customization information storage area for storing customization information related to customization performed during the mobile linked game, and the customization information is stored and stored in the same manner as the game information and the like. It has become.

  In the present embodiment, the QR code includes various information such as game information such as the number of jackpots and the number of fluctuations as described above, and selection information that counts what and how many times the player has selected items that can be selected. It is configured. In the present embodiment, a game system is configured by the pachinko machine 10, the mobile communication terminal operated by the player, and the server.

  Next, the menu display processing in step S3908 will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S6101, it is determined whether or not the special display devices 43L and 43R (decorative symbol display device 42) are performing variable display. If an affirmative determination is made in step S6101, the process ends.

  If a negative determination is made in step S6101, it is determined in step S6102 whether or not a big hit state is in progress. If an affirmative determination is made in step S6102, this processing is terminated as it is. If a negative determination is made in step S6102, it is determined whether or not the effect button 125 has been operated in step S6103. If a negative determination is made in step S6103, the present process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S6103, it is determined in step S6104 whether the top menu screen is being displayed. If a negative determination is made in step S6104, processing for displaying a top menu screen on the decorative symbol display device 42 is performed in step S6105. As shown in FIG. 40 (a), on the top menu screen, “password input (starting mobile linked game)”, “code issuance (first registration / mobile linked game end)”, “mobile linked game data erasure”, “game Operation items such as “History” and “Close menu screen” are displayed. After step S6105, this process ends.

  If the determination in step S6104 is affirmative, in step S6106, a password selection operation (operating the effect button 125 in a state where the cursor is set to the operation item of “password input (mobile linked game start)”) is performed. Determine whether it was done. If an affirmative determination is made in step S6106, the password input screen is displayed in step S6107, and the process ends.

  As shown in FIG. 40 (b), on the password input screen, selection of alphanumeric characters "A to Z" and "1 to 9", "Erase one character", "Determine", and "Return" used for the password An item is displayed, and a word display unit composed of eight frames (cells) that are present side by side is displayed in order to display the eight character words input as a password separately for each character. . Furthermore, the password input screen is composed of an input cursor indicating whether an alphanumeric character used for the password, “delete one character”, “decision”, or “return to menu” is selected, and eight frames. When an input operation is performed by selecting an alphanumeric character with the input cursor in the word display portion, an input location cursor is displayed which indicates which frame the alphanumeric character is input to.

  If a negative determination is made in step S6106, the effect button 125 is operated in step S6108 with the cursor placed on the operation item of the code issuance operation (“code issuance (initial registration / mobile linked game end)”). Is determined). If an affirmative determination is made in step S6108, a process for displaying a code issuance screen is performed in step S6109. As shown in FIG. 40C, on the code issue screen, operation items of “code issue (end of mobile linked game)”, “initial registration”, and “return to top menu” are displayed. After step S6109, this process ends.

  If the determination in step S6108 is negative, in step S6110, a mobile-linked game data deletion operation (operating the effect button 125 in a state where the cursor is positioned on the operation item of “mobile-linked game data deletion”) is performed. Determine whether it was done. If an affirmative determination is made in step S6110, processing for displaying a data erasure screen is performed in step S6111.

  In the data erasure screen, characters indicating whether to delete the mobile linked game data and selection items “Yes” and “No” are displayed. When a decision input is performed with the cursor placed on the “Yes” item, the player's personal information (game information, selection information, etc.) regarding the mobile linked game is erased. Furthermore, a mobile linked gaming flag indicating that a mobile linked game is in progress is set off. After step S6111, the process ends.

  Also, if a negative determination is made in step S6110, whether or not a game history display operation (operating the effect button 125 with the cursor placed on the operation item of “game history”) has been performed in step S6112. Is determined. If an affirmative determination is made in step S6112, the game history screen is displayed in step S6113, and then this process ends.

  If the determination in step S6112 is negative, whether or not an operation for closing the menu screen (operating the effect button 125 with the cursor positioned on the operation item "Close menu screen") has been performed in step S6114. Determine whether or not. If an affirmative determination is made in step S 6114, the top menu screen is closed in step S 6115, and then this process ends. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S6114, this processing is terminated as it is.

  It should be noted that the operation of the cursor while the various menu screens are displayed is, for example, in the normal processing of the sub-control device 262, it is determined whether or not the input information of the cross button 126 is periodically detected. Then, it is determined whether or not various menu screens are being displayed. If the determination is affirmative, the cursor is moved according to the operation of the cross button 126 corresponding to each menu screen.

  Next, the password input processing in step S3909 will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S6201, it is determined whether or not the password input screen is opened in the decorative symbol display device 42. If a negative determination is made in step S6201, this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S6201, it is determined in step S6202 whether or not the effect button 125 has been operated. If a negative determination is made in step S6202, it is determined in step S6216 whether or not the variable display of the decorative symbol display device 42 is started.

  If a negative determination is made in step S6216, the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S6216, in step S6217, the menu screen including the password input screen is closed, and the decorative symbol display on the decorative symbol display device 42 is made to be visible. finish.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S6202, it is determined in step S6203 whether the input operation returns to the top menu. If an affirmative determination is made in step S6203, the process moves to step S6204 to display the top menu on the decorative symbol display device 42, and then the present process ends.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S6203, it is determined in step S6205 whether or not it is an input operation for each word constituting the password. If an affirmative determination is made in step S6205, in step S6206, a process of displaying the word specified by the input cursor on the frame of the word display unit specified by the input location cursor is performed, and then this process ends.

  In the present embodiment, the password can be input regardless of whether or not the password has already been input. For example, if a negative determination is made in step S6203, the mobile If it is determined whether the game is linked or not, and if a positive determination is made, precautions such as "You have already entered a password. If you enter a new password, please delete the current password." After displaying the explanation, the present process may be terminated.

  If a negative determination is made in step S6205, it is determined in step S6207 whether the operation is to delete one character from the word input on the word display unit. If the determination in step S6207 is affirmative, in step S6208, a word is not yet input to the word of the frame designated by the input location cursor in the word display section or the frame designated by the input location cursor. In this case, the process of erasing the word of the previous frame (one left) is performed, and then this process is terminated.

  In addition, when a negative determination is made in step S6207, that is, when the player has finished inputting the password in the word display portion, and the operation button 125 is operated with the input cursor being set to the “decide” operation item, In step S6209, password authentication processing is performed. In the following step S6210, it is determined whether or not the input word combination is registered in advance as a valid password combination. That is, not all the combinations of alphanumeric characters described above are used as passwords, and there are combinations that are not used.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S6210, input error display processing is performed in step S6211, and then this processing ends. In other words, in the input error display process, a message such as “password is different” is displayed, and an operation item for obtaining the player's consent is displayed with the cursor selected from the beginning, and the player operates the effect button 125. Then, settings are made to return to the password input screen.

  If a negative determination is made in step S6210, password reflection processing for reflecting information included in the input password in the game of the pachinko machine 10 is performed in step S6212. After step S6212, in step S6213, a process for executing an input completion announcement indicating the completion of password input (for example, image display for 2 seconds on the decorative symbol display device 42) is performed. Thereafter, in step S6214, a mobile-linked gaming flag indicating that a mobile-linked game is being played is set on, and then the process ends.

  In addition, when the player plays, the password includes a change rank given according to the number of times of change display (number of changes) performed on the special display devices 43L and 43R (decorative symbol display device 42), and a jackpot state. Is given according to whether or not the jackpot rank given according to the number of times (the number of jackpots) has occurred and whether the first to third premium reach as a predetermined specific production has been derived. In addition to information on the career rank of the player, information about the player's favorite game and the like is also included.

  Next, the process (code issuing process) relating to the issuance of the QR code in step S3910 will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S6301, it is determined whether or not the code issuance screen is opened in the decorative symbol display device 42. If a negative determination is made in step S6301, this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S6301, it is determined in step S6302 whether or not the effect button 125 has been operated. If a negative determination is made in step S6302, it is determined in step S6316 whether or not the variable display on the decorative symbol display device 42 is started.

  If a negative determination is made in step S6316, the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S6316, it is determined in step S6316 whether a QR code is being displayed. If a negative determination is made in step S6317, in step S6318, the menu screen including the code issuance screen is closed and the decorative symbol display on the decorative symbol display device 42 is made visible, and then the present process is terminated. .

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S6317, in step S6319 the mobile linked gaming flag is set to OFF, and in step S6318, the menu screen including the code issue screen is closed, and this processing is performed. finish.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S6302, it is determined in step S6303 whether the input operation is an initial registration. If an affirmative determination is made in step S6303, it is determined in step S6304 whether or not a mobile linked game is being performed (whether or not a mobile linked game flag is set on). If a negative determination is made in step S6304, a process for setting and displaying a QR code corresponding to the initial registration is performed in step S6305, and then this process ends. The QR code displayed on the “first registration” subpage includes a gaming machine ID, a server address, and information indicating the first game.

  Although the game information or the like is not included in the QR code registered for the first time, game information, selection information, and customization information are always included in the QR code after the next time. In addition, by reading the QR code with a mobile communication terminal, the server address, game information, and the like described above are displayed as URL format character strings on the display of the mobile communication terminal, and the game information, etc. are accessed by accessing the server. Will be sent to the server.

  In addition, when an affirmative determination is made in step S6304, in step S6306, for example, after displaying a description of precautions such as “Please delete mobile-linked game data before registering”, this processing is performed. finish. That is, the present embodiment is configured such that the initial registration cannot be performed in the state where the personal data of the player related to the mobile linked game remains. In addition, it is good also as a structure which can issue the code | cord | chord of the first time registration in any of a mobile interlocking game state and a no mobile interlocking game state.

  If a negative determination is made in step S6303, it is determined in step S6307 whether the input operation is for displaying a QR code. If an affirmative determination is made in step S6307, it is determined in step S6308 whether or not a mobile-linked game is in progress. If an affirmative determination is made in step S6308, in step S6309, a QR code is set and a process of displaying it on the decorative symbol display device 42 is performed. In the present embodiment, the QR code displayed on the “code issuance (game end)” subpage includes a gaming machine ID for identifying the pachinko machine 10, an address of a server operated by the gaming machine manufacturer, and this mobile linked game Game information, selection information, and the like. In particular, the game information includes stored contents of a variation counter, a jackpot counter, and an experienced flag, and selection information includes a stay stage counter, a jackpot stage selection counter, a button counter, and a counter hit counter for personal and statistical use. Both of the stored contents and customization information related to customization, which will be described in detail later, are included. After step S6309, this process ends.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S6308, in step S6310, there is no data that can be output. When performing mobile linked games, please enter the password issued by the server. Is displayed, and then the present process is terminated.

  If a negative determination is made in step S6307, it is determined in step S6311 whether a QR code is being displayed. If an affirmative determination is made in step S6311, that is, if an operation input of “return (erase QR code display screen)” is performed on the QR code display screen, it is stored in the pachinko machine 10 in step S6312. A process of deleting the game data of the individual player who is playing is performed. More specifically, in step S6312, the variation counter, the jackpot counter, and the experienced flag are reset (the counter value is set to 0 and the flag is turned off), and the stay stage counter, the jackpot stage selection counter, The personal counter among the button counter and the continuous hit counter is reset. Further, various customization information stored in the customization information storage area is also erased.

  Of the stay stage counter, jackpot stage selection counter, button counter, and continuous hit counter, those for statistics are not reset at this time. The statistical storage area is configured such that selection information for one week can be distinguished and stored for each day, and information past one week is erased based on a date counter for counting dates. ing.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the variation counter, the jackpot counter, the personal stay stage counter, the jackpot stage selection counter, the button counter, the count to the repeated hit counter, the experienced flag, and the customization information storage area Memorization is performed only for mobile linked games. On the other hand, the storage to the count to the stay stage counter for statistics, the jackpot stage selection counter, the button counter, and the continuous hit counter is performed not only in the mobile linked game but also in the non-mobile linked game. Corresponding to these configurations, the QR code can include not only the player's individual game information and selection information but also one week of selection information and questionnaire information including those of other players. Is set.

  After step S6312, in step S6313, the mobile-linked gaming flag is set to OFF, and in step S6314, the menu screen including the code issue screen is closed, and then this process ends.

  If a negative determination is made in step S6311, that is, a code issuance screen is displayed, but an operation input is made to return to the top menu without issuing a QR code, the top menu is displayed in step S6315. This processing is terminated after the processing to be performed. In this embodiment, the decorative symbol display device 42 corresponds to a display unit, and the function of displaying the QR code in the decorative symbol display device 42 constitutes an information output unit.

  Here, the processing of the “server” (access handling processing) when there is an access from a predetermined mobile communication terminal (for example, a mobile phone or a smartphone) will be described with reference to FIG. The server receives from the mobile communication terminal a variation counter, a jackpot counter, and an experienced flag, a stay stage counter for personal and statistical use, a jackpot stage selection counter, a button counter, and a counter-attack counter, and customization information A server-side game information storage area comprising a server-side variation counter, a server-side jackpot counter, and a server-side experienced flag so that the information can be stored when information about the storage area is transmitted; A server-side selection information storage area comprising a server-side stay stage counter for personal and statistical use, a server-side jackpot stage selection counter, a server-side button counter, and a server-side continuous counter, and server-side continuous display object information storage and storage means Server-side customized information storage area There.

  First, in step S6401, it is determined whether or not there is an access from a mobile communication terminal. If a negative determination is made in step S6401, this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S6401, it is determined in step S6402 whether or not the information transmitted for the first time is included in the information transmitted from the mobile communication terminal.

  If the determination in step S6402 is affirmative, in step S6403, the portable communication terminal is associated with the server-side storage area (server-side game information storage area, server-side selection information storage area, server-side customization information storage area). A process for setting a storage area for accumulating and storing game information, selection information, and customization information of the individual player who has accessed through is performed. In the present embodiment, the server side selection information storage area includes a personal use and a statistics use, but the server side game information storage area and the server customization information storage area are personal. There is only one for.

  In subsequent step S6404, the process of displaying the first web page corresponding to the access using the first QR code is performed on the display of the mobile communication terminal, and then the present process is terminated. More specifically, the password for the first time is displayed after formal user registration. The first-time password includes information indicating that it is the first game. In step S6404, cookie (HTTP cookie) information is stored in the accessed mobile communication terminal. Thereby, when the mobile communication terminal accesses the server from the next time onward, the cookie information is also transmitted to the server, and the server confirms the cookie information without logging in by the player side. The player can grasp which stored data the mobile communication terminal of the player has accessed, and perform a corresponding display. In addition, you may comprise so that it may log in by inputting an ID password every time it accesses a server.

  If a negative determination is made in step S6402, that is, if access based on the QR code is received from the mobile communication terminal of the player who has finished the mobile linked game, the mobile communication terminal has transmitted from step S6405. The fluctuation count information (information indicating the value of the fluctuation count counter) is read from the information, the current fluctuation count is added to the fluctuation count already stored in the server-side fluctuation count counter, and the calculated value is newly added to the server side. Store in the variation counter.

  In the subsequent step S6406, the jackpot number information (information indicating the value of the jackpot number counter) is read from the information transmitted from the mobile communication terminal, and the current jackpot number is stored in the server side jackpot number counter. And the new value is stored in the server side jackpot counter.

  In step S6407, premium reach occurrence information (information indicating an experienced flag that has been turned on) is read from information transmitted from the mobile communication terminal, and if the occurrence is confirmed, the corresponding server side has been experienced. Turn on the flag.

  Thereafter, a fluctuation rank determination process is performed in step S6408. In this embodiment, ranking is performed according to how much the player has played the mobile linked game, and the higher the rank, the more the functions of the production, or the balance of the production changes more greatly than in the initial state. Or The determination of the rank is basically performed in the server, and in step S6408, by determining whether or not the number of changes stored in the server-side change number counter is equal to or greater than a predetermined number of times, The rank (variation rank) related to the number of changes is determined. In the present embodiment, the change rank can be updated to the second rank by performing change display 1000 times in the first rank (initial rank). Moreover, although it is 3000 rotations from 2nd rank to 3rd rank, after that, 5000 rotations are required in order to update one rank.

  In subsequent step S6409, a big hit rank determination process is performed. In this embodiment, the jackpot rank can be updated to the second rank by executing the jackpot state 10 times in the first rank (initial rank). Moreover, although it is 30 times from the 2nd rank to the 3rd rank and 50 times from the 3rd rank to the 4th rank, 80 times are required to update one rank thereafter.

  In subsequent step S6410, a history rank determination process is performed. In the present embodiment, the career rank is derived from the first rank in which the premium reach has not been derived during the mobile linked game and only the first premium reach can be derived, and the first premium reach in the first rank. In this way, the second premium reach can be derived, and the second premium reach has been derived in the second rank in which the first premium reach derivation probability is increased, and the second rank, As a result, the third premium reach can be derived, and the third premium reach has been derived in the third rank and the third rank where the derivation probability of the first and second premium reach is increased. The fourth rank increases the derivation probability of the first to third premium reach.

  In subsequent step S6411, various selection information (information indicating the values of both the personal and statistical stay stage counter, the jackpot stage selection counter, the button counter, and the continuous hit counter) is obtained from the information transmitted from the mobile communication terminal. A process of reading and adding to the corresponding counter is performed, or a process of setting a corresponding flag is performed. In this embodiment, not only the individual player selection information but also the selection information of other players who played the pachinko machine 10 played by the player is transmitted via the mobile communication terminal. The individual selection information is stored in the personal selection information storage area that can store the individual player selection information in the server-side game information storage area, and the selection information including other players is the player who plays the same model. The entire selection information is stored in the entire game information storage area.

  In subsequent step S6412, various customization information is read from the information transmitted from the mobile communication terminal, and stored in the corresponding storage area of the server-side customization information storage area.

  Thereafter, in step S6413, the web page reflecting the rank determined in steps S6408 to S6410, the accumulated data of the selection information added in steps S6411 and S6412, customization information, and the like on the display of the mobile communication terminal. After performing the process of displaying, this process is terminated. The web page includes a “spec” that teaches specifications such as the jackpot probability of the pachinko machine 10, “individual data management” that allows the player to check individual game records, and a player regarding customization in the next mobile linked game. There are operation items such as “Setting” for setting items that can be selected, “Password issuance” that can issue a new password based on accumulated game information, selection information, setting information related to customization, etc. .

  Next, processing for issuing a password for “server” (password issuing processing) will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S6501, it is determined whether or not a password issue request has been made. If a negative determination is made in step S6501, this processing is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S6501, customization information determination processing is performed in step S6502. In this embodiment, it is comprised so that the customization of the object derived | led-out by the specific effect performed in the decoration symbol display apparatus 42 can be performed in both the pachinko machine 10 and a server, and here confirms the setting on a server. Processing is to be performed. Although the contents that can be set on the customized pachinko machine 10 side and the contents that can be set on the server side are different, specific contents will be described later.

  In subsequent step S6503, the change rank, jackpot rank, history rank, individual player selection information, server side remaining change count storage area value, server side remaining change count storage area value, and setting information related to customization are referred to. Password setting processing for setting a password.

  The sub-control device 262 of the pachinko machine 10 includes a rank storage area for storing the change rank, the jackpot rank, and the history rank, and is included in the password in the password reflection process (see step S6212 in FIG. 41) of the password input process. The information corresponding to the rank storage area to be stored is stored. Thereby, it becomes possible to enjoy the production according to the rank. In the present embodiment, it is possible to select a design of a character appearing at a predetermined performance and a sound pattern output at a predetermined timing according to the change rank and the big hit rank. For example, when super reach is performed, the value stored in the rank storage area may be confirmed, and a corresponding effect table may be selected from a plurality of effect tables. The stored contents of the rank storage area are simultaneously deleted when the QR code issued in the code issuing process is deleted (see step S6312 in FIG. 42).

  Further, the sub-control device 262 includes a preference information storage area that can store information (preference information) based on the selection information accumulated by the individual player, and responds when the preference information is read from the password. Information is stored in the preference information storage area. As preference information of the present embodiment, information indicating the most selected stage in the normal gaming state, information indicating the most selected stage in the jackpot state, or whether there is a tendency to operate the effect button 125 during the button effect There is information to show.

  In the password reflection process in step S6212 described above (see FIG. 41), when the top menu screen display is closed, the process of automatically shifting to the most selected stage in the normal gaming state, and the start of the jackpot state Sometimes the selection cursor on the stage selection screen is set so that the operation item for selecting the most selected stage is aimed from the beginning, and the derivation ratio of the button effect is increased or decreased (the selected effect table is changed) ) Processing. Note that the stored contents of the preference information storage area are simultaneously deleted when the QR code issued in the code issuing process is deleted.

  After step S6503, in step S6504, a process for displaying the password set in step S6503 is performed, and then the process ends.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 32, in the lamp setting process in step S <b> 3911, a lighting pattern of lamps / electrical accessories is set so as to be synchronized with the display effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 42.

  In the sound setting process in step S3912, the output pattern of the speaker SP is set so as to be synchronized with the display effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 42. In addition, when a voice-related command such as an error occurrence notification is transmitted from the main control device 261, settings for performing these controls are also performed in step S3912.

  In step S3913, for example, control settings for a customer waiting effect (for example, a demo screen display set to be displayed when a predetermined time elapses in a state in which the decorative symbol display device 42 has not been changed and displayed); Perform the process.

  In step S3914, an external output process is executed in which a control signal based on the settings in steps S3905 to S3914 is transmitted to each device. For example, a display command is transmitted to the display control device 45 when the decorative symbol display device 42 displays the variation of the decorative symbol.

  After the processing of steps S3905 to S3914 performed every 2 msec is executed, or when a negative determination is made in step S3904, the process proceeds to step S3915, and whether or not the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 553 is determined. Is determined. The information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored when a power interruption command is received from the main controller 261.

  If no power off occurrence information is stored, the process advances to step S3916 to determine whether or not the RAM 553 is destroyed. If the RAM 553 is not destroyed here, the process returns to step S3901 and the normal process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 553 is destroyed, the processing is looped infinitely in order to stop the subsequent processing.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3915 that the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored, power interruption processing is executed in step S3917. In power-off processing, interrupt processing is prohibited and each output port is turned off. Further, the storage of the information on occurrence of power interruption is also erased. After executing the power-off process, the process loops infinitely.

  Now, in the present embodiment, the “car” as a specific object that can be used for “car effect” as a specific effect, which will be described in detail later, has a function that can be customized according to the player's preference. However, the present embodiment is configured such that the customization function can be used only when a mobile linked game is being performed.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 45 etc., the example of the decoration symbol display apparatus 42 as a variable display means is demonstrated. FIG. 45 shows the decorative symbol display device 42 during a mobile linked game and in a normal game state (“normal stage” in FIG. 45).

  Basically, the range including the central part in the vertical direction of the decorative symbol display device 42 includes three symbol display areas 401, 402, and 403 on the left, middle, and right that can display the decorative symbol (first symbol) in a variable manner. Yes. The lower left portion of the decorative symbol display device 42 is a hold display area 405 in which a hold icon 411 (second symbol) can be displayed. Further, the decorative symbol display device 42 has a level that does not hinder the visibility of the stop display of the decorative symbol 421 (for example, when the decorative symbol 421 is displayed simultaneously with the decorative symbol 421 at the stop display timing of the decorative symbol 421). The character object 423 (third symbol) is appropriately displayed in the symbol display areas 401, 402, 403, etc.

  In the present embodiment, there is a case where an effect using “car” as a motif (hereinafter also referred to as “car effect”) is mainly performed on the decorative symbol display device 42. More specifically, there are “race production”, “contest production”, “power comparison production”, and “date production”. Also, a plurality of types of vehicles used for such vehicle effects are prepared. More specifically, “sports car”, “family car”, “armored car”, “4WD car”, “decoration car”, “truck (decorator)”, “rear car” with decoration etc. There is.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when a mobile linked game is being performed, the vehicle used for “car production” can be customized. The parts that can be used to customize the car used for “car production” are “front of the body (front half)”, “rear of the body (rear half)”, “door”, “tire”, “engine & muffler” It is divided into a plurality of items (customized items). Also, for each item, "Sports car parts", "Family car parts", "Armored car parts", "4WD car parts", "Decoration car parts", "Truck system parts" "Parts" and "Rear car parts" are available, making it possible to combine cars from different systems. However, the rear car has no distinction between front and rear, has no door item, and moves by manpower instead of the engine (a predetermined character object 423 is pulled, etc.).

  In addition, there is also a "Coloring" item for car customization, and "Sporty", "White", "Army", "Vivid", "Pastel", "Metallic", and "Classic" are available . Note that the coloring is not changed for each part of the car but for the entire car at once. In addition, by exchanging the “engine & muffler” parts, the engine sound (running sound, etc.) is changed.

  Further, when a mobile linked game is being performed, a car in the middle of customization (hereinafter also referred to as “unfinished car 431”) is displayed in the lower right part (tuning area 406) of the decorative symbol display device. As shown in FIG. 46 and the like, the unfinished vehicle 431 grasps a rough overall image (outer shape) of a vehicle in which all customizations to the unfinished vehicle 431 are completed (hereinafter also referred to as “completed vehicle 441”). The base object 432 in the shape of a silhouette and the “front of the body”, “the rear of the body”, “the door” that are fitted to the base object 432 at the corresponding part as shown in FIG. 47 to FIG. ”,“ Tire ”, and“ engine & muffler ”part objects 433.

  That is, the part where the base object 432 is displayed as it is is a part that has not been customized yet, the part object 433 is displayed, and the part where the base object 432 is no longer displayed has already been customized. It will be a part. In other words, the incomplete car 431 displayed in the tuning area 406 has masking for a part corresponding to an item that has not been customized yet (part to which no part object 433 is applied). It looks like it has been given. With such a configuration, it is possible to grasp at a glance that there are items that have not yet been customized. Note that FIG. 45 shows the incomplete vehicle 431 in a state where customization of “door” and “engine & muffler” has been performed. In addition, regarding the “engine & muffler”, when customization is performed, only the portion of the muffler that protrudes outside the vehicle is displayed, and the portion that is hidden in the vehicle is not displayed.

  Further, in this embodiment, for each part corresponding to each customization item, in order to clarify where the part corresponding to each customization item is delimited with respect to the base object 432 (where the boundary is). , Different pattern masking is applied. In this embodiment, it is configured to make a difference depending on “color”, “front of body” is “blue”, “rear of body” is “red”, “door” is “yellow”, “tire”. "Yellow green", "Engine & muffler" is "Green". As described above, since the color is different for each masking corresponding to each customization item, the number of items that have not yet been customized can be clearly understood.

  The incomplete vehicle 431 is configured so that it can be continuously displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42 in a plurality of variable displays on the special display devices 43L and 43R (decorative symbol display device 42), and can be customized over a plurality of variable displays. Will continue. And when parts are assembled for all items of “front of body”, “rear of body”, “door”, “tire” and “engine & muffler” for incomplete car 431 Customization will be completed. As for “coloring”, “white” is set as a default, so that the customization of the car may be completed even if the player does not customize the coloring.

  In this embodiment, a part object 433 is displayed for a part that has already been customized in the incomplete car 431, but it is relatively narrow enough to grasp the shape and coloring of the customized part. It is drawn with the line and light color. On the other hand, with respect to the base object 432, there is only a masking outline line that is divided and set for each customization item, and details on the inside are not drawn. In addition, each masking is basically a thick line (the border line adjacent to the masking may be narrowed or eliminated) and dark colors in order to make a difference from the already customized parts. It is designed to be drawn with.

  In this embodiment, regarding the incomplete vehicle 431, the masking area of “engine & muffler” and the masking area of “body” and “door” partially overlap, and the masking of “engine & muffler” The display is given priority over the masking of “body” and “door”. Further, when the “body” or “door” part object 433 is applied to the incomplete vehicle 431 and the “engine & muffler” has not been customized yet, the “engine & The “muffler” masking is also displayed so as to be visible.

  Further, in this embodiment, when all customizations to the incomplete vehicle 431 are completed, the completed vehicle 441 is moved to the upper right part (gallery area 407) of the decorative symbol display device 42, where (basic Until a car production occurs). However, in this embodiment, the number of completed vehicles 441 that can be displayed in the gallery area 407 is limited to two. For this reason, when the third completed vehicle 441 is completed, the player selects a completed vehicle 441 that does not remain in the gallery area 407 from the three completed vehicles 441 and deletes it from the screen. It is configured as follows. The completed vehicle 441 is not drawn with a relatively thin line and a thin color like the part of the incomplete vehicle 431 that has been customized (part object 433 in the incomplete vehicle 431), Rendered with relatively solid lines and colors.

  In addition, the “car effect” itself is an effect common to the mobile-linked game and the non-mobile-linked game, but in this embodiment, the customization function can be used only when the mobile-linked game is performed. That is, in the no mobile linked gaming state, the incomplete vehicle 431 in the tuning area 406 and the completed vehicle 441 in the gallery area 407 are not displayed. Further, in the no-mobile linked game, the car used for “car production” is a completed car 441 with a unified vehicle type system, and is determined by a lottery performed when the execution of “car production” is determined (winning expectation) The vehicle type is selected and determined in accordance with the degree and the type of the vehicle effect. The winning expectation degree is an index of how likely the jackpot state is likely to occur, and is easy to select when displaying a variation that teaches the occurrence of a jackpot state, and is difficult to select when displaying a variation that teaches a miss. The more you win, the higher your chances of winning. On the contrary, it is difficult to select in the variation display teaching the occurrence of the big hit state, and the winning expectation is lower as the selection is easier in the variation display teaching out of place. In the present embodiment, a continuous display object is configured by the incomplete vehicle 431 (fourth symbol) and the completed vehicle 441 (fifth symbol). Further, the incomplete vehicle 431 corresponds to an incomplete object, and the completed vehicle 441 corresponds to a completed object.

  Further, the hold icon 411 may take different forms depending on whether or not the mobile linked game is being performed. More specifically, in the mobile-linked gaming state, the hold icon 411 in a mode that is not derived in the non-mobile-linked gaming state is displayed in the lower left part (holding display area 405) of the decorative symbol display device 42. There is. That is, as shown in FIG. 45 and the like, the hold icon 411 includes a normal hold icon 411 (hereinafter also referred to as “normal hold icon 412”) in which “the jewel 414 is placed on the pedestal 413”, as described above. There is a hold icon 411 (hereinafter also referred to as “item hold icon 416”) simulating “car customized parts” used for car production.

  As shown in FIG. 47, the item hold icon 416 includes a “background 417” and a “part object 433” drawn in front thereof. The “part object 433” is drawn to specifically indicate which part (customization item) and which car model system (customization pattern) the part is, and the “background 417” is a customization item to which the part object 433 belongs. It has a corresponding color.

  More specifically, in the present embodiment, the color of “background 417” corresponds to the masking color applied to the unfinished vehicle 431 displayed in the tuning area 406. In other words, it is “blue” for the “front of the body” part, “red” for the “rear body” part, “yellow” for the “door” part, and “tire” for the “tire” part. “Yellow green” and “Engine & muffler” parts are “Green”. Therefore, comparing the background 417 of the item hold icon 416 with the incomplete car 431, the part object 433 of the item hold icon 416 corresponds to the part of the incomplete car 431 that has not yet been customized. You can see at a glance if you are.

  As will be described in detail later, when it is determined that the part object 433 displayed by the item hold icon 416 is reflected in the incomplete car 431, the part object 433 is set as a corresponding part of the incomplete car 431. It is displayed so as to be fitted.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 47, regarding the item hold icon 416 corresponding to “coloring”, “colored brush” is drawn in the image of coloring instead of “part object 433”. In any coloring, the “background 417” is “white”. Then, when it is determined that the coloring displayed on the item hold icon 416 is reflected on the incomplete vehicle 431, the coloring of all the part objects 433 of the incomplete vehicle 431 is changed at once. It has become. When the coloring of the incomplete vehicle 431 is in a default state, the “white” coloring is selected.

  Now, in the RAM 553 of the sub-control device 262, an incomplete customization storage area for storing the setting contents of a plurality of customization items constituting the incomplete vehicle 431 displayed in the tuning area 406 of the decorative symbol display device 42, and a decoration A completed customization storage area for storing the setting contents of a plurality of customization items constituting the completed vehicle 441 displayed in the gallery area 407 of the symbol display device 42 is provided.

  The incomplete customization storage area and the completed customization storage area correspond to a storage area corresponding to “front of body”, a storage area corresponding to “rear of body”, a storage area corresponding to “door”, and “tire”. A storage area associated with each customization item, such as a storage area corresponding to “Engine & Muffler”, a storage area corresponding to “Coloring”, and the like. And for each item, "Sports car parts", "Family car parts", "Armored car parts", "4WD car parts", "Decoration car parts", "Truck system parts" Whether “Parts” or “Rear Car Parts” is set, and “Coloring” is “Sporty”, “White”, “Army”, “Vivid”, “Pastel”, “Metallic”, “Classic” Which is set is memorized. Further, in the present embodiment, the number of completed vehicles 441 displayed in the gallery area 407 is set up to two, and the storage area for the two completed vehicles 441 (the first completed vehicle) is stored in the completed customized storage area. A customization storage area and a second completed customization storage area).

  Further, in each holding area and execution area of the holding information storage area of the sub-control device 262, a customization information storage area for storing information related to customization is provided. With respect to the information in the customized information storage area, the storage area in the hold information storage area can be shifted to the execution area side each time a variable display is performed together with other game information. As will be described in detail later, in the customization information storage area, information indicating whether or not to store information on whether or not an opportunity (customization chance) for performing customization on the incomplete vehicle 431 is given, and information indicating customization items Are provided for the item area for storing information and the pattern area for storing information indicating the customization pattern. In this embodiment, the hold information storage area (customization information storage area) and the incomplete customization storage area of the sub-control device 262 correspond to the customization progress storage means.

  Further, the sub-control device 262 as the customization opportunity giving means “customize” as the customized lottery random number generation means used for the customization lottery to determine whether or not to give the opportunity to customize the unfinished vehicle 431 (customization chance). “Lottery random number counter” and “Customized winning value storage table” as a customized winning value storage means for storing a predetermined value among values that can be generated by the customized lottery random number counter as values to be won in the customized lottery I have.

  The customized lottery random number counter, for example, is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 199, for example, and after reaching the upper limit value (that is, 199) as the closing price, it returns to 0 that is the lower limit value as the opening price. . The customized lottery random number counter is updated periodically (for example, for each normal process), and the value of the customized lottery random number counter is stored in the corresponding counter buffer. Then, based on the receipt of the advance command, the value of the customized lottery random number counter stored in the counter buffer is stored in the success / failure area of the customized information storage area of the hold information storage area.

  Further, the sub-control device 262 as the customization selection means includes an “item random number counter” as the item lottery random number generation means used for the item lottery for determining the customization item, a value that can be generated by the item random number counter, and the customization item "Corresponding item storage table" as a corresponding item storage means for storing the corresponding relationship, "Pattern random number counter" as a pattern random number generating means used for pattern lottery to determine a customized pattern, and a pattern random number counter A “corresponding pattern storage table” is provided as correspondence pattern storage means for storing correspondence between values that can be set and customized patterns.

  The item random number counter is configured so that, for example, 1 is sequentially added within a range of 0 to 59, and after reaching the upper limit value (that is, 59) as the closing price, the item random number counter returns to 0 that is the lower limit value as the starting price. The item random number counter is updated periodically (for example, for each normal process), and the value of the item random number counter is stored in the corresponding counter buffer. Then, when winning in the customized lottery performed based on the reception of the starting command, the value of the item random number counter stored in the counter buffer is stored in the item area of the customization information storage area of the hold information storage area It has come to be.

  The pattern random number counter, for example, is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 999, for example, and after reaching an upper limit value (ie, 999) as a closing price, the pattern random number counter returns to 0, which is a lower limit value as a starting price. The pattern random number counter is updated periodically (for example, for each normal process), and the value of the pattern random number counter is stored in the corresponding counter buffer. Then, when winning in the customized lottery performed based on the reception of the advance command, the value of the pattern random number counter stored in the counter buffer is stored in the pattern area of the customization information storage area of the hold information storage area It has come to be.

  Here, the hold icon setting process performed in steps S4113 and S4114 of the hold information storage process (see FIG. 35) will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S7101, a customized lottery process is performed. More specifically, first, the value of the customized lottery random number counter is acquired from the corresponding counter buffer, and stored in the customized information storage area (whether or not) in the corresponding reserved area among the reserved information storage areas. Furthermore, with reference to the customized winning value storage table, it is determined whether or not the value of the customized lottery random number counter stored in the customization information storage area (winning / unusable area) is a value corresponding to winning in the customized lottery.

  As shown in FIG. 52, a plurality of customized winning value storage tables are provided. In the present embodiment, the jackpot / small jackpot that is selected when a big hit state or a jackpot state occurs, the front / rear outfit that is selected when the front / rear detachment occurs, and the reach other than the front / back miss There are two types, one for non-front / rear selection, which is selected when the ball is generated, and the other for other cases (when no reach is generated). Two are prepared, one selected in the case of a high pitched state and the other selected. Further, in this embodiment, when referring to the customized winning value storage table for losing front and back, it is easier to win than when referring to the customized winning value storage table for big hit and small hit, When referring to the customized winning value storage table, it is more difficult to win than when referring to the customized winning value storage table for big hits / small hits. In addition, when referring to a customized winning value storage table for other than that, it is harder to win than when referring to a customized winning value storage table for out of front and back.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, when the customized winning value storage table is referred to in the high entering state, it is difficult to win compared to the case where the customized winning value storage table is referred to in the low entering state.

  After step S7101, it is determined in step S7102 whether or not a customized lottery has been won. If an affirmative determination is made in step S7102, it is determined in step S7103 whether or not a mobile-linked game is being performed (whether or not the mobile-linked game flag is set on). If an affirmative determination is made in step S7103, in step S7104, a customization chance flag indicating that a customization chance is given is set on.

  The customization chance flag is provided in each holding area and execution area (customization information storage area) of the holding information storage area, and when the variation information or the like is shifted, the setting information of the customization chance flag is also shifted. It is configured. Further, in the present embodiment, a value indicating that a customization chance is given is stored (overwritten) in the customization information storage area (the success / failure area) in which the value of the customized lottery random number counter is stored. The customization chance flag is set to ON. Note that the customization chance flag can be provided separately from the customization information storage area.

  In subsequent steps S7105 and S7106, processing for determining the type of the part object 433 displayed on the item hold icon 416 is performed. That is, as the part object 433, it is necessary to determine which part of the car (unfinished car 431) and what type (vehicle type system) part, so in step S7105, in which part Whether or not there is (customization item) is determined, and in step S7106, what type is (customization pattern) is determined.

  First, in the customization item determination processing in step S7105, the value of the item random number counter is acquired from the corresponding counter buffer and stored in the customization information storage area (item area) of the corresponding reservation area of the reservation information storage area. . Furthermore, with reference to the corresponding item storage table, it is determined whether or not the value of the item random number counter stored in the customization information storage area (item area) corresponds to any customization item. Then, the information indicating the customization item that is made to correspond is stored (overwritten) in the customization information storage area (item area) of the corresponding holding area.

  In this embodiment, only one corresponding item storage table is provided. When the value of the item random number counter is “0 to 9”, it corresponds to “front of the body” and the value of the item random number counter is “10 to 10”. 19 corresponds to “rear of the body”, corresponds to “door” when the value of the item random number counter is “20 to 29”, and corresponds to “30 to 39” when the value of the item random number counter is “30 to 39”. Corresponds to “tire”, corresponds to “engine & muffler” when the item random number counter value is “40 to 49”, and corresponds to “coloring” when the item random number counter value is “50 to 59”. Is set to

  After the step S7105, in the customization pattern determination process in the step S7106, first, the value of the pattern random number counter is obtained from the corresponding counter buffer, and the customization information storage area (for pattern use) of the corresponding reservation area among the reservation information storage areas. Area). Furthermore, with reference to the corresponding pattern storage table, it is determined whether or not the value of the pattern random number counter stored in the customization information storage area (pattern area) corresponds to any customization pattern. Then, the information indicating the customized pattern that is made to correspond is stored (overwritten) in the customized information storage area (pattern area) of the corresponding reserved area.

  As shown in FIG. 54, a plurality of correspondence pattern storage tables are provided. In this embodiment, specially selected for the high pitched state selected in the case of the high pitched state, for the low pitched state selected in the case other than the high pitched state, and from the previous big hit state For the first rare parts high-accuracy state selected when the display variation of the display devices 43L and 43R exceeds 1000 times, the variation display of the special display devices 43L and 43R is 400 to 420 times from the previous big hit state. Times, 600 times to 640 times, and 800 times to 880 times.

  Here, the customization pattern determination processing in step S7106 will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S7131, whether or not the value of the sub-side fluctuation number counter (see step S4212, etc. in FIG. 36) exceeds 1000, that is, the number of fluctuations performed after the previous hitting with a big hit state is 1000 times. It is determined whether or not it exceeds. If an affirmative determination is made in step S7131, a customized pattern is determined in step S7132 by referring to the corresponding pattern storage table for the second rare parts high-accuracy state based on the value of the pattern random number counter.

  Regarding the correspondence pattern storage table for the second rare part high-accuracy state, when the value of the pattern random number counter is “0 to 99”, it corresponds to “parts of the sports car system” and the value of the pattern random number counter is “100 to 199 ”corresponds to“ parts of family car system ”, the value of the pattern random number counter corresponds to“ parts of armored vehicle system ”when the value of the pattern random number counter is“ 200 to 299 ”, and the value of pattern random number counter is“ 300 to 379 ” ”Corresponds to“ parts of 4WD car system ”, and when the value of the pattern random number counter is“ 980 to 989 ”, it corresponds to“ parts of decoration car system ”and the value of the pattern random number counter is“ 990 to 999 ”. ”Corresponds to“ Track system parts ”, and when the value of the pattern random number counter is“ 400 to 979 ”, it is changed to“ Rear car parts ”. To respond. After step S7132, the process ends.

  If a negative determination is made in step S7131, whether or not the value of the sub-side variation frequency counter is in the range of 400 to 420, 600 to 640, and 800 to 880 in step S7133, that is, the previous time If it is determined that the number of fluctuations from the big hit state with a ball is within the range of 400 to 420, 600 to 640, and 800 to 880, the value of the pattern random number counter is set in step S7134. Based on the first rare parts high-accuracy state correspondence pattern storage table, the customization pattern is determined.

  Regarding the corresponding pattern storage table for the first rare parts high-accuracy state, when the value of the pattern random number counter is “0 to 299”, it corresponds to “parts of the decoration car system” and the value of the pattern random number counter is “300 to "899" corresponds to "Track system parts", and when the pattern random number counter value is "900 to 999", it corresponds to "Rear car parts", "Sports car system parts", "Family car systems" The value of the pattern random number counter corresponding to “parts of”, “parts of armored vehicle system”, and “parts of 4WD car system” is not set. After step S7134, this process ends.

  If a negative determination is made in step S7133, it is determined in step S7135 whether or not a high pitching state is present (whether or not a flag indicating ON is set). If an affirmative determination is made in step S7135, that is, if the mode is the probability variation mode or the time reduction mode, in step S7136, based on the value of the pattern random number counter, the corresponding pattern storage table for the high pitched state is referred to. Determine customization patterns.

  Regarding the corresponding pattern storage table for the high pitched state, when the value of the pattern random number counter is “0 to 99”, it corresponds to “parts of the sports car system” and the value of the pattern random number counter is “100 to 399”. If the value of the pattern random number counter is “400 to 599”, it corresponds to “Part of the armored vehicle system”, and the value of the pattern random number counter is “600 to 999”. Corresponds to “parts of 4WD car system”, and the values of the pattern random number counters corresponding to “parts of decoration car system”, “parts of truck system”, and “parts of rear car” are not set. After step S7136, this process ends.

  If a negative determination is made in step S7135, that is, if the normal mode or the latent mode is selected, the corresponding pattern storage table for the low entry state is referred to in step S7137 based on the value of the pattern random number counter. To determine the customization pattern.

  Regarding the corresponding pattern storage table for the low entry state, when the value of the pattern random number counter is “0 to 199”, it corresponds to “parts of the sports car system” and the value of the pattern random number counter is “200 to 699”. If the value of the pattern random number counter is "700 to 799", the value corresponds to "Part of the armored vehicle system" and the value of the pattern random number counter is "800 to 979" Corresponds to “parts of 4WD car system”, if the value of the pattern random number counter is “980 to 989”, corresponds to “parts of the decoration car system”, and the value of the pattern random number counter is “990 to 999” The value of the pattern random number counter corresponding to the “rear car parts” corresponding to the “track system parts” is not set. After step S7137, this process ends.

  In this embodiment, “parts of decoration car system” and “parts of rear car” correspond to specific customized patterns, and the corresponding pattern storage table for the first and second rare parts high-accuracy states is stored in the second pattern. The corresponding pattern storage table for the high entry state and the low entry state corresponds to the first pattern storage means, and the correspondence pattern storage table for the first and second rare parts high-accuracy state is selected. (A state in which the change display exceeds 1000 times after the end of the previous big hit state) corresponds to the second pattern selection state, and the other states correspond to the first pattern selection state. In addition, in the present embodiment, each correspondence pattern storage table and the corresponding gaming state correspond one-to-one. For example, the variable display of the special display devices 43L and 43R is changed from the previous jackpot state. If the number of times exceeds 1000, 90% of the corresponding pattern storage table for the first rare parts high-accuracy state is selected, and 10% is selected according to the gaming state, for example, the other corresponding pattern storage table is selected. The correspondence pattern storage table that is easily selected can be different.

  In this embodiment, in the rare part high-accuracy state (pattern high-accuracy state) in which the corresponding pattern storage table for the first and second rare parts high-accuracy state is selected, the decorative symbol display device 42 (for example, a display unit) In the lower right part), a display that indicates that the rare parts are in a highly accurate state, for example, a display such as “rare item highly accurate” is derived.

  Further, in the rare parts high-accuracy state, the decorative symbol display device 42 performs an operation (prediction) in which the character object 423 is executed only in the first rare parts high-accuracy state, or an operation executed only in the second rare parts high-accuracy state. Or, when the rare part high probability state is approaching (for example, the state that shifts to the first or second rare part high-accuracy state is performed by performing the variable display 30 times), the operation is executed. . In addition, during the normal variation display, various game explanations may be given on the decorative symbol display device 42. One of them is that a rare item can be acquired if the action "the character is ..." The explanation is given.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the state in which the variation display of the identification information is not performed on the special display devices 43L and 43R (decorative symbol display device 42), and further, a predetermined time elapses after the variation display ends. Even in the demonstration screen display derived to the decorative symbol display device 42, a display instructing that the rare parts are in a high-accuracy state, for example, “rare item high-probability” is derived in the decorative symbol display device 42. It has come to be. In the present embodiment, the decorative symbol display device 42 corresponds to a rare pattern high-accuracy state teaching unit.

  It should be noted that during the demonstration screen display, a display instructing that the rare parts are in a highly accurate state may be derived by operating the effect button 125 or the cross button 126. Further, the demonstration screen display may be configured so that it is not known that the rare parts are in a highly accurate state.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 51, after step S7106, in step S7107, the customization information storage area of the reservation information storage area matches the customization item determined in step S7105 and is determined in step S7106. It is determined whether there is stored information of the same part object 433 as the customized pattern that has been set.

  In the present embodiment, the customization item (indicating value) determined in step S7105 is stored (overwritten) in the item area of the customization information storage area. As the value indicating the customization item, for example, “ 0-5 "is set," Front of body "corresponds to" 0 "," Rear of body "corresponds to" 1 "," Door "corresponds to" 2 "," Tire " Corresponds to “3”, “Engine & Muffler” corresponds to “4”, and “Coloring” corresponds to “5”.

  If a negative determination is made in step S7107, a part object 433 is determined based on the customization items and customization patterns determined in step S7105 and step S7106 in step S7109, and the hold information storage area Is stored in the hold icon storage area of the corresponding hold area, and a process for additionally displaying the item hold icon 416 corresponding to the current increase in the hold display area 405 at the lower left of the decorative symbol display device 42 is performed. . That is, when information indicating the part object 433 is stored in the hold icon storage area, the item hold icon 416 of the corresponding part object 433 is displayed in the hold display area 405.

  However, in the present embodiment, there are a maximum of four hold icons 411 displayed at the same time in the hold display area 405, and further, a second variation display (a variation based on a ball entering the second start winning device 33b). Display) is digested in preference to the first variation display (variation display based on the entry to the first start winning device 33a). Therefore, in step S7109, the current hold icon 411 is first displayed in the variation order. If it is within the fourth, and further within the fourth, it is ascertained what the specific number is. If it is within the fourth, the holding icon storage area is referred to by referring to the holding icon storage area of the corresponding holding area, and the holding icon 411 drawn based on the pattern is displayed in the holding display area 405. Display at the corresponding position. After step S7109, this process ends.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, in the hold icon 411, the first variation display based on the ball entering the first start winning device 33a and the first ball based on the ball entering the second start winning device 33b. It is a mode in which it is not specified which one corresponds to the two-variable display. However, by confirming the variation specifying lamp 40 or confirming the transition of the lighting state of the holding lamps 46a and 46b, it is determined which variation display is based on the entry to the start winning devices 33a and 33b. It is configured to be able to. In the present embodiment, in the mobile-linked gaming state, the effect of changing the color of the normal hold icon 412 is not performed, but may be configured to be performed.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S7107, that is, if the item hold icon 416 of the same part object 433 is already displayed in the hold display area 405, the item area in the customization information storage area in step S7108 "1" is added to the value stored in (if "1" is added to "6", "0" is set). As a result, the customization item is changed. After step S7108, the process returns to step S7107. That is, the process of changing the customization item is repeated until a negative determination is made in step S7107. With this configuration, it is possible to avoid a situation in which two or more of the same item hold icons 416 (part objects 433) are displayed in the hold display area 405.

  If a negative determination is made in step S7103, that is, if the mobile-linked gaming state is not set, processing for setting the hold icon 411 (normal hold icon 412) in the no-mobile linked gaming state is performed in step S7110. In other words, in the no mobile linked gaming state, the hold icon 411 (item hold icon 416) having the part object 433 is not displayed, while the color of the normal hold icon 412 (the jewel 414 on the pedestal 413 in this example) is changed. It is configured to change and suggest a winning expectation such as a jackpot (perform prefetch hold notice effect).

  Specifically, first, the value of the pattern random number counter is acquired from the corresponding counter buffer, and stored in the customized information storage area (pattern area) of the corresponding reserved area in the reserved information storage area. Note that the pattern random number counter and the customization information storage area are also used when setting the item hold icon 416 (part object 433) when a mobile linked game is being performed. Is planned.

  Further, referring to the normal hold pattern storage table as a pattern table when the mobile link is used or not, which stores the correspondence between the value of the pattern random number counter and the pattern of the item hold icon 416 (the color of the gem 414), the customization information is stored. It is determined whether or not the value of the pattern random number counter stored in the area (pattern area) corresponds to the pattern of any item hold icon 416 (the color of the gem 414). And the information which shows the pattern of the item hold | maintenance icon 416 made corresponding is memorize | stored in the customization information storage area (pattern area | region) of a corresponding hold area.

  A plurality of normal hold pattern storage tables are provided. In the present embodiment, the jackpot / small jackpot that is selected when a big hit state or a jackpot state occurs, the front / rear outfit that is selected when the front / rear detachment occurs, and the reach other than the front / back miss There are two types, one for non-front / rear selection, which is selected when the ball is generated, and the other for other cases (when no reach is generated). Two are prepared, one selected in the case of a high pitched state and the other selected.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when referring to the normal hold pattern storage table for losing front and back, a color having a higher expected expectation is selected than when referring to the normal hold pattern storage table for big hit / small hit. It is easy, and when referring to the normal holding pattern storage table for detachment other than before and after, it is harder to win than when referring to the customized winning value storage table for big hits / small hits. In the present embodiment, the color of the jewel 414 is white as a default, and is associated so that the winning expectation degree is high, such as blue <yellow <green <red <rainbow. It should be noted that the present embodiment is configured so that white may be selected even when each normal hold pattern storage table is referenced in step S7110 performed when it is determined that the winning is determined in step S7102. Yes.

  In addition, when referring to a customized winning value storage table for other than that, it is easier to select a color having a lower expected expectation than when referring to a normal reserved pattern storage table for losing outside of the preceding and following. Further, in the present embodiment, when the normal holding pattern storage table is referred to in the high pitching state, a color having a higher expected expectation is selected than when the normal holding pattern storage table is referred to in the low pitching state. It has become difficult.

  Thereafter, the determined pattern of the normal hold icon 412 is stored in the hold icon storage area. In the present embodiment, when “white” is selected as the pattern of the normal hold icon 412 (other patterns are not selected), the storage process in the hold icon storage area is not particularly performed, and the default value is set. It is supposed to be left as it is.

  After step S7110, in step S7111, a holding process for additionally displaying the normal holding icon 412 corresponding to the current increase is performed in the holding display area 405 at the lower left of the decorative symbol display device. That is, when information indicating the normal hold icon 412 is stored in the hold icon storage area, the corresponding normal hold icon 412 is displayed in the hold display area 405.

  However, in step S7111, first, it is grasped that the current hold icon 411 is within the fourth in the order of change, and if it is within the fourth, is the specific number. If it is within the fourth, the holding icon 411 is grasped by referring to the holding icon storage area of the corresponding holding area, and the holding icon 411 drawn based on the pattern is displayed in the holding display area 405. Display at the corresponding position. After step S7111, the process ends.

  If a negative determination is made in step S7102, additional display processing of the normal hold icon 412 is performed in step S7112. That is, since a default value is set in the hold icon storage area, based on this value, the normal hold icon 412 (white color) that has been increased this time is displayed in the hold display area 405 at the lower left of the decorative symbol display device 42. Jewels 414) are additionally displayed.

  However, also in step S7112, if the hold icon 411 of this time is within the fourth in the order of change, and if it is within the fourth, it is determined what is the specific number and within the fourth. The normal hold icon 412 is displayed at a corresponding position in the hold display area 405. After step S7112, the process ends.

  Next, customizing variation processing related to customization performed at the start of decoration symbol variation will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S7201, it is determined whether or not the customization chance flag of the execution area of the hold information storage area is set on. If a negative determination is made in step S7201, this processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if a positive determination is made in step S7201, processing for displaying a parts selection screen as shown in FIG. 48 is performed in step S7202. Specifically, based on the information of the part object 433 stored in the hold icon storage area of the execution area (the item hold icon 416 displayed in the hold display area 405 at the time of the previous change display). The part object 433 is displayed at the center of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 42 (in this example, it is displayed in the same manner as the item hold icon 416). In addition, an explanatory text “Do you want to use the acquired part” is displayed above the part object 433 in the center of the screen, and “Yes” or “No” is displayed below the part object 433 in the center of the screen. Are selected and can be selected and input by operating the cross button 126 and the effect button 125. In the tuning area 406, the part corresponding to the part object 433 at the center of the screen of the incomplete vehicle 431 is displayed in a blinking manner.

  In the following step S7203, the display time (input time limit) for displaying the part selection screen is set in the timing measurement timer. More specifically, in the present embodiment, the decorative symbol 421 (basically the left symbol display in this example) is displayed in any one of the three symbol display areas 401, 402, 403 from the start of the decorative symbol variation display. The parts selection screen display is performed in such a manner that the image is replaced during a period (high-speed fluctuation period) in which the decoration symbol 421) in the area 401 is stopped and displayed. Accordingly, in step S7203, the time of the high-speed fluctuation period of the fluctuation display is grasped, and a value corresponding to the time is set in the timing measurement timer.

  After step S7203, in step S7204, a part selection screen display flag indicating that the part selection screen is being displayed is set on, and then the process ends.

  Next, part selection processing that is processing during display of the part selection screen will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S7301, it is determined whether or not a part selection screen display flag is set to ON. If a negative determination is made in step S7301, this processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S7301, it is determined in step S7302 whether or not "No" has been input on the part selection screen. If an affirmative determination is made in step S7302, a process for deleting the parts selection screen is performed in step S7303. Subsequently, in step S7304, the part selection screen display flag is turned off, and then this process ends.

  If a negative determination is made in step S7302, it is determined in step S7305 whether or not "yes" has been input on the part selection screen. If an affirmative determination is made in step S7305, the part object 433 displayed in the center of the part selection screen is reflected in the corresponding part (corresponding customization item) of the unfinished vehicle 431 in the tuning area 406 in step S7306. The reflection flag indicating that is turned on. After step S7306, the processing of step S7303 and step S7304 is executed, and then this processing ends.

  If a negative determination is made in step S7305, it is determined in step S7307 whether or not the timing measurement timer has become “0”. If a negative determination is made in step S7307, the value of the timing measurement timer is decremented by 1 in step S7308, and then this process ends.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S7307, that is, if the display (possible) period of the parts selection screen has ended, the reflection flag is set on in step S7306, and then the processing in steps S7303 and S7304 is executed. Then, this process ends. In the present embodiment, if no selection input of “Yes” or “No” is performed within the display period of the parts selection screen, it is considered that the selection input of “Yes” is performed. Although the reflection flag is turned on, a configuration in which the reflection flag is not set on may be employed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the display (possible) period of the parts selection screen corresponds to the high-speed change period of the change display of the decorative symbols on the decorative symbol display device 42, and “Yes” is displayed within the display period of the parts selection screen. When the selection input of “No” or “No” is not performed at all, not only the parts selection screen is erased, but also the high-speed fluctuation of the decorative design is terminated. In addition, if “Yes” or “No” is selected and input within the display period of the parts selection screen, the high-speed fluctuation of the variable display is displayed until the high-speed fluctuation period of the decorative pattern fluctuation display ends. The Rukoto.

  Next, a reflection process for reflecting the part object 433 to the incomplete vehicle 431 will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, in the present embodiment, the number of completed vehicles 441 displayed in the gallery area 407 is up to two, and the tuning area is displayed with two completed vehicles 441 displayed in the gallery area 407. When 406 unfinished vehicles 431 are completed, the player selects one of the three completed vehicles 441 including the completed vehicle 441 just completed, and deletes it. At this time, information of the two completed vehicles 441 to be stored is stored in the completed customization storage area.

  First, in step S7401, it is determined whether the reflection flag is set on. If a negative determination is made in step S7401, this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S7401, the part object 433 (part object displayed in the center of the part selection screen) stored in the hold icon storage area of the execution area of the hold information storage area is determined in step S7402. 433) is stored in the corresponding storage area in the incomplete customization storage area.

  The incomplete vehicle 431 displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42 is drawn based on information stored in the incomplete customization storage area. For this reason, storing the information of the part object 433 in the incomplete customization storage area results in the part object 433 being reflected in the corresponding part (corresponding customization item) of the incomplete vehicle 431. Incidentally, the completed vehicle 441 is drawn based on information stored in the completed customization storage area.

  After step S7402, in step S7403, whether or not the incomplete vehicle 431 in the tuning area 406 is completed, that is, the part object 433 (customization pattern) is stored corresponding to each customization item in the incomplete customization storage area. It is determined whether or not the information of the part object 433 is stored in all the storage areas to be stored (whether or not the default value is lost).

  If a negative determination is made in step S7403, that is, if there is a customization item for which the part object 433 has not yet been set for the incomplete vehicle 431, the decorative symbol display device 42 stores the hold information in step S7404. Processing for performing reflection display such that the part object 433 stored in the hold icon storage area of the execution area of the area is mounted (customized) on the incomplete vehicle 431 in the tuning area 406 (reflection display when incomplete) Process).

  By performing the incomplete reflection display process, the reflection display performed in the decorative symbol display device 42 is displayed in the center of the screen on the parts selection screen (see FIG. 48) as shown in FIG. The part object 433 is displayed in a transition to the tuning area 406 at the lower right of the screen, and is further applied to the corresponding part of the unfinished vehicle 431, and the displayed part object 433 blinks brightly for a while. Is called. After step S7404, the process ends.

  If the determination in step S7403 is affirmative, that is, if the parts object 433 is reflected in all customization items of the incomplete vehicle 431 in the tuning area 406 and becomes the complete vehicle 441, incomplete in step S7405. The storage information in the customized storage area is stored (copied) in the completed vehicle storage area.

  In this embodiment, apart from the completed customization storage area and the incomplete customization storage area, a completed vehicle accumulation storage area is provided as a completed object accumulation storage means for storing information of the completed vehicle 441 completed in the current mobile linked game. ing. When the incomplete vehicle 431 in the tuning area 406 is completed, information on the completed vehicle 441 (a combination of the part objects 433) is always stored in the completed vehicle accumulation storage area. The stored contents of the complete vehicle storage area are deleted even if the information of the corresponding complete vehicle 441 is deleted in the complete customization storage area (the corresponding complete vehicle 441 is deleted on the screen of the decorative symbol display device 42). However, it is stored continuously (for example, 50 units can be stored and stored). However, when the code issuance screen is closed after issuing the QR code to end the mobile linked game, the stored information of the completed vehicle storage area, the completed customization storage area, and the incomplete customization storage area is stored in other individuals. It will be erased (default value is set) together with the data (game information of the individual player who finished the mobile linked game).

  When the mobile linked game is ended, the completed vehicle storage area and the incomplete customized storage area are referred to when the QR code is issued, and the completed QR code is completed during the current mobile linked game. The information of the car 441 and the information of the incomplete car 431 at the end of the mobile linked game are set to be included. In correspondence with each player, the server accumulates and stores information on the completed vehicle 441 completed by the player so far, and an unstored vehicle 431 for storing information on the incomplete vehicle 431. And a completed vehicle storage area. When the server receives the information related to customization, the server stores information on the incomplete vehicle 431 at the end of the game in the incomplete vehicle storage area, and configures the completed vehicle 441 newly completed in this game. When the combination of the part objects 433 is new, the information on the completed vehicle 441 is stored (added) in the server-side completed vehicle storage area. In the present embodiment, the server-side completed vehicle storage area and the incomplete vehicle storage area constitute server side continuous display object information storage means.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the player is configured to be able to set customization on the web page of the server. Examples of such setting items include setting whether to take over the contents of the unfinished vehicle 431 at the end of the previous mobile-linked game (if the setting is not made, “takeover” is selected), and completed so far A setting for selecting up to two completed vehicles 441 to be displayed in the gallery area 407 of the decorative symbol display device 42 at the start of the mobile linked game from the completed vehicle list (if no setting is made, “ None is selected). And the setting information regarding such customization is included in the password.

  Then, in the next mobile linked game, by inputting the password to the pachinko machine 10, the unfinished car 431 at the end of the previous game is displayed in the tuning area 406 of the decorative symbol display device 42, and the customization is continued. And a favorite completed vehicle 441 can be displayed in the gallery area 407.

  After step S7405, in step S7406, whether or not there is a vacancy in the gallery area 407, that is, at least one of the first completed customization storage area and the second completed customization storage area stores information on the completed vehicle 441. It is determined whether or not it is in a state where it is not performed (a state where a default value is set). More specifically, for example, it is determined whether or not the value is a default value by referring to a storage area corresponding to a predetermined customization item in the first completed customization storage area. You may comprise so that it may determine whether it is a default value with reference to the storage area corresponding to the predetermined customization item of a completion customization storage area.

  It should be noted that when confirming whether or not the information on the completed vehicle 441 is stored in the completed customization storage area in step S7406, etc., it is referred to among the storage areas provided corresponding to the plurality of customization items in each completed customization storage area. If the storage area is determined, the stored contents in the referenced storage area can be deleted without deleting all the stored contents in the storage areas corresponding to the plurality of customization items in each completed customized storage area. It is determined that the information of the completed vehicle 441 is not stored simply by leaving it. Therefore, when erasing the storage of each completed customization storage area, by adopting a configuration that deletes only the storage area that may be referred to when confirming whether the information of the completed vehicle 441 is stored, Simplification of processing related to erasure can be achieved.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S7406, that is, if there is a vacancy in the gallery area 407 (only one complete vehicle 441 is displayed or no one is displayed), in step S7407, The storage information of the incomplete customization storage area is stored (copied) in the empty first completed customization storage area or the second completed customization storage area.

  In the subsequent step S7408, in the decorative symbol display device 42, the part object 433 stored in the hold icon storage area in the execution area of the hold information storage area is mounted on the incomplete vehicle 431 in the tuning area 406 (customized). ) And a display for completion display such as shifting to the gallery area 407 because the unfinished vehicle 431 displayed in the tuning area 406 is completed (reflection display process at completion). After step S7408, the storage information in the incomplete customization storage area is reset (set a default value) in step S7409, and then this process is terminated.

  If a negative determination is made in step S7406, that is, if two completed vehicles 441 are already displayed in the gallery area 407, an incomplete vehicle 431 in the tuning area 406 is completed, in step S7410, A process for displaying a completed vehicle selection screen for allowing the player to select one to be deleted from the three completed vehicles 441 is performed.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 50, on the completed vehicle selection screen, an explanatory note such as “It is full. Please select one completed vehicle to be erased” is displayed at the top of the decorative symbol display device 42 and the decorative symbol is displayed. Side by side in the center of the display device 42, from the left, a completed vehicle 441 corresponding to the first completed customization storage area, a completed vehicle 441 corresponding to the second completed customization storage area, and a completed vehicle 441 corresponding to the incomplete customization storage area. Is displayed, and a selection item such as “Erase this” is displayed below each completed vehicle 441. In addition, on the completed vehicle selection screen, for example, you can check all completed vehicles (including deleted ones) that you have acquired today by accessing the homepage (server) after the game ends. In addition, in the next mobile-linked game, you can select the completed vehicle that will be used in the actual machine (pachinko machine) from the completed cars that you have obtained, and use it for production etc. " For example, scroll display from right to left below the selection item (not shown in FIG. 50) is performed.

  After step S7410, in step S7411, the display time (input time limit) of the completed vehicle selection screen is set in the timing measurement timer. In the present embodiment, the display period of the completed vehicle selection screen is set to end at least until the display of the variation of the decorative symbol on which the completed vehicle selection screen is displayed ends. For example, in the case of “big hit”, “small hit”, “rear out of front / rear reach”, and “reach other than out of front / rear”, the reach state is started. On the other hand, in the case of “completely off” in which the reach state does not occur, it is set until immediately before the end of the variable display. Therefore, in step S7411, the type of variation display and the remaining variation time are grasped, and the corresponding value is set in the timing measurement timer.

  After step S7411, in step S7412, a complete vehicle selection screen display flag indicating that the complete vehicle selection screen is being displayed is set on, and then the process ends.

  Next, a complete vehicle selection process that is a process during display of the complete vehicle selection screen will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S7501, it is determined whether or not a complete vehicle selection screen display flag indicating that a complete vehicle selection screen is being displayed is set on. If a negative determination is made in step S7501, this processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S7501, it is determined in step S7502 whether or not deletion input of the first completed customization storage area has been performed, that is, the completed vehicle displayed on the “left” on the completed vehicle selection screen. It is determined whether or not the effect button 125 is operated in a state where the cursor is positioned on the option located below. If an affirmative determination is made in step S7502, the storage information of the incomplete customization storage area is stored (overwritten) in the first completion customization storage area in step S7503.

  After step S7503, in step S7504, the storage information in the incomplete customization storage area is reset (default value is set). In a succeeding step S7505, a process for displaying such that the completed vehicle 441 that has not been deleted moves to the gallery area 407 is performed. After step S7505, in step S7511, the completed vehicle selection screen display flag is turned off, and then the present process ends.

  If a negative determination is made in step S7502, it is determined in step S7506 whether or not deletion input of the second completed customization storage area has been performed, that is, the completed vehicle displayed in “middle” on the completed vehicle selection screen. It is determined whether or not the effect button 125 is operated in a state where the cursor is positioned on the option located below. If an affirmative determination is made in step S7506, in step S7507, the storage information of the incomplete customization storage area is stored (overwritten) in the second completion customization storage area. After step S7507, the processing of step S7504, step S7505, and step S7511 is executed, and then this processing ends.

  If a negative determination is made in step S7506, it is determined in step S7508 whether or not an unfinished customization storage area has been erased, that is, below the completed vehicle displayed “right” on the completed vehicle selection screen. It is determined whether or not the effect button 125 has been operated in a state where the cursor is placed on the option located at. If an affirmative determination is made in step S7508, the processing of step S7504, step S7505, and step S7511 is executed, and then this processing ends.

  If a negative determination is made in step S7508, it is determined in step S7509 whether or not the value of the timing measurement timer has become zero. If a negative determination is made in step S7509, in step S7510, the value of the timing measurement timer is decremented by 1, and then this process ends. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S7509, the processing of step S7504, step S7505, and step S7511 is executed, and then this processing ends. That is, when the player does not perform an erasing input operation while the completed vehicle selection screen is displayed, the unfinished vehicle 431 displayed in the tuning area 406 is returned to a state that is not customized at all, and the gallery area 407 The completed vehicle 441 is left as it is.

  In the present embodiment, when the sub control device 262 receives from the main control device 261 a variation pattern command corresponding to “big hit”, “small hit”, or “front / rear out of reach”, a reach effect (super As one of the reach effects, “car effect” may be selected. For example, when the variable display is set in step S3907, the “car effect” is selected at a ratio of 3/4 in the variable display teaching the occurrence of the big hit state or the small hit state, and the front / rear reach is derived. When displaying the fluctuation, “car effect” is selected at a rate of 1/2. The sub-control device 262 according to the present embodiment is provided with a “car effect flag” indicating that “car effect” is derived. The car production flag is set on.

  Next, the vehicle effect setting process performed when “vehicle effect” is determined will be described with reference to FIG. Note that the vehicle effect process is also performed when setting the decorative display variation display in the display setting process in step S3907.

  First, in step S7601, it is determined whether or not the vehicle effect flag is on. If a negative determination is made in step S7601, the process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S7601, it is determined in step S7602 whether or not a mobile-linked game is in progress.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S7602, it is determined in step S7603 whether it is a “normal stage” or a “precursor stage”. As described above, the normal stage is an effect state corresponding to the normal mode, and the precursor stage is an effect state suggesting that the user stays in either the normal mode or the latent mode.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S7603, in step S7604, referring to the hold icon storage area (customization chance flag) in the execution area of the hold information storage area, a customization chance is given in the variable display (part selection). Whether or not the screen is displayed). If a negative determination is made in step S7604, that is, if a customization chance is not given, a normal vehicle effect setting process is performed in step S7605.

  Here, the outline of the vehicle effect in the normal stage and the precursor stage will be described. Car production is divided into “competition part” and “preparation part before competition”. First, when the vehicle production is started, the type of the vehicle production is taught, and the preparation of the competition is entered, and the completed vehicle 441 that participates in the competition is selected. Therefore, when two completed vehicles 441 are displayed in the gallery area 407, a screen for allowing the player to select one of them is displayed. And when selection input is performed, until the start timing of the game arrives, a display that introduces the selected completed vehicle 441 is performed, and when the start time of the game arrives, An effect that a predetermined character gets on the selected completed vehicle 441 and a battle with a rival character is unfolded in the selected competition is started.

  In addition, in the vehicle production (normal vehicle production) of the normal stage and the precursor stage in the present embodiment, it is “successful” when there is a big hit with a ball (16RS, 8RS, 8RN), and the front / rear reach (disengagement). If it becomes “failure” and there is a promising big hit (2RS) or a small win, there will be “not settled (draw)”.

  If the selection input is not performed until the start timing of the game comes, the completed vehicle 441 (left completed vehicle 441) corresponding to the first completed customization storage area is automatically selected. When only one completed vehicle 441 is displayed in the gallery area 407, the completed vehicle 441 is automatically selected. Further, when no completed car 441 is displayed in the gallery area 407, the family car is automatically selected.

  In the present embodiment, the combination of the “type of vehicle production (competition)” and the “type of completed vehicle 441 used for the vehicle production (participating in the competition)” succeeds in the “car production”. The degree of expectation, that is, the degree of occurrence expectation of a big hit state with a ball is suggested. As described above, the types (systems) of the completed vehicle 441 of this embodiment include a sports car system, a family car system, an armored vehicle system, a 4WD car system, a decoration car system, a truck system, and a rear car system.

  Further, the types of car production include “race production”, “power comparison production”, “contest production”, and “date production”. As for “race production”, “sports car system, family car system” (hereinafter, these two systems are collectively referred to as “group A”) is relatively advantageous. “System” (hereinafter these two systems are collectively referred to as “Group B”), and “Contest production” is “Decoration car system, truck system” (hereinafter these two systems are collectively referred to as “Group C”). Are associated with each other. Furthermore, the “sports car system” is more advantageous than the “family car system”, the “armored vehicle system” is more advantageous than the “4WD car system”, and the “decoration car system” is more advantageous than the “truck system”. Such a correspondence is made. In addition, the “date production” is set so that there is no superiority or inferiority in “Group A” to “Group C”. The “mix system” and the “rear car system” are set so that there is no superiority or inferiority in the type of “car production”.

  Here, the normal vehicle effect setting process in step S7605 will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S7701, it is determined whether or not information on the completed vehicle 441 is stored in the first completed customization storage area. If the determination in step S7701 is affirmative, in step S7702, the type of the completed vehicle 441 stored in the first completed customization storage area is confirmed. In other words, each customization item in the first completed customization storage area is checked, and in this embodiment, when three or more customization items are grouped in the same system, such system is used for the completed vehicle 441. If there are at most two customization items of the same system, the system is determined as other (hereinafter also referred to as “mix system”).

  Further, the sub-control device 262 is provided with a system discrimination flag used in the vehicle effect setting process, and the system discrimination flag includes a sports car system, a family car system, an armored car system, a 4WD car system, and a decoration car system. 8 flags corresponding to the truck system, the rear car system, and the mix system individually. Then, the system determination flag corresponding to the type (system) of the completed vehicle 441 determined in step S7702 is turned on in step S7703.

  After step S7703 or if a negative determination is made in step S7701, it is determined in step S7704 whether or not information on the completed vehicle 441 is stored in the second completed customization storage area. If an affirmative determination is made in step S7704, in step S7705, confirmation processing of the type of the completed vehicle 441 stored in the second completed customization storage area is performed. In the subsequent step S7706, the system determination flag corresponding to the type (system) of the completed vehicle 441 determined in step S7705 is set on. After step S7706, the process proceeds to step S7709.

  If a negative determination is made in step S7704, it is determined in step S7707 whether or not information on the completed vehicle 441 is stored in the first completed customization storage area. When a negative determination is made in step S7707, that is, when the information of the completed vehicle 441 is not stored in either the first completed customization storage area or the second completed customization storage area (the completed vehicle 441 is displayed in the gallery area 407). If there is no vehicle), in step S7708, the system discrimination flag corresponding to the family car system is set to ON. After step S7708 or when an affirmative determination is made in step S7707, the process proceeds to step S7709.

  In step S7709, with reference to the system determination flag, it is determined whether the type of the completed vehicle 441 is “rear car system” or “mix car system”. In this embodiment, when the type of the completed vehicle 441 is determined with reference to the system determination flag, “flag corresponding to the rear car” → “flag corresponding to the decoration car” → “flag corresponding to the armored vehicle” → “sport car” Is referred to in the order (rare order) of “flag corresponding to” → “flag corresponding to truck” → “flag corresponding to 4WD car” → “flag corresponding to family car”. Then, when the system discrimination flag that is set to ON is confirmed (even when the two system discrimination flags are turned on), the process of specifying the type of the completed vehicle 441 is ended.

  If a negative determination is made in step S7709, it is determined in step S7710 whether or not the current vehicle production is successful, that is, whether or not a big hit with a ball comes out. If an affirmative determination is made in step S7710, the type of vehicle production is determined in step S7711 by referring to the vehicle production table for success based on the value of the vehicle production random number counter.

  For example, the vehicle effect random number counter is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 14, for example, and after reaching the upper limit value (that is, 14) as the closing price, it returns to 0 that is the lower limit value as the opening price. . The vehicle effect random number counter is updated periodically (for example, for each normal process), and the value is stored in the corresponding counter buffer. In step S7711, the value of the vehicle effect random number counter is acquired from the counter buffer. The car effect table is a table that stores the correspondence between the value of the car effect random number counter and the type (type category) of the car effect. As shown in FIG. 62, “for success”, “for failure” ”,“ For draw ”,“ For special success ”, and“ For special failure / draw ”.

  The process of step S7711 will be described more specifically. As shown in FIG. 62 (a), when referring to the vehicle effect table for success, the value of the vehicle effect random number counter is “0 to 5”. When the value of the car production random number counter is “6 to 9”, the vehicle production type is classified as “category 2” and the value of the car production random number counter is determined. Is “10-12”, it is determined as the category of “Category 3” car effect, and when the value of the car effect random number counter is “13, 14”, it is determined as the type of “Category 4” vehicle effect. Is done.

  Subsequently, referring to the vehicle type correspondence table storing the correspondence relationship between the type (vehicle type group) of the completed vehicle 441 and the type (type category) of the vehicle production shown in FIG. 63, the vehicle type group of the completed vehicle 441 and the vehicle production The type of vehicle production is determined based on the type category. That is, when the vehicle type group is “Group A; sports car system, family car system”, if the category category of the vehicle production is “Category 1”, “Race production” is selected, and the category category of the vehicle production is “ When “Category 2” is selected, “Date effect” is selected, when “Category effect” is selected when the category category of the car effect is “Category 3”, and when the category category of the car effect is “Category 4”. Is selected as “Compare Power”.

  In addition, when the vehicle type group is “Group B; armored vehicle system, 4WD car system”, when the category category of the vehicle production is “Category 1”, “Comparison of power” is selected, and the category category of the vehicle production is “ When “Category 2” is selected, “Date effect” is selected, when “Category 3” is selected as the category category of car effect, “Race effect” is selected, and when “Category 4” is selected as the category category of car effect. “Contest production” is selected.

  Furthermore, in the case where the vehicle type group is “Group C; decoration car system, truck system”, when the category category of the vehicle production is “Category 1”, “Contest production” is selected, and the category category of the vehicle production is “Category”. When “2” is selected, “Date effect” is selected, when “Category 3” is selected as the category category of the car effect, “Compare power effect” is selected, and when the category category of the car effect is “Category 4” “Race production” is selected.

  After step S7711, this process ends. Also, if a negative determination is made in step S7710, it is determined in step S7712 whether or not the vehicle effect fails, that is, whether or not the display is a variation display corresponding to “displacement (front / rear disengagement)”. If an affirmative determination is made in step S7712, in step S7713, the vehicle production table for failure (see FIG. 62B) is referred to based on the value of the vehicle production random number counter, etc. And determining the type of the vehicle production based on the type category of the vehicle production and the vehicle type group. After step S7713, the process ends.

  Also, if a negative determination is made in step S7712, that is, if there is no big hit (2RS) or a small win, in step S7714, the car effect table for the draw based on the value of the car effect random number counter or the like. With reference to (see FIG. 62C), the type category of the vehicle effect is determined, and the type of the vehicle effect is determined based on the type category of the vehicle effect and the vehicle type group. After step S7714, this process ends.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S7709, it is determined in step S7715 whether the vehicle effect is successful. If an affirmative determination is made in step S7715, in step S7716, the vehicle effect table for special success (see FIG. 62 (d)) is referred to based on the value of the vehicle effect random number counter, etc. The category is determined, and the type of the vehicle production is determined based on the type category of the vehicle production and the vehicle type group. After step S7716, this process ends.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S7715, in step S7717, the vehicle effect table for special failure / drawing (see FIG. 62 (e)) is referred to based on the value of the vehicle effect random number counter, etc. The type category of the vehicle production is determined, and the type of the vehicle production is determined based on the type category of the vehicle production and the vehicle type group. After step S7717, this process ends.

  Returning to FIG. 59, after step S7605, the vehicle effect flag is turned off in step S7606. In subsequent step S7611, a vehicle effect execution flag indicating that the vehicle effect is set is set on, and in step S7612, a value corresponding to the vehicle effect timer for measuring the time until the vehicle effect is executed is set. To do. Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  In addition, when an affirmative determination is made in step S7604, that is, when a chance of customization is given in the variable display (part selection screen is displayed), the vehicle effect is not set in step S7606. After turning off the effect flag and performing the processes of step S7611 and step S7612, the present process is terminated. In other words, as described above, in the car production, the type of the completed car 441 and the type of the car production are associated with each other according to the expected degree of winning for the occurrence of a big hit state with a ball. In the stage and the precursor stage, the player selects a completed vehicle 441 to be used for the vehicle production from the completed vehicles 441 displayed in the gallery area 407 in the vehicle production. For this reason, in the configuration in which the type of the vehicle effect is determined at the start of the variable display, after the number of completed vehicles 441 used for the vehicle effect is increased or changed after the type of the vehicle effect is determined, There is a possibility that a deviation may occur between the correspondence relationship between the type of the completed vehicle 441 and the type of the vehicle effect and the winning expectation. Therefore, in order to avoid such a situation, in this example, the vehicle effect is not derived in the variable display in which the incomplete vehicle 431 in the tuning area 406 may be completed.

  If a negative determination is made in step S7603, it is determined in step S7607 whether or not it is a probability variation stage. If an affirmative determination is made in step S7607, in step S7608, the vehicle effect is set on the probability change stage (the vehicle effect setting process at the time of probability change).

  In “Car Produce” of “Probability Change Stage”, if it is a jackpot with a ball (16RS, 8RS), that is, “Continuation of the probability change stage after occurrence of a jackpot condition”, it will be “Success”, and the front / rear reach (off) ) Will be “not settled (draw)” and will be a normal jackpot (2RN) or small hit without a ball, that is, “the probability variation stage will end” or “the probability variation stage will end” If the probability variation stage of “Continues (Fakes)”, “Fail”.

  The “probability change stage” is different from the “normal stage” and the “precursor stage” in the manner of visual recognition of the background and the like on the decorative symbol display device 42, and basically displays that the complete vehicle 441 continues to travel. In the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not the jackpot mode is at the end of the jackpot state (timing of the end of the ending effect) or after the end, and when it is determined that the mode is the jackpot mode, the occurrence of the jackpot state this time is “ In the case of being taught by “car effect”, a display is shown in which the completed vehicle 441 used for the car effect travels on the decorative symbol display device 42. On the other hand, if the winning instruction is other than the car production, a display for selecting a completed vehicle 441 to be run at the end of the jackpot or after the end from the completed vehicles displayed in the gallery area 407 is displayed. Done. In addition, even after the start of the probability variation stage, the completed vehicle 441 traveling can be replaced with the completed vehicle 441 in the gallery area by a player's operation. Is configured such that an opportunity to change the completed vehicle 441 is not given. That is, the completed vehicle 441 that is traveling is directly derived to the “car effect”. For this reason, regarding the probability-changing vehicle effect setting process in step S7608, since the type of the completed vehicle 441 used for the vehicle effect is specified at the start of the variable display, the step of the normal vehicle effect setting process (see FIG. 60). Processing similar to the processing after S7709 (however, the correspondence between the success or failure of the vehicle effect and the hit type is different) is performed.

  After step S7608, the vehicle effect flag is turned off in step S7606, the processes in steps S7611 and S7612 are performed, and then the present process ends. In the “probability stage”, customization to the incomplete vehicle 431 is performed in the same manner as the “normal stage” and “precursor stage”.

  Also, if a negative determination is made in step S7607, that is, if it is a pull-back stage (either the time reduction mode or the probability variation mode, but the teaching of which is not made), in step S7609 Then, the setting of the car effect in the pull back stage (the pull back car effect setting process) is performed.

  In the “car production” of the “retraction stage”, when the hit is a big hit with a ball (16RS, 8RS), that is, “when the big hit state occurs, the stage shifts to a probability change stage”, the result is “success”. “Failure” when it comes off, and “not settled (draw)” when it is a normal big hit (2 RN) or small hit without a ball.

  Further, in the “pulling back stage”, similarly to the “probability changing stage”, the display of the completed vehicle 441 is basically continued (the background and the like are different from the “probability changing stage”). Then, in step S7609, the type of the finished vehicle 441 that is running is grasped, and the same processing as the probability-changing vehicle production setting processing (however, the success / failure of the vehicle production and the correspondence type with the hit type are different) is performed. It will be.

  After step S7609, the vehicle effect flag is turned off in step S7606, the processes in steps S7611 and S7612 are performed, and then the present process ends. In the “retraction stage”, customization to the incomplete vehicle 431 is performed in the same manner as the “normal stage” and “precursor stage”.

  If the determination in step S7602 is negative, in step S7610, a no-mobile-linked vehicle effect setting process is performed. In the no mobile linked gaming state, the vehicle used for the vehicle presentation cannot be customized, and the vehicle used (the completed vehicle 441) is unilaterally selected by the sub-control device 262 during the vehicle presentation. The Therefore, regarding the no-mobile-linked vehicle effect setting process, after the process of selecting the completed vehicle 441 used for the vehicle effect is performed, the same process as the probability-changing vehicle effect setting process (however, the success or failure of the vehicle effect is determined). , The correspondence relationship with the hit type is different). After step S7610, this process ends.

  Note that in the no-mobile linked gaming state, for example, only the family car system may be used for the vehicle effect, or a lottery for determining the vehicle type may be performed.

  Next, a vehicle effect execution process for executing a vehicle effect will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S7801, it is determined whether or not the vehicle effect execution flag is set to ON. If a negative determination is made in step S7801, this processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S7801, use car selection indicating that a use car selection screen for allowing the player to select a completed car 441 to be used for car production is being displayed in step S7802. It is determined whether or not the on-screen display flag is set on. If a negative determination is made in step S7802, it is determined in step S7803 whether or not the value of the vehicle effect timer has become zero. If a negative determination is made in step S7803, the value of the vehicle effect timer is decremented by 1 in step S7804, and then this process ends.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S7803, it is determined in step S7805 whether or not a mobile-linked game is in progress. If an affirmative determination is made in step S7805, it is determined in step S7806 whether the stage is a normal stage or a precursor stage.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S7806, it is determined in step S7807 whether or not there are memories for two completed vehicles 441 in the completed customization storage area, that is, the first completed customization storage area and the second completed customization. It is determined whether or not the information on the completed vehicle 441 is stored in both storage areas. If an affirmative determination is made in step S7807, in step S7808, processing for displaying a used vehicle selection screen is performed. For example, on the used car selection screen, the completed vehicle 441 in the first completed customization storage area is displayed on the left and the completed vehicle 441 in the second completed customization storage area is displayed on the right in the center of the decorative symbol display device 42 in the vertical direction. In the upper part, for example, a guidance such as “Please select one completed vehicle to be used for the vehicle presentation” is displayed, and a selection item such as “Use this vehicle” is displayed below each completed vehicle 441. Is done.

  In the following step S7809, the used car selection screen display flag is set to ON, and in step S7810, a value corresponding to the display time of the used car selection screen is set in the car production timer, and then this process ends. . In addition, when displaying a use vehicle selection screen, it is necessary to ensure the display time. For this reason, for example, in the vehicle production setting process of FIG. 59, when it is determined that the stage is the normal stage or the precursor stage, the vehicle production timer setting process in step S7612 corresponds to a shorter time than the other cases. The value may be set in the vehicle production timer. In this case, it is possible to unify the display time (competition time) of the car performance itself.

  If a negative determination is made in step S7807, it is determined in step S7811 whether or not there is storage for one complete vehicle 441 in the complete customization storage area. If an affirmative determination is made in step S7811, in step S7812, the completed vehicle 441 in the completed customized storage area that has memory is set as the use vehicle in the first completed customization storage area or the second completed customization storage area (vehicles). Information on the corresponding completed vehicle 441 is stored in the used vehicle storage area referred to when rendering the effect).

  In a succeeding step S7813, the corresponding completed customization storage area is reset (default value is set). In other words, in the present embodiment, once the completed vehicle 441 is used for the vehicle production, the completed vehicle 441 used once for the vehicle production (regardless of the result of the vehicle production) is displayed in the decorative design display after the completion of the vehicle production. It is configured to be erased from the screen (gallery area 407) of the device 42. After step S7813, this process ends.

  If a negative determination is made in step S7811, that is, if there is no completed vehicle 441 in the gallery area 407, “family car” is set as the use vehicle in step S7814. Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  If a negative determination is made in step S7806, that is, if it is a probability variation stage or a pull-back stage, in step S7815, the vehicle that uses the completed vehicle 441 displayed on the decoration symbol display device 42 as it is for the vehicle production. Set as. In a succeeding step S7816, the corresponding completed customization storage area is reset. Thereafter, this process is terminated. In addition, when the big hit state with a ball does not occur after the end of the change display in which the vehicle effect is performed, the travel customization display is performed until the vehicle effect is displayed and information on the completed vehicle 441 used for the vehicle effect is stored. The information on the completed vehicle 441 in the area is deleted. For this reason, after the vehicle production (after the vehicle production failure), when the information of the completed vehicle 441 is stored in the completed customization storage area that has not been deleted, the completed vehicle 441 is displayed as a running vehicle. When the information 441 is not stored, “Family car” is displayed. Also, in the probability variation stage or the pull back stage, when the unfinished vehicle 431 is completed, the completed vehicle 441 is displayed in the gallery area 407. If the completed vehicle 441 exists in the gallery area 407, the completed vehicle 441 is displayed. Can be displayed.

  If a negative determination is made in step S7805, that is, if a no-mobile-linked game is being played, the vehicle set in the no-mobile-linked vehicle effect setting process (see step S7610 in FIG. 59) in step S7817. Is set in the used car (information on the completed car 441 is stored in the used car storage area), and then the present process is terminated.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S7802, that is, if the vehicle selection screen is being displayed, whether or not a selection input operation for the completed vehicle 441 used for the vehicle production by the player has been performed in step S7818. Is determined. If the determination in step S7818 is affirmative, in step S7819, the selected completed vehicle 441 is set as a used vehicle (information on the completed vehicle 441 is stored in the used vehicle storage area). In the subsequent step S7820, the corresponding completed customization storage area is reset. Thereafter, in step S7821, the used vehicle selection screen display flag is turned off, and then the present process is terminated.

  If a negative determination is made in step S7818, it is determined in step S7822 whether or not the value of the vehicle effect timer is zero. If a negative determination is made in step S7822, the vehicle effect timer is decremented by 1 in step S7823, and then this process ends.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S7822, in step S7824, the completed vehicle 441 in the first completed customization storage area is set as a used vehicle (information on the completed vehicle 441 is stored in the used vehicle storage area). That is, in the state where two completed vehicles 441 are displayed in the gallery area 407, when the player does not perform a selection input operation at the start of the vehicle production, the completed vehicles 441 ( A completed vehicle 441) arranged on the left side of the gallery area is automatically selected. In a succeeding step S7825, the first completed customization storage area is reset. Thereafter, in step S7821, the used vehicle selection screen display flag is turned off, and then the present process ends.

  Note that the information on the completed vehicle 441 stored in the used vehicle storage area is deleted together with the shift process of the variation information (the used vehicle storage area may be provided in the execution area of the hold information storage area). In addition, after the jackpot state is finished, it is determined whether or not it is a probability change stage or a pullback stage. If an affirmative determination is made, the completed vehicle 441 information stored in the used car storage area is the probability change stage and the pullback stage. It is stored in the traveling vehicle storage area that is referred to when the traveling vehicle is drawn on the stage.

  In addition, the decorative symbol 421 has the same mode in both the mobile-linked game state and the non-mobile-linked game state, and basically has a common mode regardless of the stay stage. In the vehicle effect, a predetermined character object 423 is boarded on the completed vehicle 441 to be used, but the winning expectation may be changed depending on the type of the character object 423. Further, it may be configured such that a player can select and set the character object 423 by a customization function that can be used by performing a mobile linked game.

  As described above in detail, in the present embodiment, the decorative symbol display device 42 is configured to be able to customize a car that can be used for a specific effect (car effect), and the customization is performed over a plurality of variable displays. Done. In other words, a plurality of parts (customization items) that can be customized are set for the vehicle, and by customizing the parts objects 433 prepared in a plurality of patterns corresponding to the respective customization items, Is configured to be performed. In the present embodiment, when the decorative symbol variation display is held and stored, a customization lottery is performed as to whether or not an opportunity (customization chance) to fit the part object 433 to the unfinished vehicle 431 is given, and the customization is performed. When the lottery is won, the type of the part object 433 is determined, and a customization chance is given when the corresponding variable display is started. In this way, while providing an object (car) that can be varied in various ways according to customization that can be performed as the game progresses, the customized car can be used for a specific effect (car effect). By doing so, it is possible to diversify the production and the like, and to suppress the monotonous feeling in the game.

  In addition, regarding a car in the middle of customization (unfinished car 431) in which customization items that have not yet been customized (default) exist, in the tuning area 406 on the lower right side of the decorative symbol display device 42, the variable display is performed a plurality of times. Displayed continuously. Then, regarding the incomplete vehicle 431, when the customization of all the customization items is completed and the completed vehicle 441 is obtained, the completed vehicle 441 is transferred to the gallery area 407 in the upper right part of the decorative symbol display device 42, In the gallery area 407, the display is continuously displayed in a plurality of fluctuating displays so as to wait for an opportunity to be used for a vehicle effect.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, the incomplete vehicle 431 displayed in the tuning area 406 includes a base object 432 drawn as a silhouette (overall image of the car) that imitates the rough outer shape of the car (the completed car 441). , Detailed shapes and colors are drawn, and the base object 432 is applied to the corresponding part “front of body”, “rear of body”, “door”, “tire”, and “engine & muffler” , Each part object 433. That is, the base object 432 is visually recognized in a part that has not been customized, and the part object 433 is visually recognized in a part that has already been customized. In other words, it looks like masking is applied to a portion of the incomplete vehicle 431 that has not yet been customized. Therefore, by confirming the incomplete vehicle 431 in the tuning area 406, it is possible to grasp at a glance that there is a part (customization item) that has not yet been customized (there is room for further customization). Therefore, it is possible to easily and surely understand how far the “car” that can be used for car production, etc. can be customized. Can be found. As a result, the customization function can be fully demonstrated, and the production using the “customizable car” can be fully enjoyed. Furthermore, an increase in interest in the customization function can improve game motivation.

  In addition, since the incomplete vehicle 431 with masking can effectively and clearly recognize that there is a part that has not yet been customized, a separate explanation of the customization function is not performed carefully and at length. You can do it. Therefore, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the flow of performance deteriorates due to the explanation of the customization function (especially, it takes unnecessary time for a player who has already been grasped), and the game can proceed relatively smoothly. Can do.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, each of the customization items and the base object 432 of the unfinished vehicle 431 are defined in order to clarify where the part corresponding to each customization item is divided (where the boundary is). Masking with a different pattern (masking with different colors in this example) is applied to each corresponding part. For this reason, even if masking corresponding to a plurality of customization items is adjacent, it is difficult to determine whether the masking corresponds to one customization item or a plurality of customization items. Can be avoided more reliably. Therefore, the masking area corresponding to a plurality of customization items can be set relatively freely, and by checking the mode of the unfinished vehicle 431 (just by looking at the base object 432), it is still customized. It is possible to grasp at a glance how many remaining parts (customized items) exist (the number of items that have not yet been customized). Therefore, more information about the customization function can be derived more effectively, so that the player can make a decision about the customization function quickly and surely, and he is fully proficient in the customization process as the game progresses can do.

  In the present embodiment, whether or not the part object 433 is reflected on the incomplete vehicle 431 can be selected and determined by the player operating the effect button 125 and the cross button 126. For this reason, the player's individual game history, various settings (preferences), and the like can be reflected in the customization of the incomplete vehicle 431. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of frustration such as customization not being exactly the player's intention while suppressing the one-pattern customization function. As a result, while diversifying the customization function, the player can be more attached to the “car production”, and the game motivation can be improved.

  Furthermore, when a plurality of completed vehicles 441 (up to two in this example) are displayed in the gallery area 407, the player selects a completed vehicle 441 to be used for the vehicle production from the plurality of completed vehicles 441. can do.

  In addition, the type of the specific effect is selected according to the type of the completed vehicle 441 (combination of customization patterns of each customization item) and the winning expectation. For this reason, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the combination of the completed object and the specific effect type is far from the winning expectation.

  Further, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 54, there is a difference in the ease of selecting the customization pattern of the part object 433, and when a predetermined condition is satisfied (in this example, the number of fluctuations is the number of times of the target). In this case, a rare pattern is easily selected. For this reason, by providing a state in which a rare customization pattern is likely to be assigned (the first rare part high-accuracy state, the second rare part high-accuracy state), the interest in the game is different from the elements related to the increase or decrease of the game value. Can increase the chances of production. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a monotonous feeling in the game and improve the game motivation.

  In particular, since the number of executions (variation frequency) of the variation display of the decoration symbol on the decoration symbol display device 42 is an opportunity for the state transition to the first rare part high-accuracy state and the second rare part high-accuracy state, It is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize when the timing of the transition will come. Accordingly, it is possible for a player who wants to play in the first rare parts high-accuracy state and the second rare parts high-accuracy state to make it easier to turn around with the number of fluctuations as a guide, Make it easy to explain the phenomenon corresponding to the high accuracy state of the parts (reasons for selecting a rare customization pattern, and the special effects for the 1st rare parts high accuracy state and the 2nd rare parts high accuracy state are set. This makes it easy to understand the explanation of such effects when there is. Further, since the game is surely approached to the opportunity for the state change by advancing the game, it is possible to add value to the progress of the game.

  In the present embodiment, when the part object 433 is determined (see steps S7105 to S7109 in FIG. 51), the hold information storage area is referred to and displayed in the hold display area 405 (being displayed). It is configured not to select the same part object 433 as the part object 433 of the item hold icon 416. For this reason, for example, the situation where the player feels unpleasant by selecting the same item hold icon 416 in succession can be avoided, and the customization function can be more fully enjoyed.

  In particular, in this embodiment, when it is determined that the part object 433 is duplicated, the customization item is changed without changing the customization pattern having a difference in ease of selection depending on the state. . For this reason, for example, the first rare part high-accuracy state or the second rare part high-accuracy state is not selected in the first rare part high-accuracy state or the second rare parts high-accuracy state, or , It is possible to avoid a situation in which it is changed to a customization pattern that is difficult to select (not rare). Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which an impression that the player has lost an impression or an unfavorable operation is being given.

  Further, in the present embodiment, for the QR code issued when the mobile linked game is ended, information on the incomplete vehicle 431 (unfinished customized storage area) and the completed vehicle 441 completed in the current mobile linked game. Information (information of a complete vehicle storage area) is included. By accessing the server with the mobile communication terminal that has read the QR code, various information included in the QR code is stored on the server side. Further, when the next mobile linked game is performed, when the server is accessed, the setting of whether or not to take over the data of the previous unfinished vehicle 431 and the gallery area 407 of the decorative symbol display device 42 at the start of the mobile linked game are performed. By performing the setting for selecting two of the completed vehicles 441 that have been completed so far, the password including the setting information is issued. Then, by inputting the password to the pachinko machine 10, the incomplete car 431 displayed at the end of the previous game is displayed in the tuning area 406, and the completed car 441 selected by the player is displayed in the gallery area 407. Is displayed.

  In this way, information related to customization can be taken over to the next game (mobile linked game), and if the unfinished vehicle 431 is not completed in one game, an effect using the completed vehicle 441 that has been completed is provided. Like a configuration that can only be seen, it is possible to increase the enjoyment of the next game while suppressing a situation in which the current game is overforced. Accordingly, it is possible to improve convenience, and it is possible to make the production more diverse and profound with respect to the production using the customized vehicle object. In addition, it is possible to accumulate and enjoy the tricks and customizations over many days without having to overdo it with one game.

  Further, since the customization function is effective only when the mobile linked game is being executed, it is possible to increase the willingness to participate in the mobile linked game.

  In addition, for pachinko machines that can customize character costumes and various sound effects, etc., depending on the points obtained by performing mobile linked games, basically various customizations are made on the web page of the server. With the pachinko machine, various customization settings cannot be made. For this reason, even if a new customization can be executed with the points obtained in this mobile linked game, in order to reflect the customization, the current mobile linked game is terminated (a QR code is displayed). And a series of operations such as starting a mobile linked game again (entering a password) is required.

  On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by adopting a configuration in which the player can make various settings related to customization of the “car used for vehicle production” in the pachinko machine 10, the mobile linked game is not terminated once. Even customization can be reflected. Therefore, convenience related to customization can be enhanced, and the customization function can be enjoyed more easily (easy to attach).

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the customization is completed and the completed vehicle 441 that is to be displayed in the gallery area 407 is used for the vehicle production, the completed vehicle 441 is deleted from the gallery area 407. Yes. Further, when two incomplete cars 441 in the gallery area 407 are displayed, when an incomplete car 431 is completed, one of them is deleted. However, the information on the completed vehicle 441 completed in this mobile linked game (information on the combination of the part objects 433 of each customization item constituting the completed vehicle) is always stored in the completed vehicle storage area and the mobile At the end of the linked game, the QR code including the storage information of the completed vehicle storage area is issued. Then, the information on the completed vehicle 441 is sent to the server via the mobile communication terminal and is stored in the server (if it is the first combination). For this reason, for example, it is possible to suppress the feeling of disappearance when the completed car 441 which is finally completed by customizing the incomplete car 431 is erased in the flow of the game, You can add fun to collect.

  In addition, when the completed vehicle 441 is collected without being erased in the pachinko machine 10, for example, the display form of the decorative symbol display device 42 (gallery area 407) becomes messy, or the display process is relatively difficult. It may take a long time to select a vehicle to be used for the vehicle production from the completed vehicle 441, and there is a concern that the production rhythm may be deteriorated or the storage capacity may be increased. However, it is possible to eliminate this concern by erasing the process moderately.

  In the present embodiment, in the completed vehicle selection screen for allowing the player to select a completed vehicle to be deleted from among the three completed vehicles 441, for example, “(Mobile linked) Homepage (server) after the game ends” You can check the completed object you acquired today by selecting, and in the next mobile linked game, select the completed object to be used on the actual machine (gaming machine) from the completed objects that you have acquired, It can be used for production, etc. "is displayed. For this reason, it is possible to clearly recognize how the completed vehicle 441 that has been erased is handled, and it is possible to avoid a situation in which the user is concerned about this and cannot concentrate on the game.

  In the present embodiment, since the customization function is exhibited only in the mobile linked gaming state, it is possible to improve the willingness to participate in the mobile linked gaming. Also, even in the mobile-linked gaming state, the customized lottery is performed in the same manner as the mobile-linked gaming state, and if the customized lottery is won, the suggestion effect (pre-reading pending notice effect) is performed instead of the customization. It is configured. Further, when determining the suggestion effect pattern (the color of the gem 414 of the normal hold icon 412), the value of the pattern random number counter used in determining the customization pattern is acquired and determined based on the value. . Therefore, a pleasure such as an suggestion effect (prefetch hold notice effect) can be given to a player who is not performing a mobile linked game. In addition, the random number counter used for the control and pattern determination related to the pros and cons of such suggestion effects is shared with the random number counter used for control and customization pattern determination related to customization during mobile linked games. Can be simplified, the storage area can be reduced, and the like.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, a starting ball that is output from the main controller 261 when a game ball enters the start winning devices 33a and 33b and the random number counter C1 or the like related to the winning lottery is stored in the special variable holding area. When the sub-control device 262 receives the command and stores the information included in the advance command in the hold information storage area, the customized lottery is performed, and in the case of winning, the customization item and the customization pattern are selected. ing. For this reason, when the variable display is suspended, the customization content, that is, the item suspension icon 416 in which the part object 433 is drawn is displayed in the suspension display area 405, and the customization opportunity is given. The player can be informed of the contents of customization at the time. Therefore, for example, when the variable display is newly held when the variable display is already held, the stage before the newly held variable display is executed, that is, rather than the variable display being held. It is possible to teach the contents of customization that is given based on the fact that the variable display is newly held when the previously held variable display is performed. In this case, the player can respond to the contents of the customization that has been taught (attitude, operation, etc.) with a margin.

  That is, for example, “The item hold icon 416 of the desired part object 433 is displayed, so when performing a customization chance in the corresponding variable display, let's perform an operation to reflect the part object 433 on the unfinished vehicle 431”. Alternatively, “Although the A pattern has been customized for the first customization item of the incomplete vehicle 431, the first and third customization items have the B pattern corresponding to the two variable displays. Since it has been found that customization can be performed, it is possible to make a schedule of operations by sufficiently thinking such as “stop the A pattern system and align it with the B pattern system”. For this reason, for example, when a predetermined operation is requested from the player, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the operation is not in time due to the short input period. In addition, with this configuration, it is not necessary to forcibly lengthen the fluctuation time in order to secure an extra input period for the operation. Can be suppressed.

  In the present embodiment, the background color of the item hold icon 416 and the masking color of the part corresponding to each customization item of the incomplete vehicle 431 correspond to the customization item. As a result, it is possible to easily grasp where the part object 433 of the item hold icon 416 corresponds to the part of the incomplete vehicle 431.

  In addition, it is not limited to the description content of embodiment mentioned above, For example, you may implement as follows.

  (A: Masking pattern) In the above embodiment, the parts corresponding to the respective customization items of the base object 432 of the unfinished vehicle 431 are color-coded. However, the present invention is not particularly limited to this configuration. By performing masking, at least in the unfinished vehicle 431, it is possible to identify that there is an unfinished part (a part corresponding to a customization item that has not yet been customized), and where the unfinished part is. It only needs to be identifiable (except for how many unfinished parts are left). This makes it possible to identify that the unfinished part is not the completed part by masking the unfinished part, and the customization is completed (becomes a completed object) by customizing until there is no unfinished part. Can be identified.

For example, as a mode of “masking”,
1) For a range including a part or all of an incomplete part or at least a part of an incomplete part,
2) A pattern that is not added in the completed part (a pattern composed of lines, faces, spaces, etc., for example, a pattern such as a wallpaper, as well as a stamp (character, character face, etc.) And a mode in which there is only a frame of an unfinished part and a hollow portion is included),
Color aspects that are not derived in the finished part (for example, different hues (for example, sepia tone), different colors (for example, fewer types of hues used, such as monotone tone)), Or
Touch the unfinished part that cannot be derived in the finished part (how to draw a line; thickness, fineness (number of lines), rounded edge, etc.), or
These combinations
3) Covering, shielding, duplication, composition, application, and reflection (on the near side or the back side of the unfinished part).

  Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, the masking patterns of all the customization items are configured to be different (not covered at all), but it is only necessary that the patterns are different from at least the adjacent masking regions. In addition, it may be configured so that masking is performed without dividing each customization item (the base object 432 is made a single color and the boundary line is eliminated) so that it can be understood that there is a part that has not yet been customized. Good. However, it is still customized by making the masking patterns of adjacent masking areas different, or instead of or in addition, by separating the masking areas or drawing a line at the boundary of the masking area. It is possible to know how many customization items are not available.

  Furthermore, as in the above-described embodiment, by associating each customization item with a color, the color of the item hold icon 416 in the color of the background 417 of the item hold icon 416 displayed in the hold display area 405 is displayed. It is possible to make it easier to understand which part of the incomplete vehicle 431 the part object 433 corresponds to. Even when adopting a configuration in which the masking areas are separated from each other or a line is drawn at the boundary between the masking areas, the masking pattern of the adjacent masking areas can be changed to make customization items that have not been completed more easily and quickly. The number and type of

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, although it has comprised so that each area | region (masking area | region) divided according to each customization item among the base objects 432 of the unfinished vehicle 431 can be identified, in addition to this structure, For the part where the part object 433 is already fitted (displayed), the boundary of each part object 433 may be identified. For example, the boundary line of each part object 433 is left, and each part object 433 is also given the same pattern as the masking of the base object 432 while being displayed on the incomplete vehicle 431 (coloring is performed). May be configured).

  In the above embodiment, for example, based on the player's operation of the production button 125 and the cross button 126, the decorative symbol display device 42 uses the sample of the appearance of the completed vehicle 441 and the completed vehicle 441 for the vehicle production. A feature (development of a production that can be easily selected, etc.) may be displayed (with a small window so that it can be compared with the unfinished vehicle 431). Further, a display that suggests such a feeling when a predetermined part object 433 (for example, the part object 433 of the item hold icon 416 displayed in the hold display area 405) is customized for the current incomplete car 431 is displayed. May be configured to be derived. Furthermore, when the part object 433 is customized for the incomplete car 431, the part object 433 is also explained (guidance such as “sports car system”, “I am good at racing”) (for example, a balloon or It may be configured to be displayed (in the form of a telop). The display of these samples and explanations constitutes a display related to an incomplete object.

  (B; Part Object Duplication Avoidance, Customized Storage Area Configuration) In the above embodiment, when the part object 433 is determined (see Steps S7105 to S7109 in FIG. 51), the reserved area is referred to in the reserved information storage area. Although it is configured not to select the same part object 433 as the part object 433 of the item hold icon 416 displayed in the display area 405, it is not particularly limited to such a configuration. For example, instead of or in addition to this configuration, the part object 433 may be changed when the same part object 433 exists by referring to the incomplete customization storage area. In this case, it is possible to avoid a situation in which there is no change in the aspect of the part object 433 even if it is not customized. Furthermore, in the above embodiment, the duplication of the part objects 433 is avoided by changing the customization item. However, the duplication of the parts objects 433 may be avoided by changing the customization pattern. . The part object 433 may be determined without considering any duplication.

  In the above embodiment, the incomplete customization storage area and the completed customization storage area are configured to have a storage area capable of storing a customization pattern for each customization item. For example, information indicating the entire combination is stored. (For example, in the completed vehicle 441, “front body” and “rear body” are “parts of a decoration car system”, and “door”, “tire”, and “engine & muffler” are “sports cars” In the case of “part of system” and “coloring” being “sporty”, “F12B” may be stored in the corresponding completed customization storage area). However, considering the ease of putting in and out information for each customization item, it is preferable to store the information separately for each customization item.

  (C: Mobile interlocking, simple pass, etc.) In the above embodiment, the mobile interlocking game cannot be performed unless the password issued from the server is input. For example, it is different from the password input. A (temporary) mobile-linked game may be performed by performing a (simpler) predetermined operation. In other words, the game information up to the previous time by entering the password cannot be reflected in the current game, but the game information can be stored and stored in the pachinko machine 10 without entering the password or customized. Add the game information for this time to the game information stored and stored in the server, or register it for the first time. The game information for this time may be stored in the server. However, to reflect the current game information etc. in the next game, issue a QR code when the game is finished, read it with a mobile communication terminal, access the server, and the first person performs the first registration Other than that, it is necessary to make a request for adding game information and the like this time.

  It should be noted that the customization function may be used only by playing a game normally (without entering a password or other special operations). Furthermore, in the non-mobile-linked gaming state, not all of the customization functions that can be performed in the mobile-linked gaming state can be used, but a part of them can be used (for example, a player is discarded at a customization opportunity etc.). It may be configured such that selection is not possible, customization patterns that can be selected are small, etc., or customization functions may be promoted. In addition, it is possible to embody the pachinko machine 10 that does not have a function for performing mobile linked games.

  In addition, during the mobile linked game, the item hold icon 416 is displayed in the hold display area 405, the state where the part object 433 of the displayed item hold icon 416 can be reflected in the incomplete vehicle 431, and the item hold icon 416 are displayed. The state in which the part object 433 is not reflected on the incomplete vehicle 431 (the state in which the tuning area 406 and the gallery area 407 are not displayed; the state similar to the no-mobile-linked game state) You may comprise so that it can switch by operation of a player in the middle (for example, a corresponding screen is opened from a main menu screen). Further, it may be configured to be able to make fine settings such as “display / do not display item hold icon 416”, “display / do not display incomplete vehicle 431”, “display / not display completed vehicle 441”, and the like. .

  In addition, regarding the customization function related to the car performance, even if the menu screen is opened and the setting of “apply / do not apply” is performed, an input operation for not adopting the part object 433 is performed by the player while the parts selection screen is displayed. In such a case, a non-adopted input count counter that counts the number of times is provided, and when the non-adopted input count counter exceeds a certain number, the pachinko machine 10 does not automatically perform the customization function ( It may be configured to switch to the same state as the non-mobile-linked gaming state. Of course, it may be possible that non-adoption will continue, so that it is necessary to input the player's selection when switching the state, or even if the player's input is switched to a state where the customization function is not demonstrated. It is possible to switch to a state where the customization function is demonstrated based on the operation, and to return to the state following the state before switching to the state where the customization function is not exhibited (the state where the customization function is demonstrated immediately) In the case of returning to, the same state as before the switch to the state where the customization function is not exhibited (the same state as the hold display area 405, the tuning area 406, the gallery area 407, etc.) may be configured.

  Further, in the above embodiment, information on the completed vehicle 441 completed in the current mobile linked game and information on the incomplete vehicle 431 at the end of the mobile linked game are sent to the server via the mobile communication terminal. However, the information that can be handed over to the next mobile-linked game among the information related to customization is appropriately set for each model. Further, it may be configured such that the player selects information on the completed vehicle 441 to be sent to the server and information on the completed vehicle 441 that does not need to be sent (further, the upper limit is set to 30). It should be noted that a configuration in which information relating to customization cannot be taken over may be employed. Moreover, you may comprise so that the game using the completed vehicle which the player completed can be played on the web page of a server.

  In addition, in order to enhance the customization function, it is conceivable to increase the amount of information supplied from the server to the pachinko machine 10, but in a configuration in which the password issued by the server is manually input to the pachinko machine 10. In addition, it takes time and is concerned that the amount of information will not increase so much. On the other hand, the server also issues a two-dimensional code (such as a QR code), and the two-dimensional code displayed on the display unit of the mobile communication terminal is read by the camera provided in the pachinko machine 10 and converted into the two-dimensional code. You may comprise so that the information contained may be reflected in a mobile interlocking game. In this case, a large amount of data can be easily input to the pachinko machine 10.

  In addition, you may comprise so that the game which inherited the customization of the pachinko machine 10 which is performing a mobile interlocking game can be performed in a portable communication terminal. In other words, when the mobile linked game is registered for the first time, an application dedicated to the pachinko machine 10 is downloaded to the mobile communication terminal, and if such an application is opened, the server can be easily accessed and the mobile linked game data is used. It is good also as comprising so that the game which can be played can be performed.

  Also, the main controller 261 (and the sub controller) together with the game machine identification information for identifying the pachinko machine 10 for the two-dimensional code (QR code or the like) displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42 at the end of the mobile linked game. The identification information including the management information 262) may be included. In this case, by transmitting information related to the mobile link to the server via the Internet or the like, on the gaming machine manufacturer side, based on the identification information included in the information, whether a regular board is mounted on the pachinko machine 10, etc. Can be confirmed. That is, it is possible to detect an illegal act such as replacing the main control device 261 with something other than a normal one without directly checking the main control device 261 or the like by visiting the place where the pachinko machine 10 is installed. Therefore, it is possible to increase the chances of checking for fraud and to detect fraud early. The pachinko machine 10 in which mobile linked games are frequently performed is often a popular model, and fraudulent acts such as replacing the main control device 261 are generally targeted for the popular model. In this respect, according to the above configuration, the more popular the model, the more frequently the main control device 261 and the like are checked, which is very efficient as a countermeasure against fraud.

  (D; Reflection of part object, display period of parts selection screen) In the above embodiment, the selection of whether or not to reflect the part object 433 displayed in the customization opportunity (part selection screen display) to the incomplete vehicle 431, Although it is configured to be performed by an input operation using the effect button 125 and the cross button 126 by the player, for example, the customization pattern that the player may reflect in the incomplete vehicle 431 and the customization that should not be reflected A pattern may be set in advance, and the part object 433 may be selected based on the setting information in the customization opportunity. Even in this case, the player's preference can be customized, and the player can be more attached to the effect using the customization function (customized car).

  In addition, such settings can be performed by, for example, opening a setting screen from the main menu of the pachinko machine 10, or can be performed on a web page of the server so that the password of the mobile linked game includes the discard information. Or may be configured. It should be noted that the pachinko machine 10 can be switched between an automatic state in which the pachinko machine 10 automatically selects the part object 433 and a manual state in which the player selects the part object 433 based on the pre-registered contents. Good. In addition, the player may not be able to select at all.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the high-speed change period from the start of change to the stop display of the decorative symbol in the left symbol display area 401 in the decorative symbol variable display on the decorative symbol display device 42 is displayed on the parts selection screen ( The maximum) display period is not limited to such a configuration. For example, when it is determined that a customization opportunity is given corresponding to the variation display (variation information) at the start of the variation display (part selection screen is displayed), the part is made to wait for the variation display to start. The selection screen may be displayed and the variable display may be started when “Yes” or “No” is input, or when the maximum display period of the part selection screen has elapsed. Further, for example, when starting the variable display, if it is determined that a customization opportunity is given in the variable display, an extra time for displaying the part selection screen is secured (the variable display time becomes longer). You may comprise as follows. However, when these configurations are adopted, if the sub-control device 262 changes the change time at the start timing of the change display without permission, the change display of the special display devices 43L and 43R will be shifted. Based on a predetermined determination of the device 261, it is determined whether or not a customization chance is given (the main control device 261 performs a lottery on whether or not to give a customization chance, and if it wins, The variation time may be set long). Note that, for example, the configuration may be such that a customization opportunity occurs only when a long variation display is selected (a customization opportunity does not occur if it is completely off).

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the configuration is such that the customization chance is given when the variation display corresponding to the variation information for which the customization chance is decided to be given, but the customization chance is decided to be given. In a state in which the fluctuation information is stored on hold, a customization chance may be given (for example, the part object 433 is reflected) (in response to an operation of the effect button 125 or the like).

  (E; Determination of part object) In the above embodiment, the type (customization item and customization pattern) of the part object 433 of the customization opportunity is arbitrarily determined on the pachinko machine 10 side without taking into consideration the player's intention. The type of the part object 433 may be determined according to the player's setting or operation. For example, “sports car system, family car system, decoration car system” and “armored car system, 4WD car system, track car system” are easily selected as the corresponding pattern storage table for the low entry state. If the player has set a preference for which car in the web page of the pachinko machine 10 or server (the setting on the server is the mobile linked game including such setting information) When the password is input to the pachinko machine 10, the corresponding pattern storage table included in the system in which the car of the favorite system is easily selected may be referred to.

  In addition, for example, during a mobile linked game, it is configured to count which type of part object 433 is reflected in the incomplete vehicle 431 and which type of part object 433 is rejected in a customization opportunity. At the same time, the count value is sent to the server via the mobile communication terminal, so that the server can grasp which type of part object 433 is desired and what type of part object 433 is not desired. Based on such information, the password issued by the server may be configured to include information on which correspondence pattern storage table is referred to when determining the customization pattern.

  When these configurations are adopted, the player's personal game history, various settings (preferences), and the like can be reflected in customization of the incomplete vehicle 431 (customization pattern selection by the customization selection means). Therefore, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of frustration such as customization not being exactly the player's intention while suppressing the one-pattern customization function. As a result, while diversifying the customization function, the player can be more attached to the effect using the completed vehicle 441, and the game motivation can be improved.

  Further, instead of performing a lottery to determine whether or not to give a chance for a customized lottery, for example, every time a variable display is performed a specified number of times, or when a predetermined condition is cleared in a mobile linked game, a customized lottery random number The value of the counter is acquired, and it may be determined whether or not a customization opportunity is given based on the value. In addition, the right for one customized lottery is granted by performing the variable display a specified number of times, and the right for ten times of the customized lottery is granted when a predetermined condition is cleared in the mobile linked game. Also good.

  In the above embodiment, the number of part objects 433 to be given is one for each variation display. However, a plurality of part objects 433 are given in one variation display. Also good. That is, in the above embodiment, the customization items are divided into “front body”, “rear body”, “door”, “tire”, “engine & muffler” (and “coloring”), and the customized lottery is won. Is configured such that any one customization item part object 433 is selected. For example, a plurality of customization item part objects 433 (for example, all except coloring) are selected by one customization lottery. Item) may be selected and reflected at once (or selectively) at a customization opportunity. In this case, further inflection can be added to the progress of customization, and the stage performance can be enhanced. As a result, the interest can be improved. Note that as the item hold icon 416, an item hold icon 416 in a form in which a plurality of part objects 433 are attached to one background 417 is displayed.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the customization control lottery is performed when the sub-control device 262 receives the advance command from the main control device 261, and the part object 433 (customization item and customization pattern) is determined when the win is selected. Information related to the part object 433 is configured to be stored in the corresponding holding area of the holding information storage area. However, when the variable display is started, not when the advance command is received, a customized lottery is performed, and the part object 433 may be determined, or a customized lottery may be performed at the time when the starting command is received, and the part object 433 may be determined at the start of the variable display. However, in this case, since the item hold icon 416 cannot be displayed in the hold display area 405, the customization lottery is performed when the start command is received in order to improve the performance and the convenience of customization. It is desirable to configure so that the part object 433 is determined.

  It should be noted that when receiving the starting command, the value of the item random number counter and the pattern random number counter may be acquired together with the value of the customized lottery random number counter, without winning the customized lottery. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 or the like in which the variable display is not held, the configuration related to the customization of the above embodiment can be embodied as much as possible.

  Further, on the pachinko machine 10 side, a customization opportunity is not given, and a customization item and a customization pattern are not unilaterally selected, but are selected according to an operation input by the player's performance button 125 or the like (in some cases). It may be configured as follows. For example, a customized lottery is performed when fluctuation information is stored in a storage in the storage information storage area, and when winning, a storage icon 411 that is smoky in the storage display area 405 and an effect button 125 in the vicinity thereof. When the operation button 125 is operated to display that suggests to operate, the values of the item random number counter and the pattern random number counter are acquired, and based on such values, the customization item and the customization pattern are determined, You may comprise so that the item hold | maintenance icon 416 which attached | subjected the corresponding parts object 433 may be displayed so that smoke may be taken.

  Further, for example, when a predetermined condition is established, a lottery is performed as to whether or not an opportunity for a customized lottery is to be given, and when winning in the lottery, an operation to the effect button 125 is urged on the decorative symbol display device 42. When the display is performed and the operation on the effect button 125 is performed, the value of the customized lottery random number counter is acquired, and it may be determined whether or not the customization chance is given based on the value. . Further, the player may operate the effect button 125, the cross button 126, etc. to play a mini game, and if successful, a customization chance may be given. In addition, you may comprise so that there may exist the period when the lottery of whether to give the opportunity of a customized lottery is performed, the period when it is not performed, and the period when the winning probability of a lottery becomes high.

  In addition, a part object 433 acquisition method (customization lottery trigger, customization item and customization pattern determination method, determination timing, etc.), or a plurality of customization modes with different effects at the time of acquisition are set. You may comprise so that it may transfer. For example, any customization mode may be selected by a player's operation. In addition, when a new customization mode is selected, the achievement of a predetermined condition in the mobile linked game (the mobile linked game given according to the game time, the number of fluctuations, etc., which is customized the specified number of times in the predetermined customized mode) It may be configured such that the points need to be stored as specified points, the customization of the target is completed, and the like.

  As a method for acquiring the part object 433, for example, a part of the part objects 433 may be displayed, and the player may select one or more of them. Furthermore, in order to obtain the selected part object 433, it may be configured so as to achieve conditions such as success in a mini game or the like. Further, for example, as described above, a customized lottery or a lottery for determining a customization item and a customized pattern is performed based on the operation of the effect button 125, or a pattern or the like cannot be identified based on the operation of the effect button 125. The part object 433 displayed in the mode may be configured to change to a mode in which the pattern or the like can be identified.

  In addition, when the part object 433 of the item hold icon 416 displayed in the hold display area 405 is not preferable for the player, the item hold icon 416 is operated by the player operating the effect button 125 and the cross button 126. An opportunity to change the part object 433 may be given (a customization re-lottery function may be provided in which at least one of the customization item and the customization pattern is determined again by lottery).

  (F: Rare parts high accuracy) In the above embodiment, the first rare parts high accuracy state or the second rare parts high accuracy state (second pattern selection state) is shifted according to the number of times of change display. Although it is configured, instead of or in addition to such a configuration, a lottery (pattern high probability lottery) of whether to be in the first rare parts high-accuracy state or the second rare parts high-accuracy state, You may comprise so that it may transfer to this state when winning. In this case, the game can always be performed while expecting a state change to the first rare parts high-accuracy state or the second rare parts high-accuracy state, and the first rare parts high-accuracy state or second rare It is possible to produce an effect relating to the state change to the high-accuracy state of the parts. As a result, it is possible to suppress a monotonous feeling during the game.

  In the above embodiment, the number of fluctuations after the end of the jackpot with a ball is counted, and when the number of fluctuations reaches a specified number, the rare parts are in a highly accurate state, but a jackpot with a ball has occurred. The number of times of transition to the first or second rare parts high-accuracy state is counted not only in the case where a big hit (special gaming state) or a small hit (fake in special gaming state) occurs. The value of the sub-side variation number counter may be reset. In addition to the sub-side variation frequency counter, a counter is provided only for measuring the transition timing to the first rare part high-accuracy state or the second rare part high-accuracy state, and the value of the counter is determined based on a predetermined trigger. It is good also as performing the lottery (lottery for advancing a transition timing) which fluctuates to the side close | similar to a transition timing.

  In addition, the state transition lottery to the first rare part high-accuracy state or the second rare part high-accuracy state may be performed every time the decorative symbol is displayed, or another condition (digestion of the specified number of fluctuations). , Generation of corresponding effects, etc.) may be performed. In addition, the first rare parts high-accuracy state or the second rare parts high-accuracy state may be terminated by the digestion of the specified fluctuation count, may be terminated after the lapse of the specified time, and whether or not to end. The lottery may be terminated. Furthermore, it is good also as setting several modes in which the winning probability of a pattern high-precision lottery changes.

  In addition, a plurality of corresponding pattern storage tables having different distributions are provided, and a lottery for switching whether or not to switch the corresponding corresponding pattern storage table is performed, and the order is set in the plurality of corresponding pattern storage tables. The corresponding pattern storage table to be referred to may be switched in order when winning by switching lottery. For example, there are five correspondence pattern storage tables, and a lottery for switching is performed based on a predetermined opportunity. By winning, the correspondence pattern storage table set up one step is referred to, and the top When the winning lottery is performed in a state where the corresponding pattern storage table set in the reference state is referred to, the corresponding pattern storage table set at the bottom is shifted to the reference state. May be.

  In addition, a plurality of switching rotation speed storage tables for storing the number of variable displays for switching the corresponding pattern storage table to be referred to are provided, and at the end of the big hit state, the switching rotation speed storage table to be referred to after the big hit state is selected can be selected. You may comprise so that it may be made. Furthermore, when a specific condition is satisfied (for example, when a specific number of fluctuations has been exceeded, winning a specific lottery, etc.), a plurality of corresponding pattern storage tables are operated by operating the player's effect button 125 or cross button 126. The correspondence pattern storage table referred to from the above may be selectable.

  In addition, for example, with the end of the big hit state, the small hit state, or the time reduction mode (in a broad sense, based on a predetermined lottery result of the main control device 261), You may comprise so that a state transition may be made to a 2nd rare part high-accuracy state. In particular, when the player's interest is likely to decline, such as when winning a jackpot that is not a promising jackpot, winning a jackpot without playing, ending time reduction mode, or winning a jackpot In addition, by shifting to the first rare parts high-accuracy state or the second rare parts high-accuracy state, it is possible to reduce discouragement or a significant decrease in game willingness. Moreover, the period which can aim at the improvement of game motivation can be lengthened by newly providing the state with the high value of the 1st rare parts high-precision state or the 2nd rare parts high-precision state. In addition, when embodied in a rotary gaming machine (slot machine), after the bonus game is over, the assist time is over, or the assist replay time is over, the rare parts are highly accurate for a predetermined number of games. It is good also as a state.

  Furthermore, for example, the number of times a predetermined effect is derived (one or more times), the game time (for example, the game time is recorded using a real-time clock provided in the pachinko machine 10), the number of jackpots, mobile linkage You may comprise so that a state transition may be made to a 1st rare part high-accuracy state or a 2nd rare parts high-accuracy state according to the point accumulated by game, predetermined mission clear, etc. In addition, it may be configured to shift to a rare parts high-accuracy state when a super-reaching effect that has a high expectation for occurrence of a big hit state is removed. The number of correspondence pattern storage tables and the contents (distribution ratio and distribution destination) are not particularly limited, and can be set as appropriate for each model. For example, there may be only one correspondence pattern storage table, and the selection ratio of the customization pattern may not be changed in any state.

  In addition, although not specifically mentioned in the above embodiment, the state changes to the first or second rare part high-accuracy state (second pattern selection state) in a predetermined display means such as the decorative symbol display device 42 or the like. It may be configured to display the remaining number of times of change display until this is done. Further, when the upper limit of the number of fluctuations is provided for the period as in the second rare part high-accuracy state, the remaining fluctuation display count until the second rare parts high-accuracy state ends is displayed. You may comprise.

  In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 42, what kind of state the rare part high-accuracy state is, a prior instruction such as what condition is to be transferred to the rare-part high-accuracy state, and current rare parts The teaching that the state is highly accurate may be omitted. However, the first rare parts high-accuracy state and the second rare parts high-accuracy state can be obtained by displaying a guidance display for instructing the player of the existence of the first rare parts high-accuracy state and the second rare parts high-accuracy state. Existence can be actively appealed to by the player. In the above embodiment, the function of performing guidance display in the decorative symbol display device 42 for teaching the player of the existence of the first rare part high-accuracy state and the second rare part high-accuracy state is the pattern high-accuracy teaching means. Configure.

  In addition, in the above embodiment, during the demonstration screen display, by operating the effect button 125 and the cross button 126, a display that teaches that the rare parts are in a highly accurate state is derived. Also good. In this case, the chance to get the pachinko machine 10 to be touched can be increased. Further, the demonstration screen display may be configured so that it is not known that the rare parts are in a highly accurate state. In this case, a player who is interested in customization can have the variable display performed even once in order to grasp whether or not the rare parts are in a highly accurate state.

  (G: High accuracy of customization) In the above embodiment, in the customized lottery for determining whether or not to give the customization chance, the low entry state is easier to win than the high entry state, and the fluctuation display Although it is configured such that the case where the reach occurs is easier to win than the case where the reach does not occur, it is not particularly limited to such a configuration. For example, the state to the state where it is easy to win a customized lottery (customized high-accuracy state) according to the number of changes in the decorative pattern, such as the first rare part high-accuracy state or the second rare part high-accuracy state You may comprise so that transfer may be performed, and you may comprise so that the lottery (customized highly reliable lottery) of whether to be in a customized highly reliable state may be performed. In addition, by using a configuration in which the winning probability of the customized lottery varies depending on the state, it is possible to make the player interested in the game in a dimension different from the factors related to increase or decrease of the game value, while suppressing the monotonous feeling in the game, The game motivation can be improved.

  In addition, as an opportunity of the state transition to the customized high-accuracy state, it can be set as appropriate for each model, as in the rare parts high-accuracy state. For example, a lottery to determine whether or not to shift to a customized high-accuracy state is performed, or the state shifts to a customized high-accuracy state according to the number of times a predetermined performance is derived, the number of jackpots, points accumulated in mobile linked games, etc. Alternatively, after the end of the time reduction mode, the state may be shifted to the customized high-accuracy state after the end of the big hit state of “2RS” or after the end of the small hit state. In addition, you may comprise so that the winning probability of customization lottery may not be changed.

  (H: Customization motif) In the above embodiment, “car” is adopted as the customization motif, and the vehicle production using the customized vehicle is performed. It can be set as appropriate.

  (H-1: Puzzle) Next, examples of modes of specific effects performed using customizable objects will be described with reference to modes shown in FIGS. In the tuning area 406 of the decorative symbol display device 42 shown in FIG. 65, an incomplete object 901 such as a puzzle composed of six pieces 902 is displayed. The unfinished object 901 in the initial state is in a state where a piece 902 without a pattern is applied to the mount (or a state in which the piece 902 is not applied; see the lower part of the incomplete object 901 in FIG. 65). Yes. However, in the same way as in the above-described embodiment, in the unfinished object 901, there are some parts that have not been customized yet, and the parts corresponding to the customization items (six pieces installed) so that it is easy to grasp where they are. Each region (specifically, upper left region, upper middle region, upper right region, lower left region, lower middle region, lower right region) has a different aspect (color or pattern). Masking is added. When all the pieces are correctly applied, the completed object 905 is displayed in the gallery area 407, and a new puzzle mount is displayed in the tuning area 406.

  In this example, the specific effects include “walk reach effect”, “moving reach effect”, etc., and when the execution of the specific effect is determined, the player can determine the type of the specific effect. . More specifically, in the tuning area 406, “track”, “dog”, etc. are set as completed forms of the unfinished object 901. “Track” corresponds to “moving reach production”, and “dog” It is configured to support "walking reach production". For example, when the incomplete object 901 is completed as a “track”, the track that has become the completed object 905 is displayed in the gallery area 407 as a transition. Up to two completed objects 905 can be displayed in the gallery area 407, and when the third is completed, the player selects one completed object 905 to be deleted from the three and deletes it. . Further, when execution of the specific effect is determined and the completed object 905 is displayed in the gallery area 407, the player selects one of the displayed completed objects 905. A selection input screen is displayed so that it can be done (no selection is possible). When the selection input of the completed object 905 is performed, the corresponding type of specific effect is derived. That is, in this example, the type of specific effect can be customized.

  Similar to the above embodiment, the piece 902 of the unfinished object 901 corresponds to the content (any of the six pieces as the customization item) with the hold icon 411 corresponding to the case where the provision of the customization chance is determined. It is configured so that it is a part and which item corresponds to a specific production as a customized pattern). Further, when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, when the mobile linked game point reaches a specified point), the player may select a favorite mount.

  In addition, the timing at which the mount of the unfinished object 901 is switched is not particularly limited, and may be configured so as not to be switched until completed, based on a predetermined lottery even if not completed, or It may be configured to switch when a predetermined event occurs (predetermined number of times) or based on a player's operation (having a predetermined right). In addition, when the mount of the unfinished object 901 is switched before all the pieces 902 are applied, the display indicating the type of the piece 902 in the hold icon 411 is also switched correspondingly (the mount is displayed). When switching from “dog” to “track”, the suggestion display of the piece 902 of the hold icon 411 may also be switched from “part of dog” to “part of track”). Further, when the mount of the unfinished object 901 is switched, the pieces 902 (the number) already applied to the unfinished object 901 at that time are assumed to be installed pieces and are succeeded even after the switching ( The pattern may be switched to the corresponding one), and no matter how many pieces 902 are fitted to the unfinished object 901, it must be collected again from the beginning if the mount changes (mobile linked game) It is also possible to add a function that can be avoided as a part of the benefits.

  In addition, as for the unfinished object 901, the same object may be derived across the jackpot state, an object that has been changed according to the game mode may be derived, or a completely different object may be derived. Also good. For example, the type of mount of the unfinished object 901 that can be selected may be different between the “probability change stage” and the “retraction stage”, and the “normal stage” and the “precursor stage”.

  (H-2: Scratch) In the above embodiment, the selection ratio of the customized pattern is different depending on the state, or the winning probability of the customized lottery is different, but instead of such a configuration, or In addition, for example, the customization item division method (number, target region, boundary, etc.) may be changed depending on the state.

  Here, the example of an aspect shown to FIG. 67, FIG. 68 is demonstrated. A card 911 such as an instant lottery is displayed in the tuning area 406. Initially, a masking 913 is applied so as to hide an object 912 (see FIG. 68) written on the card 911. The area of the masking 913 is usually divided into six as shown in FIG. 67, and when the coin-type hold icon 411 displayed in the hold display area 405 is erased together with the start of the corresponding variable display. , One of the areas of the masking 913 divided into six parts is cut away so that a part of the object 912 is exposed. Then, when all of the objects are exposed, the object 912 is displayed in the gallery area 407 (the specific effect is the same as (h-1) above). When the player selects to change the card 911 at the start of the variable display corresponding to the card-type hold icon 411 displayed in the hold display area 405, the tuning area The card 911 of 406 is renewed (no masking area is cut off, and no object is known).

  In addition, for example, when a prescribed condition is satisfied, for example, when it is determined that the number of variable displays performed after the end of the big hit state with a ball is 200 to 230, 400 to 430, 600 to 630, 800 or more In FIG. 68, the masking area of the tuning area 406 is divided into four as shown in FIG. That is, during this period, the entire object 912 in the tuning area 406 can be exposed relatively quickly. In addition, when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, when the mobile linked gaming point has reached a specified point), the masking area is exposed as in the case where the coin-type hold icon 411 is displayed in the hold display area 405. You may comprise so that it can do. Furthermore, a masking area to be exposed may be selected from among a plurality of masking areas when a predetermined condition is satisfied.

  (I; multiple customization motifs) In addition, the customization motif is not limited to one, but a plurality of motifs (multiple pattern base objects) are present, and based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, You may comprise so that it may transfer to the state (customization mode) in which any motif is customized. For example, in addition to the customization mode for completing a car, a customization mode for completing a ship and a customization mode for completing an airplane may be set.

  Further, in the case of adopting the configuration, as in the above embodiment, the variable display (variable information) is suspended, and the execution of the customization chance and the content of customization are determined when the variable display is suspended, and the content is suspended. In the configuration displayed as the item hold icon 416 in the display area 405, for example, an item hold icon 416 having a car part object 433 (customized object) is displayed in the hold display area 405 when winning a custom lottery in the car customization mode. It is conceivable that there is an opportunity to decide whether or not to change the customization mode at a stage after the display and before the change display corresponding to the item hold icon 416 is executed. In this case, in the state where the item hold icon 416 having the car part object 433 is displayed in the hold display area 405, the incomplete object (base object) displayed in the tuning area 406 is different from the vehicle (ship or ship). It is necessary to avoid the situation of being replaced by an airplane.

  As the method, for example, in the state where the item hold icon 416 is displayed in the hold display area 405, the switching of the customization mode is postponed until the state is canceled or the switching of the customization mode is decided. For example, the number of variable displays that are held is confirmed, and the timing of switching the display of the incomplete object in the tuning area 406 is set to the timing when the confirmed number of held objects is consumed. More specifically, the switching of the customization mode (base object) is determined and executed when the advance command is received from the main controller 261 and the variation information is stored, and the type of the customization object depends on the customization mode. The substantial switching of the base object may be configured to be performed at the timing when the variation display corresponding to the variation information for which the switching of the customization mode is determined is executed.

  By adopting these configurations, when the change of the base object is determined, until the change display corresponding to the hold icon 411 (item hold icon 416) as the already displayed suggestion information is digested As the base object is changed, the hold icon 411 corresponding to the type of the changed base object is derived. For this reason, in the configuration in which the customization pattern (part object 433) to be customized is displayed in advance, the base object has been changed immediately before the customization pattern that the user has been waiting for. Accordingly, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the part object 433 is also changed.

  In addition, regarding the item hold icon 416 corresponding to the change information held after the customization mode switching decision, the item hold icon 416 corresponding to the base object 432 after the change is displayed. For this reason, the player can detect the change of the customization mode in advance, and when the change of the customization mode is associated with the big hit expectation degree or the like, or the base object 432 is changed, it does not change, but the strange feeling effect When performing the above, it is possible to improve performance.

  In addition, when the part object 433 corresponding to the base object after the change is displayed as suggestion information before the base object is changed, it can be grasped in advance that the base object is changed. . Utilizing this phenomenon, if the change in the base object is associated with the expected expectation, or if the base object is to be changed but it is not changed, the performance will be improved. Can be achieved.

  (J: Proximity detection sensor) In the above embodiment, various selection inputs related to customization are performed by using the effect button 125 and the cross button 126 as the operation means. An input means may be employed. For example, it is possible to detect the proximity or contact of an object to a plurality of locations of the decorative symbol display device 42 as variable display means for displaying various announcements regarding the customization function, and it is connected to the input / output port 554 of the sub-control device 262. Proximity detecting means may be provided. For example, proximity to the variable display unit 35 and the center frame 47 as proximity detection means having a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit capable of detecting an object (such as a player's hand) that is in front of the decorative symbol display unit 42 Three sets of detection sensors (for example, infrared sensors) may be provided so as to correspond to the left symbol display area, the middle symbol display area, and the right symbol display area, respectively. For example, a touch panel as an approach detection unit may be provided on the display surface of the decorative symbol display device 42.

  In other words, in the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 can be customized, and the player can make various selection decisions regarding customization. Further, such selection and determination can be performed only within a part of the period of the decorative symbol variation display, and there is not much time margin. Therefore, an operation of reading and understanding the explanation displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42 within the time limit, selecting an appropriate option from the options, and operating the effect button 125 and the cross button 126 to make a selection decision. There is a concern that it may be a relatively difficult operation for a player who is not familiar with the operation of various selection decisions regarding customization.

  In this regard, it is configured such that the input operation can be performed (intuitively) by directly touching the decorative symbol display device 42 on which the description, choices regarding customization, objects to be customized, and the like are displayed. The corresponding input is performed simply by touching the place where the predetermined option is displayed), so that the operation can be made very easy to understand. Therefore, it is possible to avoid such a situation that the operation is overwhelmed by such an operation, or that the game tempo is deteriorated by setting a relatively long time for the operation.

  In the decorative symbol display device 42, when displaying options for requesting selection related to customization, the player's hand close to or in contact with the display location of the options is checked in order to confirm the intention to select each option. It is desirable that each of the hold icons 411 can be detected. Further, when the hold icon 411 in the hold display area 405 can be operated in various ways, each hold icon 411 (in this example, It is desirable to be able to detect each player's hand that is in close proximity to or in contact with (four) display locations. In addition, it is desirable to be able to detect each player's hand that has approached or contacted the display location of each completed vehicle 441 in the gallery area 407.

  (K: real-time custom, dog motif) In the above embodiment, at the normal stage and the precursor stage, as the game progresses (variation display is executed sequentially), the customization to the unfinished car 431 proceeds, and “car production” If the completed vehicle 441 is displayed in the gallery area 407 when the derivation of the vehicle is determined, the completed vehicle 441 can be made to appear in the vehicle effect. In other words, the customization work and the specific production using the customized object (car production using a customized car as a result of customization) are configured to be performed separately. It is not limited to a simple configuration.

  Hereinafter, an example (configuration in which customization proceeds in real time while a specific effect using a customizable object is being performed) will be described with reference to FIGS. 69 and 70. In this embodiment, in addition to the effect button 125 and the cross button 126, a proximity detection sensor 921 that can separately detect the proximity of an object to the left, middle, and right of the decorative symbol display device 42, and an effect button A button proximity detection sensor (not shown) for detecting the proximity of an object above 125 is provided.

  In this example, the “touching effect” as if the user can enjoy touching the “dog” displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42 using the effect button 125, the proximity detection sensor 921, the button proximity detection sensor, and the like. Is now being done. In the decorative symbol display device 42 during the contact production, “Dog 931” as a main object that performs various operations is displayed mainly in the center of the screen, and the operation explanation during the contact production is displayed in the upper right of the screen, and the lower right of the screen Displays “dog mannequin 932” as a sub-object having a simplified form (like a silhouette) of “dog 931” in the center of the screen. These “dog 931” and “dog mannequin 932” are continuously displayed over a plurality of variable displays basically only during the “contact presentation” period.

  The “dog 931” is displayed to perform various operations, and as shown in the upper right part of FIG. 69, the effect button 125 is pressed and the decorative symbol display device 42 is touched (the proximity detection sensor 921 is hand-held). Is displayed), and an action is performed (reacted) in response to an operation such as holding the hand over the effect button 125 (making the button proximity detection sensor detect a hand or the like). On the other hand, “dog mannequin 932” is displayed in a stopped state. The direction of the “dog mannequin 932” may be changed by operating the cross button 126.

  “Dog 931” is “item” with respect to “head”, “face”, “neck to upper body”, “lower body to tail”, “foot” from the state where nothing is worn (state of FIG. 69). "Can be added (customized). A plurality of patterns of items 933 can be attached to “head”, “face”, “neck to upper body”, “lower body to tail”, and “foot”, respectively. In this embodiment, “dog 931” in a state where nothing is worn corresponds to the base object of the main object, and “item 933” worn by “dog 931” corresponds to the customization object of the main object.

  “Dog Mannequin 932” is similar to “Dog 931”, and is in a state where nothing is worn, “Head”, “Face”, “Neck to Upper Body”, “Lower Body to Tail”, “Feet” The “item 933” can be added (customized). Further, “dog mannequin 932” in a state where nothing is worn corresponds to the base object of the sub-object, and “item 933” worn by “dog mannequin 932” corresponds to the customization object of the sub-object. By the way, “Dog 931” is completed even when nothing is worn, whereas “Dog Mannequin 932” that teaches the customization situation is incomplete when nothing is worn. It can be said. Therefore, for example, “dog mannequin 932” in a state where nothing is worn is an incomplete object, whereas “dog 931” in a state where nothing is worn is not an incomplete object. In this example, “dog 931” constitutes a display related to an incomplete object.

  For “item 933”, when the sub-control device 162 receives a starting command from the main control device 261 and stores the variation information in the hold information storage area during the “contact presentation” period, the “item 933” is derived. When the derivation is determined, a lottery of which part (customization item) and which pattern (customization pattern) item 933 is to be derived is performed and based on the lottery. “Item 933” is displayed as a hold icon 411 (item hold icon 416) in the lower left part (hold display area 405) of the decorative symbol display device. Then, when the variable display corresponding to the item hold icon 416 is started, the display of whether or not the “item 933” displayed on the item hold icon 416 is reflected in the “dog 931” in the variable display, etc. When the selection decision input to be reflected by the player operating the effect button 125 or the cross button 126 is made, the “item 933” is added to both the “dog 931” and the “dog mannequin 932”. To reflect.

  Further, in this example, regarding “dog mannequin 932”, “item 933” is not yet worn among “head”, “face”, “neck to upper body”, “lower body to tail”, and “foot” ( Masking 935 is applied corresponding to (including the range) parts that are not customized. The masking 935 of this embodiment is applied to a range slightly wider than the part so as to include a part to which the “item 933” has not yet been added in order to make the target part easy to understand. Further, the masking 935 set for each part (each customized item) has a different color. On the other hand, no masking is applied to the main object “dog 931”.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment example, by confirming the “dog mannequin 932” that is customized (simultaneously progressing) with the “dog 931” of the “contact presentation”, the “dog 931” It is possible to clearly grasp that there are parts that have not yet been customized. On the other hand, masking 935 is not applied to “dog 931”. For this reason, for example, even when all the parts (customization items) have not been customized, “Dog 931” is displayed and only “Dog 931” is displayed regardless of whether “Item 933” is added or not. However, in a configuration that can fully entertain the player, avoiding situations such as masking of “Dog 931”, resulting in a decrease in design or a decrease in interest due to it. However, the progress of customization of the “dog 931” can be reliably grasped.

  The input operation for changing the mode of “dog 931” is different from the selection input operation for reflecting the item 933 in “dog 931” and “dog mannequin 932” at the time of customization. It is desirable. For example, to change the mode of “dog 931”, the effect button 125 is pressed, the decorative symbol display device 42 is touched (the proximity detection sensor 921 detects a hand or the like), and the hand is held above the effect button 125 (button In the selection input operation related to customization, first, an input operation to the cross button 126 is performed, and then an input operation to the effect button 125 is performed. To do. In this case, when the operation related to the mode change of “Dog 931” is performed, when the operation is switched to a state where the operation input related to customization is possible, the selection input operation regarding unintentional customization is not performed with momentum. be able to.

  The “base object” is not limited to the “dog 931”, and a character such as a person, an animal, or an anthropomorphic object is adopted for each model, and the character costume, You may employ | adopt the tool, vehicle, background, etc. which a character uses. Furthermore, as a “base object”, a vehicle used by a predetermined character, a vehicle such as an airplane, a base of an object (such as a cake or a weapon) produced by the character, a background such as a living space or a zoo, is adopted. As such, constituent parts such as vehicles and weapons, decorations, and various objects installed in the background may be employed. In addition, when a touch panel is employed in the decorative symbol display device 42, the operation of “contact time” can be made easier to understand, easier and more diverse.

  The sub-object (dog mannequin 932) of the present embodiment example has a simplified form of the main object (dog 931), but is not particularly limited to such a configuration and has not yet been customized. It only needs to be able to teach a part (customized item). For example, in the tuning area 406, a tag that is associated with each customization item is displayed, and a customization pattern is written on the tag corresponding to the customized part, and the part is not customized. You may comprise so that the tag corresponding to may have no description. However, by making the aspect of the sub-object closer to the main object (an aspect in which the main object is simplified, etc.), the correspondence between the sub-object and the main object becomes clearer, and the player is customized. Can help understanding and operation.

  In the present embodiment example and the above embodiment, the character to be customized is configured to be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42 in which the decorative symbol variation display is performed. It may be configured to display a character (one or both of a main object and a sub-object) that is performed.

  (L: Definition of Gallery Area, Upper Limit, Completion) In the above embodiment, the completed vehicle 441 is once erased from the gallery area 407 once used for vehicle production, but is particularly limited to this configuration. It is not a thing. For example, the number of completed vehicles 441 that can be displayed in the gallery area 407 is increased (it may be displayed in a scroll display or the like even if it is not displayed at a time), and used for car production. However, it may be configured not to be erased, or the upper limit of the number of times of use may be set to a plurality of times. In the above-described embodiment, by performing the mobile linked game, the completed vehicle 441 of a new combination once completed is always stored and stored in the server, and is stored in the completed vehicle 441 stored and stored in the next game. The completed vehicle 441 selected from the above is configured to be displayed in the gallery area 407 of the decorative symbol display device 42, but there may be provided another condition for returning the completed vehicle 441 to the pachinko machine 10 side. However, it is possible to omit the configuration itself that the completed vehicle 441 can be returned.

  In the above embodiment, when all the customization items of the incomplete vehicle 431 are customized, the vehicle is unconditionally treated as the completed vehicle 441 and displayed in the gallery area 407. When all customization items of the incomplete vehicle 431 have been customized, an input indicating that the customization of the incomplete vehicle 431 is to be terminated by the player operating the effect button 125 and the cross button 126 When an input indicating consent to display the transition in the gallery area 407 is performed, the incomplete vehicle 431 may be displayed in the gallery area 407 as the completed vehicle 441.

  In this case, you can fully enjoy the customization to your liking. In addition, when the gallery area 407 is full and the incomplete vehicle 431 is completed, but it is not desired to delete any of them, the transition display to the gallery area 407 can be kept on standby until the vehicle production is performed. Therefore, it is possible to improve convenience. When the configuration is adopted, the completed vehicle storage storage area is not in the stage where the incomplete car 431 is completed, but in the stage where the completed incomplete car 431 is displayed in the gallery area 407. It is assumed that information about the car 431 is stored.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the completed vehicle 441 displayed in the gallery area 407 is returned to the tuning area 406 based on the player's predetermined operation input (for example, replaced with the incomplete vehicle 431 in the tuning area 406). It may be configured so that customization can be performed again. Incidentally, in this case, not only the completed vehicle 441 but also an incomplete vehicle 431 (a vehicle having customized items that are not customized) may be displayed in the gallery area 407. In this case, a car with more attention can be completed. Although the timing at which the completed vehicle 441 in the gallery area 407 can be returned to the tuning area 406 is not particularly limited, for example, a new item hold icon 416 of the desired part object 433 in the hold display area 405 is displayed. If displayed, the vehicle 441 in the gallery area 407 can be returned to the tuning area 406 so that convenience and the like can be improved.

  In the case where a complicated operation can be executed, the player can directly touch a selection item displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42 or bring a finger close to the operation input. It is desirable to be able to do so. In this case, since the operation input is intuitive, the input is easy to understand, and thus the time required for the input can be shortened, the input within the time limit could not be performed, or the time limit is set longer. Therefore, it is possible to avoid problems such as a decrease in game play.

  (M; pending change) In the above-described embodiment, basically (except when the second variation display is replaced with the priority given to the first variation display), it is displayed in the retention display area 405 of the decorative symbol display device 42. Although the configuration of the hold icon 411 as the suggestion information is configured so as not to change in the middle, it may be configured to change.

  For example, in the variable display corresponding to the variable information that has already been held based on the result of the customized lottery performed in response to the variable information that was held later for the hold area of the hold information storage area (retrofit A customization opportunity can be given, or the part object 433 of the item hold icon 416 corresponding to the variation information that has already been put on hold and has been decided to be given the customization chance can be changed. You may comprise. In this case, since the item hold icon 416 may change in a stage before the corresponding variable display is executed even after being displayed in a predetermined form, the jackpot suggested by the change in the form of the hold icon 411 The production can be diversified, for example, the expected occurrence of the state is stepped up.

  For example, in addition to the fluctuation information newly stored in the fluctuation information storage area, if fluctuation information is already stored in the fluctuation information storage area (the fluctuation display is suspended), the fluctuation information The customization chances corresponding to the information determined to be executed may be configured to be executable in the variation display corresponding to the variation information already stored. In other words, in a variable display where super-reaching effects such as “car effects” are performed with a high expectation for the occurrence of a big hit state and a relatively long time, effects related to customization are also derived (part selection screen display, completed Time for vehicle selection screen display, etc.), the time that can be secured for effects (super-reach effects, etc.) for teaching whether or not a big hit state will occur will be shortened, or variable time There is a concern that the production balance becomes worse due to the excessively long period.

  In this regard, in the variation display before the variation display after the specific representation such as the super reach production is performed, the customization chance that is executed based on the variation information of the subsequent variation display By executing the above, it is possible to perform a specific effect (such as a car effect) such as a super reach effect in the subsequent variation display with a relatively large margin, and an effect related to customization in the previous variation display. Can be carried out with a relative margin. In addition, by giving the customization chance, it is possible to enhance an expectation that an effect with a high degree of expectation for winning the jackpot state may be derived in the subsequent change display. In particular, in the state where the display time (variation time) of the decorative symbol variation display is set to be relatively short (time shortening state), the above-described effect can be more remarkably achieved by applying the above configuration. .

  In addition, in general, the first variation display performed in a state where four or three or more first variation displays performed based on the ball entering the first variable winning device 33a are held has the variation time. Set short. For this reason, in the case of such a variation display in which the variation time is set to be short, even if it is determined that the customization opportunity is performed, the variation chance is not given (without the part selection screen being displayed). In the variable display performed before or after the display, it may be configured such that the chance of customization corresponding thereto is given. In addition, if the customization opportunity is determined to be given even if the display is changed in order to shift the customization opportunity, either customization opportunity is lost, or the customization that has been determined to be assigned by the change display at the migration destination. You may comprise so that a chance may be transferred to another fluctuation display.

  Note that the change of the item hold icon 416 is not limited to the configuration performed by “retrofit”, but may be determined in advance. That is, for example, when determining the customization item and the customization pattern performed when the variation information is stored in the hold information storage area, it may be configured to determine whether or not the item hold icon 416 is to be changed. Good (the item hold icon 416 in the initial form, the item hold icon 416 in the final form (at the start of change), and the item hold icon 416 are determined in the case of an intermediate change).

  Further, whether or not to allow the change of the mode of the item hold icon 416 displayed in the hold display area 405 is determined based on an operation input to the player's effect button 125, the cross button 126, and the like. It may be configured. That is, for a player who wanted the appearance of the part object 433 attached to the item hold icon 416 before the mode change, the item hold icon 416 changes the mode (changed to another part object 433). May cause a decrease in interest. In this regard, by configuring whether or not to change the mode of the hold icon 411 by an operation input by the player, the above-described problem can be avoided, and the customization is advanced while suppressing the occurrence of stress. Can continue.

  The item hold icon 416 can be changed (re-lottery, shift in a predetermined order or change as the player intends) by operating the player's effect button 125 or the like. Good. Furthermore, the right to change may be obtained when a predetermined condition is satisfied.

  Further, in the above embodiment, when it is determined that the customization chance is to be given, the part object 433 that has obtained the right to be given for the customization chance in the corresponding hold icon 411 is displayed (the item hold icon 416 is displayed). However, the present invention is not limited to such a configuration, and it may be configured such that a customization opportunity may occur even in the variable display corresponding to the normal hold icon 412. In addition, as an aspect of the item hold icon 416, it may be configured not to teach up to the type of the part object 433 only by giving the customization opportunity, or the background 417 may be omitted. The item hold icon 416 itself may be omitted (only the normal hold icon 412 may be used).

  Further, it may be configured to be able to teach that the customization chance is given by a method different from the item hold icon 416. For example, a display device may be provided separately from the decorative symbol display device 42 and displayed on the display device, or may be expressed using a movable accessory, or may be expressed using a lamp or signboard associated with each customization item. It is good as well. However, by displaying the item hold icon 416 in the hold display area 405, it is possible to give a customization opportunity and teach the type of the part object 433 in advance in an easy-to-understand manner, and to further improve the rendering performance related to the customization function. it can.

  In addition, when it is determined that the customization chance is given in the customization lottery performed when the information is stored in the storage area of the storage area of the storage information storage area, the customization chance corresponding to that is not the display of the fluctuation of the corresponding fluctuation information. You may comprise so that it may be provided at the time of a fluctuation display. For example, in the decorative symbol display device 42, a customization display area for customization is provided in addition to the hold icon 411 in the hold display area 405, and information relating to customization for eight times of variable display (twice the maximum number of hold of variable display) A customization hold storage area capable of storing (customization chances, customization items, and customization patterns) is provided. Furthermore, the customization hold storage area always stores information on at least four customizations, and no change information is held in the hold information storage area and the change display is not performed. Even if the information is stored in the hold information storage area, the customization chance determined to be given when the fluctuation information is stored is given at the time of the four-time fluctuation display (without the fluctuation display). Will be. For this reason, for example, the holding of the game ball on hand and the fluctuation display are no longer held, but if the fluctuation display is performed two more times, the desired part object 433 can be obtained, so continue the game a little more, etc. It is possible to improve the game motivation.

  (N: pending continuous notice) Further, it may be configured such that a customization chance can be given to a plurality of variable displays based on winning in one customization lottery. Further, the customization pattern of the customization chance in the previous variation display may be changed so as to be forcibly matched with the customization pattern of the customization opportunity in the subsequent variation display. By adopting these configurations, it is possible to perform continuous effects related to each other over a plurality of variable displays (so-called continuous notice) using the aspect of the item hold icon 416 in the hold display area 405.

  For example, when a starting command is received, a holding continuous notice lottery (winning part of jackpot fluctuation or back-and-forth fluctuation) is performed to determine whether or not to hold a holding continuous notice in the hold display area 405, and such a holding continuous notice lottery When a win is won, the type of the hold continuous notice is determined, and the execution of the customization chance and the contents thereof are stored in correspondence with the change information of the target hold area. More specifically, for example, in the state where the hold information is stored in the first to third hold areas of the hold information storage area, it is performed when the change information is stored in the fourth hold area in response to the starting command. When the winning continuous notice of lottery is selected and a sports car's pending continuous notice is selected, the customization information flag of the first holding area to the fourth holding area in the holding information storage area is turned on and the first holding The information of “sports car front body parts” is stored in the storage icon storage area of the area, the information of “sports car rear body parts” is stored in the storage icon storage area of the second storage area, and the storage of the third storage area is stored. The information of “sports car door parts” is stored in the icon storage area, and “sports car tie” is stored in the storage area of the fourth reservation area. And stores the information of the sports car of the engine and muffler. "

  As a result, in the hold display area 405, information that can complete the sports car system car is displayed, and the part object 433 is reflected in the unfinished car 431 at the customization chance in all the variable displays. When the selection is made, a completed vehicle 441 unified with parts of the sports car system can be obtained. In this case, the game can be further increased by the mode of the hold display area 405. In addition, it is possible to make a suggestion at the previous stage when the corresponding variable display is performed.For example, in the next variable display, the next variable display is started to see if the continuous notice is continuously derived. You will be able to enjoy a new production that is different from the conventional continuous notice that you will never know.

  In this example, even if the parts object 433 is attached to all the customization items of the incomplete vehicle 431 in the tuning area 406 (the body of the completed vehicle 441 is formed), the player's effect button 125, etc. As long as the input for permitting the transition display to the gallery area 407 by the operation is not confirmed, the transition display is not performed. In addition, in the case where there are four suspensions of the variable display, a random number counter used in determining which suspension is given a customization chance (multiple selection is possible and selection is not allowed) in three cases, two cases, and one case. And a table, and when a starting command is received, the table may be selected based on the number of holdings and the fluctuation content (whether it is a big hit or a small hit, or whether it becomes a back and forth reach). .

  In the case of adopting the above-described configuration, it is determined that the pending continuous advance notice is performed as an effect for concluding the pending continuous advance notice (in the above example, the change display corresponding to the change information stored in the fourth hold area) It is desirable to configure so that the vehicle effect is performed at That is, for example, when a starting command is received from the main control device 261, it is determined that both “customization setting” and “car production” are performed by performing a lottery as to whether or not to execute “car production”. In this case, it is determined whether there is one or more pending fluctuation information other than the fluctuation information, and if it is determined that there exists, a customization opportunity is given corresponding to the pending fluctuation information. It may be configured to determine whether or not to perform the customization, and when a negative determination is made, a customization opportunity may be given to the pending fluctuation information. On the other hand, when there is no suspension or when a customization opportunity is given corresponding to the variation information that is suspended, the retrofit customization may not be set.

  Furthermore, it is desirable to configure so that a super reach effect such as a car effect is not derived by a variable display other than the final variable display that constitutes the continuous hold notice. It is also possible to change the mode of the item hold icon 416 when the variable display is performed. As a result, for example, a state in which the pending continuous notice is displayed in the hold display area 405 causes the future development to be completely read (no surprises are lost), leading to a decrease in interest. It can be avoided.

  (O: Setting of car production) In the above embodiment, when determining whether or not to perform the car production at the start of the variation display of the decorative symbol, it is the normal stage or the precursor stage and is customized in the variation display. It is configured so as to determine whether or not a chance is given and affirmative determination is made so that the vehicle effect is not performed (step S7604; YES), but is not limited to such a configuration. For example, when the sub-control device 262 receives a starting command, it is determined whether or not to perform a vehicle effect, or it is determined whether or not the vehicle effect is likely to be selected when the change starts. Then, it may be configured not to give the customization chance if the vehicle production is performed or the variation information is likely to be performed. In this case as well, in the configuration that allows the player to select customization, and in addition, the configuration that suggests the degree of expectation for the occurrence of a big hit state by the combination of the type of vehicle production and the type of the completed vehicle 441, After determining the type of the vehicle effect at the start of the variable display with the pachinko machine 10, if the completed vehicle 441 is changed by the player's operation in the variable display, the accuracy of the winning expectation is reduced. The situation can be prevented.

  In the above embodiment, the type of the “car effect” is determined based on the type of the completed vehicle 441 used (can be used) for the car effect and the result of the change display (car effect). However, if the type of “car production” is decided first and “car production” is “successful”, the fluctuation display in which “car production” is performed, or the fluctuation that has been suspended before that At the time of display, a part object 433 that is likely to be advantageous to the determined type of “car production” (increased expectation of jackpot) may be provided. A configuration in which the type of completed vehicle 441 and the type of “car effect” are associated with each other to suggest the expected degree of occurrence of a big hit state may be omitted.

  (P; priority order of hold variation, hold icon) In the above embodiment, the game ball enters the second start winning device 33b rather than the change display based on the game ball entering the first start winning device 33a. The variation display based on the first start winning device 33a and the second start winning device 33b is the variation display based on entering the ball. Regardless, you may comprise so that a change display may be digested according to the order kept. Further, in the above-described embodiment, the decorative symbol display device 42 does not teach which of the first start winning device 33a and the second starting winning device 33b is the variable display based on the winning ball (only the hold icon 411 is visually recognized). However, it may be configured so that it can be understood which one corresponds to the variable display.

  Further, in the above embodiment, even when five or more variable displays on the special display devices 43L and 43R are held in total, the decorative symbol display device 42 displays only up to four hold icons 411. However, the same number of hold icons 411 as the variable display of the special display devices 43L and 43R may be displayed. Further, in the case where the same number (8 in the above example) of the hold icons 411 as the upper limit of the variable display hold can be displayed, in order to reduce the display space (hold display area 405) of the hold icon 411, You may comprise so that it may be displayed smaller than the four hold | maintenance icons 411 digested later rather than the four hold | maintained icons 411 digested first. In addition, the modes of the four hold icons to be digested later are simplified so that the number of holds can be grasped or the same hue as that of the normal hold icon 412 is applied. You may comprise.

  (Q) In the above embodiment, the jackpot probability, the number of jackpot types, the open / close patterns of the variable winning devices 32a and 32b of various jackpot types are not particularly limited, and can be set as appropriate for each model. Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, the winning probability in the winning / losing lottery varies, but the winning probability does not vary (is constant), and the period of high pitched state (fluctuated) that is granted after the jackpot state ends. The above configuration may be applied to a pachinko machine in which a plurality of patterns are prepared.

  In the above embodiment, the number and arrangement of the start winning devices 33a and 33b, the variable winning devices 32a and 32b, and the through gates 34 are not particularly limited, and can be set for each model. Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, the success / failure lottery performed when the game ball enters the first start winning device 33a and the success / failure lottery performed when the game ball enters the second start winning device 33b are separately performed. The table is referred to and the distribution of the jackpot type is changed, but it may be the same.

  (R) In the above-described embodiment, the second start winning device 33b held after the variation display (first variation display) based on the game ball entering the first start winning device 33a that has already been held. The variation display (second variation display) based on the entry of the game ball is digested before the first variation display, and the second variation display is prioritized so as to move back and forth in the reserved order. Although it is configured to be digested automatically, it may be configured to be digested in the reserved order regardless of the first variation display or the second variation display.

  (S) In the above embodiment, the main control unit 261 performs the normal process (see FIG. 10) after the main process (see FIG. 9), but is particularly limited to such a configuration. is not. For example, after step S111 of the main process, processing such as updating of the counter value performed in steps S210 to S219 of the normal process in the above embodiment is performed. For example, in timer interrupt processing performed every 2 msec, The process performed in steps S201 to S209 of the normal process in the embodiment and the process of step S401 performed as the NMI interrupt process in the embodiment may be performed. In this case, as the processing of step S401, for example, it is determined whether or not the power failure signal SK1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 542 to the NMI terminal of the CPU 501, and when the output of the power failure signal SK1 is confirmed, The flag which shows generation | occurrence | production of ON is turned on. Further, the processing in step S401 may be performed separately as NMI interrupt processing, as in the above embodiment.

  (T) In the above-described embodiment, the information on whether or not a big hit state occurs is overwritten on the success / failure random number storage area that stores the value of the success / failure random number counter C1. It is not limited to. For example, a storage area for storing information on whether or not a big hit state occurs may be provided separately from the winning random number storage area for the execution area of each special variable holding area and each holding area. Separately from the area, an execution area of the special variable holding area and a storage area corresponding to each holding area may be provided, and information on whether or not a big hit state occurs in the storage area may be stored. In addition to the winning type random number storage area for storing the value of the type determination counter C2, a storage area for storing the jackpot type may be provided, or a reach random number storage area for storing the value of the variation selection counter C3; Separately, a storage area for storing reach information may be provided. In the above embodiment, at the start of the special symbol variation display, it is confirmed again whether or not the value of the success / failure random number counter C1 is a value corresponding to the winning, and the process according to the confirmation process is performed. You may comprise.

  (U) You may implement as a pachinko machine of a different type from the above-mentioned embodiment. For example, movable means that can be changed between a specific area in which a game ball moving in the game area can enter, an open state that allows entry into the specific area, and a closed state that prohibits entry into the specific area ( Variable entry means comprising wing members), specific entry means and non-specific entry means capable of entering a game ball entering a specific area, and detection of a game ball entering the specific entry means Specific entry detection means (condition establishment detection means) to be detected, special start means provided outside the specific area and capable of entering game balls moving in the game area, and game balls entering the special start means are detected. A special start detection means for controlling and a main control means for performing opening / closing control of the variable pitching means, and when a game ball enters the specific area, the game ball is designated as the specific pitching means and the non-specific pitching means. Regardless of which ball is entered, a predetermined number of game values (game balls) are given to the player. The main control means, based on the detection of the special start detection means, is a small hit state in which the variable pitching means is opened once or a plurality of times for the first time, or the variable pitching means is set to the first time. Whether or not to generate a jackpot state where a predetermined number of game balls are placed in the open state for a longer second time or a predetermined number of game balls enter the open variable winning means, and this is repeated a specified number of times. If you win a lottery in the winning lottery, you will generate a small win status, if you win a big hit in the lottery lottery, and if there is a detection of specific entry detection means You may apply to the gaming machine which generates a big hit state. In addition to pachinko machines, various ball games, similar game machines such as sparrow balls, slot machines as revolving game machines, and game machines that combine slot machines and pachinko machines May be.

  For example, when embodied in a slot machine, it is configured to set a plurality of (for example, three) stop butane push order hitting games and to receive a part object 433 when the answer is correct. If a predetermined vehicle is completed by the end of the pushing order hitting game, the mission may be successful (the game may be shifted to a special gaming state in which the completed vehicle is used).

[Appendix]
The technical idea that can be grasped from the above embodiment will be described below.

  A. One type of gaming machine is a pachinko machine. In the pachinko machine, when the game ball launched by the launching means enters the starting entrance means provided on the game board, a lottery is performed as to whether or not a hit state is generated, and the variable display means Fluctuation display for teaching the result is performed (see, for example, JP-A-2006-271480).

  In recent years, exchanging information between a gaming machine and a server operated by a gaming machine manufacturer via a portable communication terminal carried by the player provides an enjoyment that cannot be enjoyed simply by playing a gaming machine. A game system (mobile linked game) that can be played is known. For example, by performing a mobile linked game, it is possible to perform various customizations such as costumes on a continuous display object such as a character that can be continuously displayed in variable display on a variable display means. . In addition, in order to diversify the production and suppress the monotonous feeling in the game, it is configured to be able to customize multiple items for the continuous display object, and multiple patterns are prepared for customization of each item is there.

  However, when a plurality of customization items are prepared for the continuous display object, it is relatively difficult to grasp and predict the final form of the continuous display object (for example, for a player who plays the game machine for the first time). There is a risk that In this case, there is a concern that it may be difficult to understand that there are customization items that have not yet been customized, that is, it may be difficult to understand to what extent the continuous display object can be customized. Therefore, even though the customization function has been enhanced, the player cannot fully convey the potential of the customization function, and the customization function hardly contributes to the improvement of game motivation. There is a risk of incurring a situation in which the gaming machine is no longer played before it is grasped and fully enjoyed.

  Also, regarding the customization function, if it is tried to explain carefully with text in the variable display means etc., there is a concern that the time required for such explanation will become longer and the flow of production will worsen (especially players who have already been grasped). Is a useless time). In addition, such explanation is halfway, for example, if the player cannot read the displayed explanatory text, the flow of production will be worse, and the explanation of the customization function will be such that the contents of the explanation can not be understood There is also concern that it will no longer contribute to the smooth progress of the game.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming system in which the customization function can be fully enjoyed.

Means A-1. In a gaming system comprising a gaming machine and a server capable of acquiring information related to the player's game via a portable communication terminal carried by the player,
The gaming machine is
Operation means that can be operated by the player;
Player specifying information storage means for storing player information input by the player operating the operating means;
Game information storage means capable of accumulating and storing game information which is information relating to a lottery performed in the game;
Information output means capable of outputting the game information stored and stored in the game information storage means in a manner capable of being acquired by a mobile communication terminal;
The player information is stored in the player identification information storage means, so that processing corresponding to the player information is performed, and game information related to the game is stored and stored in the game information storage means. ,
The mobile communication terminal is
Information acquisition means capable of acquiring the game information output from the information output means;
When the game information is acquired by the information acquisition means, portable side transmission means for transmitting the game information and portable identification information capable of identifying the portable communication terminal to the server;
Mobile-side receiving means for receiving information transmitted from the server;
Portable output means capable of outputting information received by the portable side receiving means,
The server
Server side receiving means for receiving the game information transmitted from the portable side transmitting means and the portable identification information;
Server-side game information storage means for storing and storing the game information in association with the mobile identification information;
An accumulation storage that accumulates and stores the game information in the server-side game information storage means corresponding to the mobile identification information when the game information and the mobile identification information are received by the server-side receiving means. Control means;
Server-side transmission means for transmitting information related to the game information stored in the server-side game information storage means to the mobile communication terminal;
The gaming machine is
A main control means for performing a lottery on whether or not to generate a special gaming state advantageous to the player based on a predetermined opportunity, and generating the special gaming state based on a result of the lottery;
Variable display means capable of variably displaying the identification information;
The variable display means includes display control means for variably displaying the identification information and, after a predetermined time, displaying the identification information based on the lottery result.
The display control means is configured to be capable of deriving a continuous display object that can be continuously displayed in the variable display of the variable display means a plurality of times.
Regarding the continuous display object,
Multiple customization items that can be customized are set.
A plurality of patterns are prepared for the customization pattern of each customization item,
The continuous display object includes a completed object in which all of the plurality of customization items are customized, and an incomplete object in which the customization items that have not yet been customized exist up to the completed object,
The unfinished object is configured so that a part of the completed object is masked in a manner different from a part that has already been customized, corresponding to the customization item that has not yet been customized,
When the game information is output by the information output means, information on the continuous display object is also output.

  According to the means A-1, by confirming an aspect of an incomplete object that is a form of a continuous display object in which a customization item that has not yet been customized among a plurality of customization items exists, a part that has not yet been customized (customization Item) exists (there is room for further customization) at a glance. Therefore, it is possible to easily and surely understand how far the continuous display object can be customized, and as a result, the user can enjoy the customization function relatively smoothly by seeing the entire customization function. As a result, the customization function can be fully exhibited, and the production using the continuous display object can be fully enjoyed. Furthermore, an increase in interest in the customization function can improve game motivation.

  In addition, an unfinished object that has undergone masking can effectively and clearly recognize that there is a part that has not yet been customized, so there is no need to provide a separate explanation of the customization function. It will be over. Therefore, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the flow of performance deteriorates due to the explanation of the customization function (especially, it takes unnecessary time for a player who has already been grasped), and the game can proceed relatively smoothly. Can do.

  Furthermore, the information regarding the continuous display object in a gaming machine can be output to a server via a portable communication terminal. Thereby, on the server side, for example, it is possible to grasp the continuous display object that has been completed so far, or to grasp the incomplete object at the end of the previous game. For this reason, the information regarding the continuous display object of this game can be handed over to the next game (mobile linked game). As a result, if the continuation display object is not completed in one game with respect to the continuation display object, it is impossible for the game to be performed this time, such as a configuration in which the presentation using the completed continuation display object can only be seen. It is possible to increase the enjoyment of the next game while suppressing such a situation. Therefore, it is possible to improve convenience, and to make the display more diverse and profound with respect to effects using the continuous display object. In addition, it is possible to accumulate and enjoy the tricks and customizations over many days without having to overdo it with one game.

  Note that only a completed object that has been completed may be taken over, or both a completed object and an incomplete object may be taken over. In addition, since the function for customizing the continuous display object (or the function for selecting customization, etc.) is effective only when the mobile linked game is being executed, the willingness to participate in the mobile linked game is encouraged. Can be increased.

Note that “masking” is a feature (characteristic) that is not derived (added) in a completed part with respect to an incomplete part (a part corresponding to a customization item that has not yet been customized) in an incomplete object. The visual aspect) is derived, and it is possible to identify the presence of an incomplete part and to identify where the incomplete part is. Then, by masking the unfinished part, it becomes possible to identify that the unfinished part is not the finished part, and by customizing until the unfinished part disappears, the customization is completed (becomes a completed object). Identification becomes possible. As an aspect of “masking”,
1) For a range including a part or all of an incomplete part or at least a part of an incomplete part,
2) A pattern that is not added in the completed part (a pattern composed of lines, faces, spaces, etc., for example, a pattern such as a wallpaper, as well as a stamp (character, character face, etc.) And a mode in which there is only a frame of an unfinished part and a hollow portion is included),
Color aspects that are not derived in the finished part (for example, different hues (for example, sepia tone), different colors (for example, fewer types of hues used, such as monotone tone)), Or
Touch the unfinished part that cannot be derived in the finished part (how to draw a line; thickness, fineness (number of lines), rounded edge, etc.), or
These combinations
3) Covering, shielding, duplication, composition, application, and reflection (on the near side or the back side of the unfinished part).

Means A-2. The server
Server-side continuous display object information storage means capable of storing information relating to the continuous display object in association with the mobile identification information;
When information related to the continuous display object is received from the mobile communication terminal storing the game information of the gaming machine, information related to the continuous display object is stored in the server-side continuous display object information storage unit,
When the mobile communication terminal receives a request to transmit information related to the game information stored in the server-side game information storage means to the mobile communication terminal, the server-side continuous display is displayed together with the information related to the game information. The game system according to means A-1, wherein information relating to the continuous display object stored in the object information storage means is also transmitted.

  According to the means A-2, information on the continuous display object can be handed over to the next game (mobile linked game).

Means A-3. The gaming machine is
Means for displaying the continuous display object on the variable display means based on the information on the continuous display object when information on the continuous display object is input by an operation of the operation means by a player A gaming system according to A-1 or A-2.

  According to the means A-3, it is possible to reflect the information related to the continuous display object of the game up to the previous time in the current game. Note that “information relating to the continuous display object input by the operation of the operating means by the player” includes information relating to game information issued and stored in the server, various setting information on the server, and the like. In a configuration in which information related to the continuous display object is included in the password, it is a password. In a configuration in which the player can set (select) the continuous display object by operating the operating means in the gaming machine, Input information by means.

  B. One type of gaming machine is a pachinko machine. In the pachinko machine, when the game ball launched by the launching means enters the starting entrance means provided on the game board, a lottery is performed as to whether or not a hit state is generated, and the variable display means Fluctuation display for teaching the result is performed (see, for example, JP-A-2006-271480).

  In addition, the gaming machine is configured such that customization of a plurality of items can be executed for a continuous display object that can be continuously displayed in a plurality of variable displays on the variable display means, and a plurality of patterns are prepared for customization of each item There is something. In this way, by using the continuous display object whose aspect changes in various ways for the production and the like, it is possible to diversify the production and the like and to suppress the monotonous feeling in the game.

  However, when a plurality of customization items are prepared for the continuous display object, it is relatively difficult to grasp and predict the final form of the continuous display object (for example, for a player who plays the game machine for the first time). There is a risk that In this case, there is a concern that it may be difficult to understand that there are customization items that have not yet been customized, that is, it may be difficult to understand to what extent the continuous display object can be customized. Therefore, even though the customization function has been enhanced, the player cannot fully convey the potential of the customization function, and the customization function hardly contributes to the improvement of game motivation. There is a risk of incurring a situation in which the gaming machine is no longer played before it is grasped and fully enjoyed.

  Also, regarding the customization function, if it is tried to explain carefully with text in the variable display means etc., there is a concern that the time required for such explanation will become longer and the flow of production will worsen (especially players who have already been grasped). Is a useless time). In addition, such explanation is halfway, for example, if the player cannot read the displayed explanatory text, the flow of production will be worse, and the explanation of the customization function will be such that the contents of the explanation can not be understood There is also concern that it will no longer contribute to the smooth progress of the game.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can fully enjoy the customization function.

Means B-1-a. A main control means for performing a lottery on whether or not to generate a special gaming state advantageous to the player based on a predetermined opportunity, and generating the special gaming state based on a result of the lottery;
Variable display means capable of variably displaying the identification information;
In a gaming machine comprising: variable display means for variably displaying the identification information, and after a predetermined time, display control means for stopping and displaying the identification information based on the lottery result.
The display control means is configured to be capable of deriving a continuous display object that can be continuously displayed in the variable display of the variable display means a plurality of times.
Regarding the continuous display object,
Multiple customization items that can be customized are set.
A plurality of patterns are prepared for the customization pattern of each customization item,
The continuous display object includes a completed object in which all of the plurality of customization items are customized, and an incomplete object in which the customization items that have not yet been customized exist up to the completed object,
The unfinished object is configured so that a part of the completed object is masked in a manner different from the already customized portion, corresponding to the customization item that has not yet been customized. A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the means B-1-a, a part that has not yet been customized by confirming the state of an incomplete object that is a form of a continuous display object in which there are customization items that have not yet been customized among a plurality of customization items. It is possible to grasp at a glance that (customization items) exist (there is room for further customization). Therefore, it is possible to easily and surely understand how far the continuous display object can be customized, and as a result, the user can enjoy the customization function relatively smoothly by seeing the entire customization function. As a result, the customization function can be fully exhibited, and the production using the continuous display object can be fully enjoyed. Furthermore, an increase in interest in the customization function can improve game motivation.

  In addition, an unfinished object that has undergone masking can effectively and clearly recognize that there is a part that has not yet been customized, so there is no need to provide a separate explanation of the customization function. It will be over. Therefore, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the flow of performance deteriorates due to the explanation of the customization function (especially, it takes unnecessary time for a player who has already been grasped), and the game can proceed relatively smoothly. Can do.

Means B-1-b. A main control means for performing a lottery on whether or not to generate a special gaming state advantageous to the player based on a predetermined opportunity, and generating the special gaming state based on a result of the lottery;
Variable display means capable of variably displaying the identification information;
In a gaming machine comprising: variable display means for variably displaying the identification information, and after a predetermined time, display control means for stopping and displaying the identification information based on the lottery result.
The display control means is configured to be capable of deriving a continuous display object that can be continuously displayed in the variable display of the variable display means a plurality of times.
Regarding the continuous display object,
Multiple customization items that can be customized are set.
A plurality of patterns are prepared for the customization pattern of each customization item,
The continuous display object includes a completed object in which all of the plurality of customization items are customized, and an incomplete object in which the customization items that have not yet been customized exist up to the completed object,
The unfinished object is configured so that a part of the completed object is masked in a manner different from a part that has already been customized, corresponding to the customization item that has not yet been customized,
The gaming machine, wherein the display control means is configured to be able to derive a display related to the incomplete object in a state where the incomplete object is displayed.

  According to the means B-1-b, basically the same operational effects as those of the means B-1-a can be obtained. Further, according to the means B-1-b, the display related to the incomplete object can be derived in a state where the incomplete object is displayed. For this reason, a player's understanding about an incomplete object can be assisted, or the aspect which is not masked can be visually recognized. Therefore, it is possible to have more interest in customization.

  Means B-2. The game according to means B-1, wherein the masking applied to the unfinished object corresponding to each customization item is configured to have a pattern different from at least the adjacent masking. Machine.

  According to the means B-2, when there is a possibility that masking corresponding to a plurality of customization items is connected (continuous) or close, the masking corresponds to one customization item. It is possible to more reliably avoid a situation where it is difficult to determine whether or not it corresponds to a plurality of customization items. Therefore, masking areas corresponding to a plurality of customization items can be set relatively freely, and by checking the mode of the incomplete object, there are still a number of uncustomized parts (customization items). Can be understood at a glance. Therefore, more information about the customization function can be derived more effectively, so that the player can make a decision about the customization function quickly and surely, and he is fully proficient in the customization process as the game progresses can do.

  Note that “different patterns” of masking includes colors, patterns, or combinations thereof. Also, even if the masking area is separated or a line is drawn at the boundary of the masking area, it is easier and faster to customize items that have not yet been customized by changing the masking pattern of the adjacent masking area. You can distinguish numbers and types.

Means B-3. Customization progress storage means for storing information relating to customization of the incomplete object displayed on the variable display means;
Customization selection means for selecting the customization item and the customization pattern;
Customization reflecting means for reflecting the customization pattern selected by the customization selecting means on the unfinished object,
The customization selection means refers to the customization progress storage means when selecting the customization item and the customization pattern (avoids customization that overlaps with the storage contents of the customization progress storage means). A gaming machine according to B-1 or B-2.

  According to the means B-3, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the player feels unpleasant because the customization of the same content is selected one after another, and the customization function can be more fully enjoyed.

Means B-4. Operation means that can be operated by the player;
Customization opportunity giving means for determining whether or not to give a customization opportunity for the unfinished object;
Customization selection means for selecting the customization item and the customization pattern;
The customization reflecting means for reflecting the customization pattern selected by the customization selecting means on the incomplete object,
When it is determined that the customization opportunity is given to the unfinished object by the customization opportunity giving means, the part corresponding to the customization item selected by the customization selection means among the incomplete objects The configuration reflects the customization pattern selected by the customization selection means,
The customization reflecting unit is configured to be able to determine whether or not to reflect the customization pattern of the customization item selected by the customization selecting unit on the unfinished object based on input information by an operation to the operation unit. A gaming machine according to any one of means B-1 to B-3.

  According to the means B-4, although the customization item and the customization pattern are selected on the gaming machine side, the customized display object (unfinished object) is not unilaterally customized on the gaming machine side. Whether or not to reflect the incomplete object can be determined by the player. It is possible to reflect the personal preference of the player in the customization of the continuous display object (do not reflect the customization pattern that you do not like). Therefore, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of frustration such as customization not being exactly the player's intention while suppressing the one-pattern customization function. As a result, while diversifying the customization function, the player can be more attached to the effect using the continuous display object, and the game motivation can be improved.

  In addition, as "input information by operation to the operation means", information input in advance to the gaming machine such as a password including information such as a player's individual game history and various settings, and customization opportunities were obtained. In this case, information on whether or not to execute customization is included. In addition, when an opportunity for customization is given, an announcement is made to the player asking whether or not to reflect the selected customization pattern, and the input information by operating the operation means It may be configured to confirm the player's intention based on the player's intention, or the player inputs the player's personal information to the gaming machine at the start of the game, and the customization reflecting means is discarded according to the personal information. You may comprise so that selection may be performed. In addition, when the selected customization pattern is reflected on the continuous display object, or whether or not the customization pattern is reflected is selected, the masking corresponding to the customization item to which the customization pattern belongs is normal. It is good also as a different aspect (flashing etc.).

Means B-5. Operation means that can be operated by the player;
Customization selection means for selecting the customization item and the customization pattern;
Customization reflecting means for reflecting the customization pattern selected by the customization selecting means on the unfinished object,
The customization selection means includes
Pattern random number generating means used for pattern lottery to determine the customized pattern;
Corresponding pattern storage means for storing a correspondence relationship between a value that can be generated by the pattern random number generating means and the customized pattern;
A plurality of the corresponding pattern storage means are provided,
The means B-1 to B are characterized in that the customization selection means is configured to be able to determine the corresponding pattern storage means to be referred to when selecting a customization pattern based on input information obtained by operating the operation means. A gaming machine according to any one of -4.

  According to the means B-5, the player's individual game history, various settings (preferences), etc. can be reflected in the customization of the continuous display object (selection of the customization pattern by the customization selection means). Therefore, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of frustration such as customization not being exactly the player's intention while suppressing the one-pattern customization function. As a result, while diversifying the customization function, the player can be more attached to the effect using the continuous display object, and the game motivation can be improved.

Means B-6. Customization selection means for selecting the customization item and the customization pattern;
Customization reflecting means for reflecting the customization pattern selected by the customization selecting means on the unfinished object,
The customization selection means includes
Pattern random number generating means used for pattern lottery to determine the customized pattern;
A configuration comprising a correspondence pattern storage means for storing a correspondence relationship between a value that can be generated by the pattern random number generation means and the customization pattern;
The correspondence pattern storage means includes a first pattern storage means in which a specific customization pattern is not selected or difficult to select, and a second pattern storage means in which the specific customization pattern is more easily selected than the first pattern storage means. And
When selecting a customization pattern by the customization selection means,
A first pattern selection state in which the first pattern storage means is referred to and the second pattern storage means is not referred to;
Means B comprising customized pattern selection state switching means for changing the state to a second pattern selection state that is referred to by the second pattern storage means and that is not referred to by the first pattern storage means. The gaming machine according to any one of -1 to B-5.

  According to the means B-6, a game value is provided by providing a state in which a specific customization pattern is easily given (for example, a rare pattern high-accuracy state in which a rare customization pattern is given with high probability as a specific customization pattern). You can be interested in the game in a different dimension from the factors related to the increase or decrease of the game, and can also increase the chance of production. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a monotonous feeling in the game and improve the game motivation. The condition for changing the state between the first pattern selection state and the second pattern selection state can be appropriately set for each model.

  Incidentally, in correspondence with the means B-3, “the customization selection means selects the customization item and the customization pattern, and then refers to the customization progress storage means. If it is determined that the customization overlaps with the storage content of the customization progress storage means, the customization item may be reselected. That is, in the means B-6, there is a state where a specific customization pattern is likely to be given, and if the specific customization pattern is a rare customization pattern, the customization contents selected in the rare pattern high-accuracy state overlap. In other words, if a specific customization pattern is changed to another customization pattern (a general customization pattern that is difficult to select or not selected in the rare pattern high-accuracy state), why is the general customization pattern in the rare pattern high-accuracy state? There is a concern that it will cause a decline in interest. On the other hand, in this example, since a duplication is avoided by changing a customization item without changing a customization pattern, this situation can be avoided.

  Means B-7. The customized pattern selection state switching unit executes the state change to the second pattern selection state based on the number of executions of the variable display of the identification information in the variable display unit. Game machines.

  According to the means B-7, since the number of executions of the change display (the number of changes) is an opportunity for the state change to the second pattern selection state, the player is more aware of when the opportunity for the state change comes. Can be made easier. Therefore, for a player who wants to play a game in the second pattern selection state, it is possible to make it easier to turn around with the number of fluctuations as a guide, or to easily explain the phenomenon corresponding to the second pattern selection state (specific customized pattern). This makes it easy to understand the explanation of such effects and the like when the second pattern selection state-only effect is set). Further, since the game is surely approached to the opportunity for the state change by advancing the game, it is possible to add value to the progress of the game.

Means B-8. The pattern selection state switching means is
Means B-6 or B for executing the state change to the second pattern selection state when winning in the pattern high-precision lottery of whether or not to change the state to the second pattern selection state The gaming machine according to -7.

  According to the means B-8, winning in the pattern high-precision lottery triggers the state change to the second pattern selection state, so the game always expects the state change to the second pattern selection state. And an effect related to the state change to the second pattern selection state. As a result, it is possible to suppress a monotonous feeling during the game.

  Means B-9. The game according to any one of means B-6 to B-8, wherein the pattern selection state switching means executes a state change to the second pattern selection state based on the end of the special game state. Machine.

  According to the means B-9, even if the special game state is over, the transition to the second pattern selection state reduces the discouragement or the significant decrease in the game motivation due to the end of the special game state. can do. In addition, as a special game state, an increase in game value can be expected, a game can be performed while maintaining the game value of the player almost as it is, and the probability of occurrence of such a state is increased. The state etc. are mentioned.

Means B-10. Customization opportunity giving means for determining whether or not to give a customization opportunity for the unfinished object;
Customization selection means for selecting the customization item and the customization pattern;
Customization reflecting means for reflecting the customization pattern selected by the customization selecting means on the unfinished object,
The customization pattern selected by the customization selection means is reflected in the incomplete object when it is determined by the customization opportunity giving means to give a customization opportunity to the incomplete object,
The customization opportunity giving means is
Customized lottery random number generating means used for customization lottery whether or not to perform customization on the unfinished object;
As a value to be won in the customized lottery, a customized winning value storage means for storing a predetermined value among the values that can be generated by the customized lottery random number generating means,
The customized winning value storage means includes first customized winning value storage means and second customized winning value storage means having a larger number of values to be won in the customized lottery than the first customized winning value storage means. ,
Upon the customization lottery by the customization opportunity giving means,
A first winning value storage selection state to which the first customized winning value storage means is referred;
Any one of means B-1 to B-9 further comprising customized winning state switching means for changing the state to a second winning value storage selection state to which the second customized winning value storage means is referred. The gaming machine described.

  According to the means B-10, by providing a second winning value storage selection state (customization high-accuracy state) that is easy to visit for customization of an incomplete object, it is possible to enter a game in a dimension different from the elements related to increase / decrease in game value. Can interest you. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a monotonous feeling in the game and improve the game motivation. The condition for changing the state between the first winning value storage selection state and the second winning value storage selection state can be appropriately set for each model.

  Means B-11. The customized winning state switching means executes a state change to the second winning value storage selection state based on the number of executions of the variable display of the identification information in the variable display means. The gaming machine described.

  According to the means B-11, since the number of executions of fluctuation display (number of fluctuations) is an opportunity for a state change to the second winning value storage selection state, it is easy to recognize when the opportunity for the state change comes. can do. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for a player who wants to play a game in the second winning value storage selection state, using the number of fluctuations as a guide. Further, since the game is surely approached to the opportunity for the state change by advancing the game, it is possible to add value to the progress of the game.

Means B-12. The customized winning state switching means is:
Customized high-precision lottery random number generating means used for customized high-precision lottery of whether or not to change the state to the second winning value storage selection state;
As a value to be won in the customized high-precision lottery, comprising a customized high-winning value storage means for storing a predetermined value among the values that can be generated by the customized high-precision lottery random number generating means,
The gaming machine according to means B-10 or B-11, wherein a state change to the second winning value storage selection state is executed based on winning in the customized high-precision lottery.

  According to the means B-12, winning in the customized high-precision lottery triggers the state change to the second winning value storage selection state, so it is difficult to recognize when the state change trigger comes. can do. Therefore, it is possible to play a game while always expecting a state change to the second winning value storage selection state, and it is possible to perform an effect related to the state change to the second winning value storage selection state. As a result, it is possible to suppress a monotonous feeling during the game.

  It should be noted that “the customized high-precision lottery may be performed each time the identification information is displayed in a variable manner on the variable display means”.

  Means B-13. The customized winning state switching means executes the state change to the second winning value storage selection state based on the end of the special gaming state, according to any one of means B-10 to B-12 Game machines.

  According to the means B-13, even if the special gaming state has ended, the transition to the second winning value storage selection state causes a discouragement or a significant decrease in gaming motivation due to the end of the special gaming state. Can be reduced. In addition, as a special game state, an increase in game value can be expected, a game can be performed while maintaining the game value of the player almost as it is, and the probability of occurrence of such a state is increased. The state etc. are mentioned.

Means B-14. The continuous display object includes a main object and a sub-object (which is a simplified form of the main object),
The main object and the sub-object are
A base object capable of identifying an overall picture of the completed object;
It is set corresponding to each of the customization items, and is configured by a customization object displayed on a part corresponding to the customization item among the base objects by performing the customization,
When reflecting the customization object in the continuous display object, it is reflected in both the main object and the sub-object,
The gaming machine according to any one of means B-1 to B-13, wherein the masking is performed only on the sub-object (the base object of the incomplete object).

  According to the means B-14, since the main object is not masked, for example, even if the main object in a state where all the customization items are not yet customized (stage of the incomplete object) is displayed, the masking is not noticed. Will not be taken. Therefore, it is possible to avoid a situation such as a decrease in designability and a decrease in interest resulting from masking the unfinished main object, and the degree of customization progresses. However, it can be fully enjoyed in the form of the main object.

  On the other hand, masking is applied to the sub-object that is customized in the same manner as the main object, corresponding to the part that is not customized. For this reason, even if the main object is not masked, if the sub-object is visually recognized, the progress of customization of the main object can be reliably grasped.

  Note that “the base object of the sub-object has a silhouette shape, and the base object of the main object is drawn to the inner details”. Furthermore, as the “sub-object base object”, since there are a plurality of customization patterns, it can be considered as “a simplified form of the completed object”. For example, the drawing line and coloring are simplified, or Examples include deformed ones, reduced ones, and combinations thereof. Further, a character such as a person, an animal, or an anthropomorphic object may be adopted as the “base object”, and a character costume, a tool used by the character, a vehicle, a background, or the like may be adopted as the “customized object”. . Furthermore, as a “base object”, a vehicle used by a predetermined character, a vehicle such as an airplane, a base of an object (such as a cake or a weapon) produced by the character, a background such as a living space or a zoo, is adopted. As such, constituent parts such as vehicles and weapons, decorations, and various objects installed in the background may be employed.

  In addition, a configuration may be adopted in which both the main object and the sub-object are displayed at the same time, and the progress of the customization is confirmed by the sub-object while mainly enjoying the aspect of the main object. It is configured so that only one of the objects is displayed, and the customization is reflected when the main object is displayed while the customization proceeds while only the sub-object is displayed. You may employ | adopt the structure of enjoying the production using a main object.

Means B-15. In a gaming machine capable of executing a mobile linked game in which information is exchanged with a server via a portable communication terminal carried by a player,
Operation means that can be operated by the player;
Player specific information storage means for storing player information input by the player operating the operation means when starting a mobile linked game;
Game information storage means capable of accumulating and storing game information which is information relating to a lottery performed in the game;
Information output means capable of outputting game information stored and stored in the game information storage means in a manner that can be acquired or identified by a mobile communication terminal when the mobile linked game is terminated,
The player information is stored in the player identification information storage means so that processing corresponding to the player information is performed, and game information related to the current game is stored and stored in the game information storage means. There,
When the information output means outputs game information stored and stored in the game information storage means, information on the continuous display object is also output. B-1 to B-14 A gaming machine according to any one of the above.

  According to the means B-15, the information related to the continuous display object of the current game can be taken over to the next game (mobile linked game). As a result, if the continuation display object is not completed in one game with respect to the continuation display object, it is impossible for the game to be performed this time, such as a configuration in which the presentation using the completed continuation display object can only be seen. It is possible to increase the enjoyment of the next game while suppressing such a situation. Therefore, it is possible to improve convenience, and to make the display more diverse and profound with respect to effects using the continuous display object. In addition, it is possible to accumulate and enjoy the tricks and customizations over many days without having to overdo it with one game.

  Note that only a completed object that has been completed may be taken over, or both a completed object and an incomplete object may be taken over. In addition, a function for customizing the continuous display object (or a function for selecting customization, etc.) may be effective only when a mobile linked game is being executed. In this case, the willingness to participate in mobile-linked games can be increased.

  As for game machines that can customize character costumes and various sound effects, etc., according to the points obtained by performing mobile linked games, basically, various customizations are made on the web page of the server. The game machine is configured so that various customization settings cannot be made. For this reason, even if a new customization can be executed with the points obtained in this mobile linked game, in order to reflect such customization, the current mobile linked game is terminated and the mobile linked again. A series of work such as starting a game is required.

  On the other hand, by adopting a configuration in which the player can make various settings related to customization of the continuous display object in the gaming machine as in the above-described means B-4 and B-5, the mobile linked game is not temporarily terminated. Even customization can be reflected. Therefore, convenience related to customization can be enhanced, and the customization function can be enjoyed more easily (easy to attach).

Means B-16. Incomplete customization storage means for storing the contents of customization of each customization item of the incomplete object;
Completed customization storage means for storing the contents of customization of each customization item of the completed object for which customization has been completed;
Completed object storage and storage means for storing and storing the customization contents of the respective customization items of the completed object that has been customized;
When all the customization items of the unfinished object are customized, the customization content of each customization item is configured to be stored in the completed customization storage unit,
When at least the stored contents of the incomplete customization storage means are erased, the customization content of each customization item of the incomplete object is stored in the completed object storage storage means,
The information stored in the completed object storage means is not erased even if the stored contents of the completed customization storage means are erased,
When the information output means outputs the game information accumulated and stored in the game information storage means, the information stored in the completed object accumulation storage means is also outputted. 15. The gaming machine according to 15.

  According to the means B-16, even if the completed object which is finally completed by applying the customization to the unfinished object (for the first time combination) is deleted in the flow of the game, the completed object is completed. What has been done remains in the storage (completed object storage means) and is sent to the server via a portable communication terminal carried by the player. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the feeling of disappearance due to the easy erasure of the completed object completed with the last thought, and it is possible to add the pleasure of collecting collections.

  In addition, when the completed object that is completed in the gaming machine is still accumulated without being erased, for example, the display form of the completed object becomes messy, the display process becomes relatively difficult, or the completed object When selecting what to use from among the production, there is a concern that it will take time and the rhythm of the production will worsen, or it will increase the storage capacity, but by deleting it gradually , Can dispel such concerns. Of course, since the memory of the completion of the completed object remains reliably, it is possible to erase the completed object without hesitation.

  In addition, it is good also as an announcement display explaining the content of this means to a player. For example, “You can check the completed object that you obtained today by accessing the homepage (server) after the (mobile-linked) game ends. Furthermore, in the next mobile-linked game, you can select from the completed objects that you have acquired. “You can select a completed object to be used on a real machine (game machine) and use it for production, etc.”. The announcement display is preferably displayed when the completed object is deleted. In this case, it is possible to clearly recognize how the erased completed object will be handled, and it is possible to avoid a situation in which it is not possible to concentrate on the game due to that concern.

  The stored content of the completed object may be erased when an effect using the completed object is executed, or when an input for erasing is performed by the player's operation.

Means B-17. Customized lottery random number generating means used for a customized lottery for determining whether or not to give a customization opportunity for a predetermined customization item of the unfinished object;
Customized winning value storage means for storing a value won in the customized lottery among values that can be generated by the customized random number counter;
Item lottery random number generating means used for item lottery for determining a customization item to be customized from among the plurality of customization items;
Corresponding item storage means for storing a correspondence relationship between a value that can be generated by the item lottery random number generating means and the customization item;
Pattern random number generating means used for pattern lottery to determine the customized pattern;
Corresponding pattern storage means for storing a correspondence relationship between a value that can be generated by the pattern random number generating means and the customized pattern;
A non-mobile-linked pattern table that stores a correspondence relationship between a value that can be generated by the pattern random number generation means and a pattern of a suggestion effect that suggests the expected degree of winning;
In the mobile linked gaming state in which the player information is stored in the player specifying information storage means, the value of the item lottery random number generation means and the pattern random number when winning in the customized lottery Obtaining the value of the generating means, determining the customization item with reference to the corresponding item storage means, determining the customization content by determining the customization pattern with reference to the corresponding pattern storage means,
In the mobile linked gaming state where the player information is not stored in the player specifying information storage means, when winning in the customized lottery, the value of the pattern random number generation means is acquired, The gaming machine according to means B-15 or B-16, wherein the suggestion effect pattern is determined with reference to a pattern table at the time of mobile interlocking.

  According to the means B-17, since the customization function is exhibited only in the mobile linked gaming state, it is possible to improve the willingness to participate in the mobile linked gaming. Further, even in the non-mobile linked gaming state, the customized lottery is performed in the same manner as the mobile linked gaming state, and when the customized lottery is won, the suggestion effect is performed instead of the customization. Furthermore, when determining the pattern of the suggestive effect, the value of the pattern random number generation means used also when determining the customized pattern is acquired and determined based on the value. Therefore, it is possible to give pleasure such as suggestive effects to a player who is not performing mobile linked games. In addition, by sharing the random number generation means used for the control and pattern determination related to the suggestion of the suggestion effect with the random number generation means used for the control related to the pros and cons of customization in the mobile linked game and the determination of the customization pattern Therefore, it is possible to simplify the control and reduce the storage area.

Means B-18. The variable display means is configured to be able to execute a specific effect in which the completed object customized by the player is displayed in a specific manner,
There are a plurality of types of the specific effects, and the winning expectation degree for the occurrence of the special gaming state varies depending on the combination of the types of the specific effects and the completed object displayed during the specific effects. Configured,
When the specific effect is performed, the type of the specific effect is determined based on the customization pattern of the completed vehicle displayed in the specific effect and the winning expectation for occurrence of the special gaming state. A gaming machine according to any one of means B-1 or B-17.

  According to the means B-18, the player information is stored in the player specifying information storing means and the mobile linked game is performed, so that the continuous display object customized by the player is used as the specific object for the specific effect (appearance) ). For this reason, it is possible to improve performance. In the specific effect, the type of the specific effect is selected according to the completed object selected by the player and the winning expectation. For this reason, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the combination of the completed object and the specific effect type is far from the winning expectation.

Means B-19. A condition establishment detection means for detecting that a predetermined condition is established,
The main control means includes
A random number generating means used to determine whether or not to generate the special gaming state;
As a value to be won in the lottery, winning value storage means for storing a predetermined value among the values that can be generated by the success / failure random number generating means;
A holding storage area having a plurality of holding areas capable of storing change information used for determining the contents of the variable display in the variable display means,
A discriminant value extraction process for extracting the value of the random number generation means based on the detection of the condition establishment detection means;
A discriminant value storing process for storing the value of the success / failure random number generation means extracted in the discriminant value extracting process in any of the reserved areas of the reserved storage area;
A first success / failure determination process for determining whether or not the value of the success / failure random number generation means extracted in the determination value extraction process matches a value stored in the winning value storage means;
A result storage process for storing a result of the first determination result;
(Based on the result of the first win / no-go determination process, a specific effect determination process for determining whether or not to execute a continuous effect in a plurality of variable displays)
Prior to the execution of the fluctuation display in the variable display means, whether or not the value of the success / failure random number generation means as the fluctuation information corresponding to the fluctuation display matches the value stored in the winning value storage means. A second winning / failing determination process for determining whether or not to generate a special gaming state based on the information;
Based on the result of the second success / failure determination process, the variable display setting process for setting the variable display can be executed,
A customization selection means capable of selecting the customization item and the customization pattern when the first success / failure determination process is performed;
The customization reflecting means for reflecting the contents of customization selected by the customization selecting means on the unfinished object;
Selection customization display means capable of displaying the contents of customization selected by the customization selection means,
The selection customization display means is configured to determine the first win / no-go determination process corresponding to the fluctuation information newly stored in the empty holding area in a state where the fluctuation information is stored in the holding area of the holding storage area. In the stage prior to the start of the fluctuation display corresponding to the fluctuation information newly held in the holding area, the suggestion information indicating the content of the customization selected by the customization selection means when Any one of means B-1 to B-18, wherein the display is configured so as to be associated with a change display corresponding to the change information newly held in the hold area. Gaming machine.

  According to the means B-19, the reserved storage area has a plurality of reserved areas, and the values of the success / failure random number generating means related to the setting of the variable display can be stored for a plurality of times. Will be. In addition, this means is configured such that when the value of the random number generation means is stored in the holding storage area, whether the lottery is true or not can be grasped and the customization item and the customization pattern can be selected by the customization selection means. For this reason, at the stage where the variable display is suspended, it is possible to give an opportunity for customization and to tell the player the contents of customization. Therefore, for example, when the variable display is newly held when the variable display is already held, the stage before the newly held variable display is executed, that is, rather than the variable display being held. It is possible to teach the contents of customization that is given based on the fact that the variable display is newly held when the previously held variable display is performed. In this case, the player can respond to the contents of the customization that has been taught (attitude, operation, etc.) with a margin. For this reason, for example, when a predetermined operation is requested from the player, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the operation is not in time due to the short input period. In addition, with this configuration, it is not necessary to forcibly lengthen the fluctuation time in order to secure an extra input period for the operation. Can be suppressed.

  The selection customization display means may be constituted by variable display means, or may be constituted by predetermined display means provided in addition. Corresponding to the means B-2, “the mode of the suggestion information displayed on the selected customization display means is the incomplete object corresponding to the customization item to which the customization pattern indicated by the suggestion information belongs. It may be related to the masking pattern applied to (the background of the suggestion information is the same pattern). For example, the customization items are a to d, a is blue, b is red, c is green, and d is yellow, and the masking of an incomplete object is the color associated with the corresponding customization item. And at least a part of the suggestion information (for example, the shape of the customization item displayed on the front side of the background) may be configured with a color associated with the corresponding customization item. Good.

  Further, in response to the above B-3, “a holding pattern for storing the customization pattern selected by the customization selecting means corresponding to the variation information stored in the holding area of the holding storage area” Storage means, and the customization selection means refers to the customization progress storage means and the hold pattern storage means when selecting a customization pattern, and the customization progress storage means and the hold pattern storage means It may be possible to select a customized pattern different from the stored contents. That is, according to this means B-19, the right to customize is held together with the variation information. Therefore, if the customization pattern is selected by looking only at the pattern of the incomplete object, the customization pattern that is held is reserved. Therefore, in order to configure so that the same customization pattern is not selected continuously, it is necessary to refer to both the customization progress storage means and the hold pattern storage means.

Means B-20. The display control means is configured so that the suggestion information displayed by the selection customization display means can be changed in mode from when the corresponding variation information is stored in the holding area until it is executed as variation display. And
It has operating means that can be operated by the player,
The gaming machine according to means B-19, wherein the display control means determines whether or not to change the mode of the suggestion information based on input information by an operation to the operation means.

  According to the means B-20, after the suggestion information displayed by the selection customization display means is once displayed in a predetermined form, the form may change at a stage before the corresponding variable display is executed. For this reason, it is possible to diversify the effects such as stepping up the expectation of occurrence of the special gaming state suggested by the change in the mode of the suggestion information.

  Moreover, there is a possibility that the suggestion information may change its mode in the middle of being displayed by the selection customization display means until the change display of the corresponding change information is executed. For this reason, for a player who desires the appearance of customization of the content indicated by the suggestion information before the mode change, the suggestion information may change the mode, which may cause a decrease in interest. In this respect, the means B-20 is configured to be able to determine whether or not to change the mode of the suggestion information by an operation input by the player. For this reason, the said malfunction can be avoided and customization can be advanced, suppressing generation | occurrence | production of stress.

  In addition, you may comprise so that the aspect of suggestion information may be determined by the distribution based on the result of the said 1st winning / failing determination process. That is, by visually recognizing the mode of the suggestion information, it is possible to enjoy the estimation of how much expectation can be expected for the occurrence of the special gaming state in the change display of each time. In addition, the type of suggestion information and the presence / absence of change in the form are determined when the change information is suspended, and if there is a change in form, the change in form is performed when the corresponding change information comes at a predetermined timing. (It may be configured to derive a pattern different from the determined pattern and change to the determined pattern later), or based on the variation information that is reserved later, You may comprise so that the aspect of the suggestion information corresponding to the fluctuation information already suspended may be changed.

Means B-21. A customization opportunity giving means for determining whether or not to give a customization opportunity to the incomplete object;
The customization opportunity giving means determines whether or not to give the customization opportunity according to the result of the first success / failure determination process,
The customization selection unit is configured to determine the type of customization according to a result of the first success / failure determination process,
Based on the latest result of the first success / failure determination process performed in a state where variation information including the result of the first success / failure determination process is stored in the hold area of the hold storage area, the customization opportunity granting unit When it is determined that the customization opportunity is to be given, in the variation information corresponding to the variation information stored in the reserved area of the reserved storage area at the stage where the latest first determination processing is performed, The gaming machine according to means B-20, characterized in that the customization determined by the customization selecting means can be executed based on the result of the 1-win determination process.

  According to the means B-21, when the execution of customization is determined for the reserved area of the reserved storage area in response to the changed information held later, the changed display corresponding to the already held changed information is displayed. In (afterwards). In this case, it is possible to diversify the effects related to customization (for example, it is possible to provide a continuous advance notice such as a step-up effect related to customization over a plurality of continuous variable displays), and to improve convenience. More specifically, in terms of convenience, the execution of customization and the type of customization are determined based on the result of the first winning / failing determination process, in other words, according to the expected degree of occurrence of the special gaming state. It will be. Therefore, in a variable display that teaches the occurrence of a special gaming state, if an effect related to customization is also derived, the time taken for the effect for teaching whether or not the special gaming state occurs is shortened, or the fluctuation time There is a concern that the production balance becomes worse due to the excessively long period.

  In this respect, by executing the customization that was executed based on the occurrence of the special gaming state in the variation display performed before the variation display that teaches the occurrence of the special gaming state, It is possible to derive an effect for teaching the occurrence of the special gaming state and customization with a relatively large margin. Further, when a predetermined customization is derived by being associated with the degree of expectation for occurrence of the special gaming state and the type of customization, the special gaming state is generated in the subsequent variable display that is held. So, the expectation can be raised. In particular, in the state where the display time (variation time) of the variation display of the identification information is set to be relatively short (time shortening state), the above-described effect can be more remarkably achieved by applying the above configuration. .

Means B-22. The unfinished object includes a base object and a customization object that is incidentally displayed on the base object as a result of the customization.
The masking is configured to correspond to a portion of the base object of the sub-object that has not yet been customized with the customization object,
There are a plurality of types of base objects, and the customization object is also changed according to the change of the base object,
When the change of the base object is determined, the change of the base object is waited until the change display corresponding to the suggestion information that is already displayed is digested. The gaming machine according to any one of means B-19 to B-21, wherein the one corresponding to the type of the base object after the change is derived.

  According to the means B-22, in the configuration in which the customization pattern to be customized (customized object) is displayed in advance, the change of the base object is performed immediately before the customization pattern that the user has been waiting for is displayed. It is possible to avoid a situation in which the customization object is also changed accordingly.

  In addition, according to this means, when the customized object corresponding to the base object after the change is displayed as the suggestion information before the base object is changed, the base object is changed in advance. I can grasp it. Utilizing this phenomenon, if the change in the base object is associated with the expected expectation, or if the base object is to be changed but it is not changed, the performance will be improved. Can be achieved.

Means B-23. Proximity detection means capable of detecting the proximity or contact of an object to a plurality of locations of the variable display means as different information (displays various information related to the selection of the customization function)
The gaming machine according to any one of means B-1 to B-22, wherein selection information by a player regarding the customization can be input based on detection information of the proximity detection means.

  According to the means B-23, for example, when selecting any one of a plurality of completed objects, the selection operation is performed by touching any of the plurality of completed objects displayed on the variable display means. The operation can be made very easy to understand. Therefore, it is possible to avoid such a situation that the operation is overwhelmed by such an operation, or that the game tempo is deteriorated by setting a relatively long time for the operation.

  C. One type of gaming machine is a pachinko machine. In the pachinko machine, when the game ball launched by the launching means enters the starting entrance means provided on the game board, a lottery is performed as to whether or not a hit state is generated, and the variable display means Fluctuation display for teaching the result is performed (see, for example, JP-A-2006-271480).

  Also, with pachinko machines, it is known that the game will be inflected by changing the winning probability in the lottery to determine whether or not to generate a big hit state, or by changing the ease of entering the starting entry means. It has been.

  However, there are cases where it is difficult to visit the opportunity to change the winning probability or change the ease of entering the starting entry means, in which case the game may become monotonous. The

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems and the like, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing monotonous feeling.

Means C-1. A main control means for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to generate a special gaming state advantageous to the player based on a predetermined opportunity, and to generate the special gaming state based on a result of the lottery;
Variable display means capable of variably displaying the identification information;
In a gaming machine comprising: display control means for variably displaying the identification information on the variable display means, and display control means for stopping and displaying the identification information based on the result of the success / failure lottery after a predetermined time,
The display control means is configured to be capable of deriving a continuous display object that can be continuously displayed in the variable display of the variable display means a plurality of times.
Regarding the continuous display object,
Multiple customization items that can be customized are set.
A plurality of patterns are prepared for the customization pattern of each customization item,
The continuous display object includes a completed object in which all of the plurality of customization items are customized and an incomplete object in which the customization items that have not yet been customized exist up to the completed object. And
Customization selection means for selecting the customization item and the customization pattern;
Customization reflecting means for reflecting the customization pattern selected by the customization selecting means on the unfinished object,
The customization selection means includes
Pattern random number generating means used for pattern lottery to determine the customized pattern;
Corresponding pattern storage means for storing a correspondence relationship between a value that can be generated by the pattern random number generating means and the customized pattern;
The correspondence pattern storage means
A first pattern storage means in which a specific customization pattern is not selected or is difficult to select;
A second pattern storage means for easily selecting the specific customized pattern as compared with the first pattern storage means;
When selecting a customization pattern by the customization selection means,
A first pattern selection state in which the first pattern storage means is referred to (or easily referred to) and the second pattern storage means is not referred to (or difficult to be referred to);
Customized pattern selection that changes the state to the second pattern selection state in which the second pattern storage means is referred to (or easily referred to) and the first pattern storage means is not referred to (or difficult to be referred to). A gaming machine comprising state switching means.

  According to the means C-1, by providing a state in which a specific customization pattern is easily given (for example, a pattern high-accuracy state in which a rare customization pattern is given as a specific customization pattern with a high probability), You can be interested in the game in a different dimension from the factors related to the increase and decrease, and can increase the chances of production. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a monotonous feeling in the game and improve the game motivation.

  The condition for changing the state between the first pattern selection state and the second pattern selection state can be appropriately set for each model. Further, pattern high accuracy teaching means for teaching the player of the presence of the second pattern selection state may be provided. By means of the pattern high-precision teaching means, for example, in advance, such as what kind of state the second pattern selection state is, and what condition is satisfied when the state is shifted to the second pattern selection state, Teaching that the two-pattern selection state is in progress may be performed. In this case, the presence of the second pattern selection state can be positively appealed by the player.

Means C-2. There is a first probability state that wins the special gaming state with a predetermined probability in the success / failure lottery, and a second probability state that wins the special gaming state in the success / failure lottery with a higher probability than the first probability state. ,
The gaming machine according to means C-1, wherein a state change between the first pattern selection state and the second pattern selection state can be performed at least in the first probability state.

  Generally, the player does not finish the game in the second probability state in which it is easy to win the special game state, but ends the game in the first probability state. That is, a player who is going to start a game selects a gaming machine to play from among the gaming machines in the first probability state.

  Therefore, according to the means C-2, at least in the first probability state, it is configured to shift to the second pattern selection state in which a specific customization pattern is easily given. For this reason, it is possible to give a chance to start a game to a player who is interested in customization, assuming that a specific customization pattern is likely to be given or may be in such a state. Therefore, the player's willingness to play can be improved, and the operating rate of the gaming machine can be improved.

  Means C-3-a. A gaming machine according to means C-2, comprising rare pattern high-accuracy state teaching means for teaching the second pattern selection state.

  According to the means C-3-a, the player can surely grasp whether or not the second pattern selection state is obtained by checking the rare pattern high-accuracy state teaching means. The effect of the will be more reliably achieved.

  Means C-3-b. The rare pattern high-accuracy state teaching unit is configured to be capable of teaching that the second pattern selection state is present even when the variable display unit does not display the variation of the identification information. A gaming machine according to C-3a.

  If the player is not playing a game, naturally, the variable display means does not display the variation of the identification state. In other words, the player who is going to start a game selects a gaming machine to play from among the gaming machines that are not being displayed with the variation of the identification information.

  Therefore, according to the means C-3-b, the player is in a second pattern selection state in which a specific customized pattern is easily given even when the variable display means is not performing a variable display of identification information. Is configured to be recognizable. For this reason, it is possible to more reliably give a chance to start a game to a player who is interested in customization, assuming that a specific customization pattern is easily given. Therefore, the player's willingness to play can be improved, and the effect of improving the operating rate of the gaming machine and the like can be further exhibited.

Means C-3-c. In a configuration in which a specific display (for example, a demonstration screen display as an energy saving mode) is derived in the variable display unit when a predetermined time has elapsed since the variable display unit has no change display of identification information.
The rare pattern high-accuracy state teaching means can teach that the second pattern selection state is at least during the variable display of the identification information in the variable display means,
The gaming machine according to means C-3-a, wherein the gaming machine is configured not to teach that the second pattern is selected during the specific display.

  According to the means C-3-c, it is not possible to confirm whether or not it is the second pattern selection state when a predetermined time has elapsed after the end of the variable display. For this reason, it is possible to increase the possibility of having a player who is interested in customization execute the variable display at least once.

  Means C-4. The customized pattern selection state switching means executes the state change to the second pattern selection state based on the number of executions of the variable display of the identification information in the variable display means. A gaming machine according to any one of -3.

  According to the means C-4, since the number of executions of change display (number of changes) is an opportunity for the state change to the second pattern selection state, the player is more aware of when the opportunity for the state change comes. Can be made easier. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for a player who wants to play a game in the second pattern selection state, using the number of fluctuations as a guide, and as a result, an effect of promoting the operation of the gaming machine can be expected. It also makes it easier to explain the phenomenon corresponding to the second pattern selection state (about the reason why the specific customization pattern is selected, such effects when the special effect for the second pattern selection state is set, etc.) Make the explanation easier to understand). Furthermore, since the game is surely approached to the opportunity for the state change by advancing the game, it is possible to add value to the advancement of the game. Note that the number of executions of the variable display triggered by the state change to the second pattern selection state can be appropriately set for each model of the gaming machine.

  It should be noted that a predetermined display means (a variable display means may be used) may be configured to display the remaining number of times of change display until the state changes to the second pattern selection state. Furthermore, when the upper limit of the number of times of change is provided for the period of the second pattern selection state, the remaining number of times of change display until the end of the second pattern selection state may be displayed.

  Means C-5. The pattern selection state switching means executes a state change to the second pattern selection state based on the end of the special gaming state or the end of the fake state of the special gaming state. A gaming machine according to any one of 1 to C-4.

  According to the means C-5, even if the special gaming state is over, the transition to the second pattern selection state reduces the discouragement and the significant decrease in the game motivation due to the end of the special gaming state. can do. In addition, as a special game state, an increase in game value can be expected, a game can be performed while maintaining the game value of the player almost as it is, and the probability of occurrence of such a state is increased. Among these, one or more may be set as a trigger for transition to the second pattern selection state. Further, for example, “the pattern selection state switching means executes a state change to the second pattern selection state based on the end of the special game state or the end of the fake state of the special game state”. Also good.

Means C-6. The pattern selection state switching means is
Means C-1 to C for executing the state change to the second pattern selection state when winning in the pattern high-precision lottery of whether or not to change the state to the second pattern selection state The gaming machine according to any one of -5.

  According to the means C-6, winning in the pattern high-precision lottery triggers the state change to the second pattern selection state, so that the game always expects the state change to the second pattern selection state. And an effect related to the state change to the second pattern selection state. As a result, it is possible to suppress a monotonous feeling during the game.

Means C-7. A customization opportunity giving means for determining whether or not to give a customization opportunity to the incomplete object;
The customization pattern selected by the customization selection means is reflected in the incomplete object when it is determined by the customization opportunity giving means to give a customization opportunity to the incomplete object,
The customization opportunity giving means is
Customized lottery random number generating means used in a customized lottery for determining whether or not to give a customization opportunity for the unfinished object;
As a value to be won in the customized lottery, a customized winning value storage means for storing a predetermined value among the values that can be generated by the customized lottery random number generating means,
The customized winning value storage means includes first customized winning value storage means and second customized winning value storage means having a larger number of values to be won in the customized lottery than the first customized winning value storage means. ,
Upon the customization lottery by the customization opportunity giving means,
A first winning value storage selection state to which the first customized winning value storage means is referred;
Any one of means C-1 to C-6 further comprising customized winning state switching means for changing the state to a second winning value storage selection state referred to by the second customized winning value storage means. The gaming machine described.

  According to the means C-7, by providing a second winning value storage selection state (customized high-accuracy state) where customization of an incomplete object is easy to visit, it is possible to enter a game in a dimension different from the elements related to increase / decrease in game value. Can interest you. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a monotonous feeling in the game and improve the game motivation. The condition for changing the state between the first winning value storage selection state and the second winning value storage selection state can be appropriately set for each model.

  Means C-8. The customized winning state switching means executes a state change to the second winning value storage selection state based on the number of executions of the variable display of the identification information in the variable display means. The gaming machine described.

  According to the means C-8, since the number of executions of fluctuation display (number of fluctuations) is an opportunity for a state change to the second winning value storage selection state, it is easy to recognize when the opportunity for the state change comes. can do. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for a player who wants to play a game in the second winning value storage selection state, using the number of fluctuations as a guide. Further, since the game is surely approached to the opportunity for the state change by advancing the game, it is possible to add value to the progress of the game.

  Means C-9. The gaming machine according to means C-7 or C-8, wherein the customized winning state switching means executes a state change to the second winning value storage selection state based on completion of the special gaming state. .

  According to the means C-9, even if the special game state is over, the transition to the second winning value storage selection state causes a discouragement due to the end of the special game state, a significant decrease in game willingness, etc. Can be reduced. In addition, as a special game state, an increase in game value can be expected, a game can be performed while maintaining the game value of the player almost as it is, and the probability of occurrence of such a state is increased. The state etc. are mentioned.

Means C-10. The customized winning state switching means is:
Customized high-precision lottery random number generating means used for customized high-precision lottery of whether or not to change the state to the second winning value storage selection state;
As a value to be won in the customized high-precision lottery, comprising a customized high-winning value storage means for storing a predetermined value among the values that can be generated by the customized high-precision lottery random number generating means,
The gaming machine according to any one of means C-7 to C-9, wherein a state change to the second winning value storage selection state is executed based on winning in the customized high-precision lottery.

  According to the means C-10, winning in the customized high-precision lottery triggers the state change to the second winning value storage selection state, so it is difficult to recognize when the state change trigger comes. can do. Therefore, it is possible to play a game while always expecting a state change to the second winning value storage selection state, and it is possible to perform an effect related to the state change to the second winning value storage selection state. As a result, it is possible to suppress a monotonous feeling during the game. It should be noted that “the customized high-precision lottery may be performed each time the identification information is displayed in a variable manner on the variable display means”.

  Means C-11. The unfinished object is configured so that a part of the completed object is masked in a manner different from the already customized portion, corresponding to the customization item that has not yet been customized. A gaming machine according to any one of means C-1 to C-10.

  According to the means C-11, by confirming the aspect of the incomplete object that is a form of the continuous display object in which there are customization items that are not yet customized among the plurality of customization items, a part that has not yet been customized (customization Item) exists (there is room for further customization) at a glance. Therefore, it is possible to easily and surely understand how far the continuous display object can be customized, and as a result, the user can enjoy the customization function relatively smoothly by seeing the entire customization function. As a result, the customization function can be fully exhibited, and the production using the continuous display object can be fully enjoyed. Furthermore, an increase in interest in the customization function can improve game motivation.

  In addition, an unfinished object that has undergone masking can effectively and clearly recognize that there is a part that has not yet been customized, so there is no need to provide a separate explanation of the customization function. It will be over. Therefore, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the flow of performance deteriorates due to the explanation of the customization function (especially, it takes unnecessary time for a player who has already been grasped), and the game can proceed relatively smoothly. Can do.

  Means C-12. The game according to means C-11, wherein the mask applied to the unfinished object corresponding to each customization item is configured to have a pattern different from at least the adjacent masking. Machine.

  According to the means C-12, when there is a possibility that masking corresponding to a plurality of customization items is connected (continuous) or close, the masking corresponds to one customization item. It is possible to more reliably avoid a situation where it is difficult to determine whether or not it corresponds to a plurality of customization items. Therefore, masking areas corresponding to a plurality of customization items can be set relatively freely, and by checking the mode of the incomplete object, there are still a number of uncustomized parts (customization items). Can be understood at a glance. Therefore, more information about the customization function can be derived more effectively, so that the player can make a decision about the customization function quickly and surely, and he is fully proficient in the customization process as the game progresses can do.

  Note that “different patterns” of masking includes colors, patterns, or combinations thereof. Also, even if the masking area is separated or a line is drawn at the boundary of the masking area, it is easier and faster to customize items that have not yet been customized by changing the masking pattern of the adjacent masking area. You can distinguish numbers and types.

Means C-13. The continuous display object includes a main object and a sub-object (which is a simplified form of the main object),
The main object and the sub-object are
A base object capable of identifying an overall picture of the completed object;
It is set corresponding to each of the customization items, and is configured by a customization object displayed on a part corresponding to the customization item among the base objects by performing the customization,
When reflecting the customization object in the continuous display object, it is reflected in both the main object and the sub-object,
The gaming machine according to means C-11 or C-12, wherein the masking is performed only on the incomplete object (the base object) of the sub-object.

  According to the means C-13, since the main object is not masked, for example, even if the main object is displayed in a state where all the customization items have not been customized yet (incomplete object stage), the masking is not noticed. Will not be taken. Therefore, it is possible to avoid a situation such as a decrease in designability and a decrease in interest resulting from masking the unfinished main object, and the degree of customization progresses. However, it can be fully enjoyed in the form of the main object.

  On the other hand, masking is applied to the sub-object that is customized in the same manner as the main object, corresponding to the part that is not customized. For this reason, even if the main object is not masked, if the sub-object is visually recognized, the progress of customization of the main object can be reliably grasped.

Means C-14. Customization progress storage means for storing information relating to customization of the incomplete object displayed on the variable display means;
Customization selection means for selecting the customization item and the customization pattern;
Customization reflecting means for reflecting the customization pattern selected by the customization selecting means on the unfinished object,
The customization selection means refers to the customization progress storage means when selecting the customization item and the customization pattern (avoids customization that overlaps with the storage contents of the customization progress storage means). A gaming machine according to any one of means C-11 to C-13.

  According to the means C-14, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the player feels unpleasant because the customization of the same content is selected one after another, and the customization function can be more fully enjoyed.

  The customization selection means refers to the customization progress storage means after selecting the customization item and the customization pattern, and the customization content selected this time overlaps with the storage content of the customization progress storage means. If it is determined that the customization is to be performed, the customization item may be re-selected ". That is, if the specific customization pattern of the means C-1 is a rare customization pattern, the content of the customization selected in the rare pattern high-accuracy state is duplicated, and therefore the specific customization pattern is different from another customization pattern. If it is changed to a pattern (a general customization pattern that is difficult to select or is not selected in the rare pattern high-accuracy state), the reason why the general customization pattern is selected in the rare pattern high-accuracy state is reduced. There is concern. On the other hand, in this example, since a duplication is avoided by changing a customization item without changing a customization pattern, this situation can be avoided.

Means C-15. Operation means that can be operated by the player;
Customization opportunity giving means for determining whether or not to give a customization opportunity for the unfinished object;
Customization selection means for selecting the customization item and the customization pattern;
Customization reflecting means for reflecting the customization pattern selected by the customization selecting means on the unfinished object,
When it is determined that the customization opportunity is given to the unfinished object by the customization opportunity giving means, the part corresponding to the customization item selected by the customization selection means among the incomplete objects The configuration reflects the customization pattern selected by the customization selection means,
The customization reflecting unit is configured to be able to determine whether or not to reflect the customization pattern of the customization item selected by the customization selecting unit on the unfinished object based on input information by an operation to the operation unit. A gaming machine according to any one of means C-1 to C-14.

  According to the means C-15, although the customization item and the customization pattern are selected on the gaming machine side, the customized display pattern (unfinished object) is not unilaterally customized on the gaming machine side. Whether or not to reflect the incomplete object can be determined by the player. It is possible to reflect the personal preference of the player in the customization of the continuous display object (do not reflect the customization pattern that you do not like). Therefore, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of frustration such as customization not being exactly the player's intention while suppressing the one-pattern customization function. As a result, while diversifying the customization function, the player can be more attached to the effect using the continuous display object, and the game motivation can be improved.

  In addition, as "input information by operation to the operation means", information input in advance to the gaming machine such as a password including information such as a player's individual game history and various settings, and customization opportunities were obtained. In this case, information on whether or not to execute customization is included. In addition, when an opportunity for customization is given, an announcement is made to the player asking whether or not to reflect the selected customization pattern, and the input information by operating the operation means It may be configured to confirm the player's intention based on the player's intention, or the player inputs the player's personal information to the gaming machine at the start of the game, and the customization reflecting means is discarded according to the personal information. You may comprise so that selection may be performed. In addition, when the selected customization pattern is reflected on the continuous display object, or whether or not the customization pattern is reflected is selected, the masking corresponding to the customization item to which the customization pattern belongs is normal. It is good also as a different aspect (flashing etc.).

Means C-16. Operation means that can be operated by the player;
Customization selection means for selecting the customization item and the customization pattern;
Customization reflecting means for reflecting the customization pattern selected by the customization selecting means on the unfinished object,
The customization selection means includes
Pattern random number generating means used for pattern lottery to determine the customized pattern;
Corresponding pattern storage means for storing a correspondence relationship between a value that can be generated by the pattern random number generating means and the customized pattern;
A plurality of the corresponding pattern storage means are provided,
The customization selection means is configured to be able to determine the corresponding pattern storage means to be referred to when selecting a customization pattern based on input information obtained by operating the operation means. The gaming machine according to any one of -15.

  According to the means C-16, the player's personal game history, various settings (preferences), etc. can be reflected in the customization of the continuous display object (selection of the customization pattern by the customization selection means). Therefore, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of frustration such as customization not being exactly the player's intention while suppressing the one-pattern customization function. As a result, while diversifying the customization function, the player can be more attached to the effect using the continuous display object, and the game motivation can be improved.

Means C-17. In a gaming machine capable of executing a mobile linked game in which information is exchanged with a server via a portable communication terminal carried by a player,
Operation means that can be operated by the player;
Player specific information storage means for storing player information input by the player operating the operation means when starting a mobile linked game;
Game information storage means capable of accumulating and storing game information which is information relating to a lottery performed in the game;
Information output means capable of outputting game information stored and stored in the game information storage means in a manner that can be acquired or identified by a mobile communication terminal when the mobile linked game is terminated,
The player information is stored in the player identification information storage means so that processing corresponding to the player information is performed, and game information related to the current game is stored and stored in the game information storage means. There,
When the information output means outputs game information stored and stored in the game information storage means, information on the continuous display object is also output. C-1 to C-16 A gaming machine according to any one of the above.

  According to the means C-17, the information related to the continuous display object of the current game can be taken over to the next game (mobile linked game). As a result, if the continuation display object is not completed in one game with respect to the continuation display object, it is impossible for the game to be performed this time, such as a configuration in which the presentation using the completed continuation display object can only be seen. It is possible to increase the enjoyment of the next game while suppressing such a situation. Therefore, it is possible to improve convenience, and to make the display more diverse and profound with respect to effects using the continuous display object. In addition, it is possible to accumulate and enjoy the tricks and customizations over many days without having to overdo it with one game.

  Note that only a completed object that has been completed may be taken over, or both a completed object and an incomplete object may be taken over. In addition, a function for customizing the continuous display object (or a function for selecting customization, etc.) may be effective only when a mobile linked game is being executed. In this case, the willingness to participate in mobile-linked games can be increased.

  As for game machines that can customize character costumes and various sound effects, etc., according to the points obtained by performing mobile linked games, basically, various customizations are made on the web page of the server. The game machine is configured so that various customization settings cannot be made. For this reason, even if a new customization can be executed with the points obtained in this mobile linked game, in order to reflect such customization, the current mobile linked game is terminated and the mobile linked again. A series of work such as starting a game is required.

  On the other hand, by adopting a configuration in which the player can make various settings related to customization of the continuous display object in the gaming machine as in the above-described means C-15 and C-16, the mobile linked game is not temporarily terminated. Even customization can be reflected. Therefore, convenience related to customization can be enhanced, and the customization function can be enjoyed more easily (easy to attach).

Means C-18. Incomplete customization storage means for storing the contents of customization of each customization item of the incomplete object;
Completed customization storage means for storing the contents of customization of each customization item of the completed object for which customization has been completed;
Completed object storage and storage means for storing and storing the customization contents of the respective customization items of the completed object that has been customized;
When all the customization items of the unfinished object are customized, the customization content of each customization item is configured to be stored in the completed customization storage unit,
When at least the stored contents of the incomplete customization storage means are erased, the customization content of each customization item of the incomplete object is stored in the completed object storage storage means,
The information stored in the completed object storage means is not erased even if the stored contents of the completed customization storage means are erased,
When the game information stored in the game information storage means is output by the information output means, information stored in the completed object storage storage means is also output. The gaming machine according to 17.

  According to the means C-18, even if the completed object which is finally completed by applying the customization to the unfinished object (the first combination) is deleted in the flow of the game, the completed object is completed. What has been done remains in the storage (completed object storage means) and is sent to the server via a portable communication terminal carried by the player. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the feeling of disappearance due to the easy erasure of the completed object completed with the last thought, and it is possible to add the pleasure of collecting collections.

  In addition, when the completed object that is completed in the gaming machine is still accumulated without being erased, for example, the display form of the completed object becomes messy, the display process becomes relatively difficult, or the completed object When selecting what to use from among the production, there is a concern that it will take time and the rhythm of the production will worsen, or it will increase the storage capacity, but by deleting it gradually , Can dispel such concerns. Of course, since the memory of the completion of the completed object remains reliably, it is possible to erase the completed object without hesitation.

  In addition, it is good also as an announcement display explaining the content of this means to a player. For example, “You can check the completed object that you obtained today by accessing the homepage (server) after the (mobile-linked) game ends. Furthermore, in the next mobile-linked game, you can select from the completed objects that you have acquired. “You can select a completed object to be used on a real machine (game machine) and use it for production, etc.”. The announcement display is preferably displayed when the completed object is deleted. In this case, it is possible to clearly recognize how the erased completed object will be handled, and it is possible to avoid a situation in which it is not possible to concentrate on the game due to that concern.

  The stored content of the completed object may be erased when an effect using the completed object is executed, or when an input for erasing is performed by the player's operation.

Means C-19. Customized lottery random number generating means used for a customized lottery for determining whether or not to give a customization opportunity for a predetermined customization item of the unfinished object;
Customized winning value storage means for storing a value won in the customized lottery among values that can be generated by the customized random number counter;
Item lottery random number generating means used for item lottery for determining a customization item to be customized from among the plurality of customization items;
Corresponding item storage means for storing a correspondence relationship between a value that can be generated by the item lottery random number generating means and the customization item;
Pattern random number generating means used for pattern lottery to determine the customized pattern;
Corresponding pattern storage means for storing a correspondence relationship between a value that can be generated by the pattern random number generating means and the customized pattern;
A non-mobile-linked pattern table that stores a correspondence relationship between a value that can be generated by the pattern random number generation means and a pattern of a suggestion effect that suggests the expected degree of winning;
In the mobile linked gaming state in which the player information is stored in the player specifying information storage means, the value of the item lottery random number generation means and the pattern random number when winning in the customized lottery Obtaining the value of the generating means, determining the customization item with reference to the corresponding item storage means, determining the customization content by determining the customization pattern with reference to the corresponding pattern storage means,
In the mobile linked gaming state where the player information is not stored in the player specifying information storage means, when winning in the customized lottery, the value of the pattern random number generation means is acquired, The gaming machine according to means C-17 or C-18, wherein the suggestion effect pattern is determined with reference to a mobile interlocking pattern table.

  According to the means C-19, since the customization function is exhibited only in the mobile linked gaming state, it is possible to improve the willingness to participate in the mobile linked gaming. Further, even in the non-mobile linked gaming state, the customized lottery is performed in the same manner as the mobile linked gaming state, and when the customized lottery is won, the suggestion effect is performed instead of the customization. Furthermore, when determining the pattern of the suggestive effect, the value of the pattern random number generation means used also when determining the customized pattern is acquired and determined based on the value. Therefore, it is possible to give pleasure such as suggestive effects to a player who is not performing mobile linked games. In addition, by sharing the random number generation means used for the control and pattern determination related to the suggestion of the suggestion effect with the random number generation means used for the control related to the pros and cons of customization in the mobile linked game and the determination of the customization pattern Therefore, it is possible to simplify the control and reduce the storage area.

Means C-20. The variable display means is configured to be able to execute a specific effect in which the completed object customized by the player is displayed in a specific manner,
There are a plurality of types of the specific effects, and the winning expectation degree for the occurrence of the special gaming state varies depending on the combination of the types of the specific effects and the completed object displayed during the specific effects. Configured,
When the specific effect is performed, the type of the specific effect is determined based on the customization pattern of the completed vehicle displayed in the specific effect and the winning expectation for occurrence of the special gaming state. The gaming machine according to any one of means C-1 and C-19.

  According to the means C-20, the player information is stored in the player specifying information storing means and the mobile linked game is performed, so that the continuous display object customized by the player is used as the specified object for the specific effect (appearance) ). For this reason, it is possible to improve performance. In the specific effect, the type of the specific effect is selected according to the completed object selected by the player and the winning expectation. For this reason, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the combination of the completed object and the specific effect type is far from the winning expectation.

Means C-21. A condition establishment detection means for detecting that a predetermined condition is established,
The main control means includes
A random number generating means used to determine whether or not to generate the special gaming state;
As a value to be won in the lottery, winning value storage means for storing a predetermined value among the values that can be generated by the success / failure random number generating means;
A holding storage area having a plurality of holding areas capable of storing change information used for determining the contents of the variable display in the variable display means,
A discriminant value extraction process for extracting the value of the random number generation means based on the detection of the condition establishment detection means;
A discriminant value storing process for storing the value of the success / failure random number generation means extracted in the discriminant value extracting process in any of the reserved areas of the reserved storage area;
A first success / failure determination process for determining whether or not the value of the success / failure random number generation means extracted in the determination value extraction process matches a value stored in the winning value storage means;
A result storage process for storing a result of the first determination result;
(Based on the result of the first win / no-go determination process, a specific effect determination process for determining whether or not to execute a continuous effect in a plurality of variable displays)
Prior to the execution of the fluctuation display in the variable display means, whether or not the value of the success / failure random number generation means as the fluctuation information corresponding to the fluctuation display matches the value stored in the winning value storage means. A second winning / failing determination process for determining whether or not to generate a special gaming state based on the information;
Based on the result of the second success / failure determination process, the variable display setting process for setting the variable display can be executed,
A customization selection means capable of selecting the customization item and the customization pattern when the first success / failure determination process is performed;
The customization reflecting means for reflecting the contents of customization selected by the customization selecting means on the unfinished object;
Selection customization display means capable of displaying the contents of customization selected by the customization selection means,
The selection customization display means is configured to determine the first win / no-go determination process corresponding to the fluctuation information newly stored in the empty holding area in a state where the fluctuation information is stored in the holding area of the holding storage area. In the stage prior to the start of the fluctuation display corresponding to the fluctuation information newly held in the holding area, the suggestion information indicating the content of the customization selected by the customization selection means when Any one of means C-1 to C-20, characterized in that it can be displayed in a fashion that is associated with a variable display corresponding to the variable information newly held in the reserved area. Gaming machine.

  According to the means C-21, the reserved storage area has a plurality of reserved areas, and it is possible to store the values of the success / failure random number generating means related to the setting of the variable display for a plurality of times. Will be. In addition, this means is configured such that when the value of the random number generation means is stored in the holding storage area, whether the lottery is true or not can be grasped and the customization item and the customization pattern can be selected by the customization selection means. For this reason, at the stage where the variable display is suspended, it is possible to give an opportunity for customization and to tell the player the contents of customization. Therefore, for example, when the variable display is newly held when the variable display is already held, the stage before the newly held variable display is executed, that is, rather than the variable display being held. It is possible to teach the contents of customization that is given based on the fact that the variable display is newly held when the previously held variable display is performed. In this case, the player can respond to the contents of the customization that has been taught (attitude, operation, etc.) with a margin. For this reason, for example, when a predetermined operation is requested from the player, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the operation is not in time due to the short input period. In addition, with this configuration, it is not necessary to forcibly lengthen the fluctuation time in order to secure an extra input period for the operation. Can be suppressed.

  The selection customization display means may be constituted by variable display means, or may be constituted by predetermined display means provided in addition. Corresponding to the means B-2, “the mode of the suggestion information displayed on the selected customization display means is the incomplete object corresponding to the customization item to which the customization pattern indicated by the suggestion information belongs. It may be related to the masking pattern applied to (the background of the suggestion information is the same pattern). For example, the customization items are a to d, a is blue, b is red, c is green, and d is yellow, and the masking of an incomplete object is the color associated with the corresponding customization item. And at least a part of the suggestion information (for example, the shape of the customization item displayed on the front side of the background) may be configured with a color associated with the corresponding customization item. Good.

  Further, in correspondence with the C-14, “a holding pattern for storing the customization pattern selected by the customization selecting means in correspondence with the variation information stored in the holding area of the holding storage area” Storage means, and the customization selection means refers to the customization progress storage means and the hold pattern storage means when selecting a customization pattern, and the customization progress storage means and the hold pattern storage means It may be possible to select a customized pattern different from the stored contents. That is, according to this means C-21, the right to customize is also suspended along with the variation information. Therefore, when the customization pattern is selected by looking only at the pattern of the incomplete object, the customization pattern that is suspended is retained. Therefore, in order to configure so that the same customization pattern is not selected continuously, it is necessary to refer to both the customization progress storage means and the hold pattern storage means.

Means C-22. The display control means is configured so that the suggestion information displayed by the selection customization display means can be changed in mode from when the corresponding variation information is stored in the holding area until it is executed as variation display. And
It has operating means that can be operated by the player,
The gaming machine according to means C-21, wherein the display control means determines whether or not to change the mode of the suggestion information based on input information obtained by operating the operating means.

  According to the means C-22, after the suggestion information displayed by the selection customization display means is once displayed in a predetermined form, the form may change in a stage before the corresponding variable display is executed. For this reason, it is possible to diversify the effects such as stepping up the expectation of occurrence of the special gaming state suggested by the change in the mode of the suggestion information.

  Moreover, there is a possibility that the suggestion information may change its mode in the middle of being displayed by the selection customization display means until the change display of the corresponding change information is executed. For this reason, for a player who desires the appearance of customization of the content indicated by the suggestion information before the mode change, the suggestion information may change the mode, which may cause a decrease in interest. In this regard, the means C-22 is configured to be able to determine whether or not to change the mode of the suggestion information by an operation input by the player. For this reason, the said malfunction can be avoided and customization can be advanced, suppressing generation | occurrence | production of stress.

  In addition, you may comprise so that the aspect of suggestion information may be determined by the distribution based on the result of the said 1st winning / failing determination process. That is, by visually recognizing the mode of the suggestion information, it is possible to enjoy the estimation of how much expectation can be expected for the occurrence of the special gaming state in the change display of each time. In addition, the type of suggestion information and the presence / absence of change in the form are determined when the change information is suspended, and if there is a change in form, the change in form is performed when the corresponding change information comes at a predetermined timing. (It may be configured to derive a pattern different from the determined pattern and change to the determined pattern later), or based on the variation information that is reserved later, You may comprise so that the aspect of the suggestion information corresponding to the fluctuation information already suspended may be changed.

Means C-23. A customization opportunity giving means for determining whether or not to give a customization opportunity to the incomplete object;
The customization opportunity giving means determines whether or not to give the customization opportunity according to the result of the first success / failure determination process,
The customization selection unit is configured to determine the type of customization according to a result of the first success / failure determination process,
Based on the latest result of the first success / failure determination process performed in a state where variation information including the result of the first success / failure determination process is stored in the hold area of the hold storage area, the customization opportunity granting unit When it is determined that the customization opportunity is to be given, in the variation information corresponding to the variation information stored in the reserved area of the reserved storage area at the stage where the latest first determination processing is performed, The gaming machine according to means C-22, characterized in that the customization determined by the customization selecting means can be executed on the basis of the result of the 1-win determination process.

  According to the means C-23, when the execution of customization is determined for the reserved area of the reserved storage area in response to the fluctuation information held later, the fluctuation display corresponding to the fluctuation information already held. In (afterwards). In this case, it is possible to diversify the effects related to customization (for example, it is possible to provide a continuous advance notice such as a step-up effect related to customization over a plurality of continuous variable displays), and to improve convenience. More specifically, in terms of convenience, the execution of customization and the type of customization are determined based on the result of the first winning / failing determination process, in other words, according to the expected degree of occurrence of the special gaming state. It will be. Therefore, in a variable display that teaches the occurrence of a special gaming state, if an effect related to customization is also derived, the time taken for the effect for teaching whether or not the special gaming state occurs is shortened, or the fluctuation time There is a concern that the production balance becomes worse due to the excessively long period.

  In this respect, by executing the customization that was executed based on the occurrence of the special gaming state in the variation display performed before the variation display that teaches the occurrence of the special gaming state, It is possible to derive an effect for teaching the occurrence of the special gaming state and customization with a relatively large margin. Further, when a predetermined customization is derived by being associated with the degree of expectation for occurrence of the special gaming state and the type of customization, the special gaming state is generated in the subsequent variable display that is held. So, the expectation can be raised. In particular, in the state where the display time (variation time) of the variation display of the identification information is set to be relatively short (time shortening state), the above-described effect can be more remarkably achieved by applying the above configuration. .

Means C-24. The unfinished object includes a base object and a customization object that is incidentally displayed on the base object as a result of the customization.
The masking is configured to correspond to a portion of the base object of the sub-object that has not yet been customized with the customization object,
There are a plurality of types of base objects, and the customization object is also changed according to the change of the base object,
When the change of the base object is determined, the change of the base object is waited until the change display corresponding to the suggestion information that is already displayed is digested. The gaming machine according to any one of means C-21 to C-23, wherein the one corresponding to the type of the base object after the change is derived.

  According to the means C-24, in the configuration in which the customization pattern to be customized (customized object) is displayed in advance, the change of the base object is performed immediately before the customization pattern that has been expected is displayed. It is possible to avoid a situation in which the customization object is also changed accordingly.

  In addition, according to this means, when the customized object corresponding to the base object after the change is displayed as the suggestion information before the base object is changed, the base object is changed in advance. I can grasp it. Utilizing this phenomenon, if the change in the base object is associated with the expected expectation, or if the base object is to be changed but it is not changed, the performance will be improved. Can be achieved.

Means C-25. Proximity detection means capable of detecting the proximity or contact of an object to a plurality of locations of the variable display means as different information (displays various information related to the selection of the customization function)
The gaming machine according to any one of means C-1 to C-24, wherein selection information by the player regarding the customization can be input based on detection information of the proximity detection means.

  According to the means C-25, for example, when selecting any one of a plurality of completed objects, the selection operation is performed by touching any of the plurality of completed objects displayed on the variable display means. The operation can be made very easy to understand. Therefore, it is possible to avoid such a situation that the operation is overwhelmed by such an operation, or that the game tempo is deteriorated by setting a relatively long time for the operation.

  D. One type of gaming machine is a pachinko machine. In the pachinko machine, when the game ball launched by the launching means enters the starting entrance means provided on the game board, a lottery is performed as to whether or not a hit state is generated, and the variable display means Fluctuation display for teaching the result is performed (see, for example, JP-A-2006-271480).

  In addition, for example, in order to diversify the production and suppress the monotonous feeling at the time of the game, regarding the continuous display object such as a character that can be continuously displayed in the variable display means on the variable display means, the game progresses. Depending on the situation, there are some that can change the costume.

  By the way, since the change contents of the continuous display object are determined on the gaming machine side, the continuous display object does not become the player's preference, or conversely, it is far away from the player's preference. I am worried about it.

  Also, in recent years, it is not possible to simply play a gaming machine by exchanging data between a gaming machine and a server operated by a gaming machine manufacturer through a portable communication terminal carried by the player. A game system (mobile linked game) that can provide enjoyment is known, and by performing a mobile linked game, a player performs settings such as selecting (customizing) changes to the continuous display object Some are configured to do this.

  However, such settings are configured to be executable on the web page of the server, and when changing such settings, it is necessary to stop the game and access the server.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can fully enjoy the customization function.

Means D-1. A main control means for performing a lottery on whether or not to generate a special gaming state advantageous to the player based on a predetermined opportunity, and generating the special gaming state based on a result of the lottery;
Variable display means capable of variably displaying the identification information;
In a gaming machine comprising: variable display means for variably displaying the identification information, and after a predetermined time, display control means for stopping and displaying the identification information based on the lottery result.
The display control means is configured to be capable of deriving a continuous display object that can be continuously displayed in the variable display of the variable display means a plurality of times.
Regarding the continuous display object,
Multiple customization items that can be customized are set.
A plurality of patterns are prepared for the customization pattern of each customization item,
The continuous display object includes a completed object in which all of the plurality of customization items are customized, and an incomplete object in which the customization items that have not yet been customized exist up to the completed object,
Operation means that can be operated by the player;
Customization opportunity giving means for determining whether or not to give a customization opportunity for the unfinished object;
Customization selection means for selecting the customization item and the customization pattern;
Customization reflecting means for reflecting the customization pattern selected by the customization selecting means on the unfinished object,
When it is determined that the customization opportunity is given to the unfinished object by the customization opportunity giving means, the part corresponding to the customization item selected by the customization selection means among the incomplete objects The configuration reflects the customization pattern selected by the customization selection means,
The customization reflecting unit is configured to be able to determine whether or not to reflect the customization pattern of the customization item selected by the customization selecting unit on the unfinished object based on input information by an operation to the operation unit. A gaming machine characterized by

  According to the means D-1, although the customization item and the customization pattern are selected on the gaming machine side, the continuation display object (unfinished object) is not unilaterally customized on the gaming machine side. Whether or not to reflect the incomplete object can be determined by the player. It is possible to reflect the personal preference of the player in the customization of the continuous display object (do not reflect the customization pattern that you do not like). Therefore, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of frustration such as customization not being exactly the player's intention while suppressing the one-pattern customization function. As a result, while diversifying the customization function, the player can be more attached to the effect using the continuous display object, and the game motivation can be improved.

  Further, the customization is configured to be performed sequentially in the game. For this reason, for example, in order to reflect customization to an incomplete object (update the continuous display object), the convenience related to customization is compared to a configuration in which the game is temporarily ended and access to the server is required. It is possible to improve the ease and enjoy the customization function more easily (make it easier to install).

  In addition, as "input information by operation to the operation means", information input in advance to the gaming machine such as a password including information such as a player's individual game history and various settings, and customization opportunities were obtained. In this case, information on whether or not to execute customization is included. In addition, when an opportunity for customization is given, an announcement is made to the player asking whether or not to reflect the selected customization pattern, and the input information by operating the operation means It may be configured to confirm the player's intention based on the player's intention, or the player inputs the player's personal information to the gaming machine at the start of the game, and the customization reflecting means is discarded according to the personal information. You may comprise so that selection may be performed.

Means D-2. The customization selection means includes
Pattern random number generating means used for pattern lottery to determine the customized pattern;
Corresponding pattern storage means for storing a correspondence relationship between a value that can be generated by the pattern random number generating means and the customized pattern;
A plurality of the corresponding pattern storage means are provided,
The means D-1 is characterized in that the customization selection means is configured to be able to determine the corresponding pattern storage means to be referred to when selecting a customization pattern based on input information obtained by operating the operation means. Game machines.

  According to the means D-2, the player's personal game history, various settings (preferences), etc. can be reflected in the customization of the continuous display object (selection of the customization pattern by the customization selection means). Therefore, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of frustration such as customization not being exactly the player's intention while suppressing the one-pattern customization function. As a result, while diversifying the customization function, the player can be more attached to the effect using the continuous display object, and the game motivation can be improved.

  Means D-3. A means D-1 or means D-2 comprising an operable state teaching means for teaching that a customized operation input state in which an operation input related to selection of a customization function can be performed by the operation means is provided. Game machines.

  According to the means D-3, the player can be more surely recognized that the player is in the customization operation input state.

Means D-4. In the configuration in which the customization operation input state is generated while the variation display of the identification information is performed in the variable display means,
When the transition condition to the customization operation input state is satisfied, it is determined whether or not a specific effect that can be derived while the variation display of the identification information is being performed in the variable display means,
When it is determined that the specific performance is not being performed, the state is shifted to the customization operation input state, and teaching by the operable state teaching unit is performed,
When it is determined that the specific performance is being performed, the transition to the customization operation input state is restricted, or the transition to the customization operation input state is not performed, but teaching by the operable state teaching unit is not performed. A gaming machine as described in means D-3.

  According to the means D-4, it is possible to prevent a specific effect from being obstructed by the teaching by the operable state teaching means. Therefore, when the specific effect indicates, for example, that the degree of expectation of occurrence of the special gaming state is high, the teaching by the operable state teaching means is performed simultaneously with the specific effect. It is possible to prevent a situation in which a decrease in the number of people is caused. In particular, as will be described in detail later, the variable display is stored on hold so that the setting operation related to the customization performed in response to the variable display of the stored state can be performed (at the stage where the display is held). When configured, since the possibility that the customization operation input state and the derivation period of the specific effect overlap with each other increases, such an effect is more remarkably exhibited. In the case of a configuration in which an effect is made using an operation of the operation means in a specific effect, it is desirable to restrict the transition to the customized operation input state when it is determined that the specific effect is being performed.

Means D-5. A condition establishment detection means for detecting that a predetermined condition is established,
The main control means includes
A random number generating means used to determine whether or not to generate the special gaming state;
As a value to be won in the lottery, winning value storage means for storing a predetermined value among the values that can be generated by the success / failure random number generating means;
A holding storage area having a plurality of holding areas capable of storing change information used for determining the contents of the variable display in the variable display means,
A discriminant value extraction process for extracting the value of the random number generation means based on the detection of the condition establishment detection means;
A discriminant value storing process for storing the value of the success / failure random number generation means extracted in the discriminant value extracting process in any of the reserved areas of the reserved storage area;
A first success / failure determination process for determining whether or not the value of the success / failure random number generation means extracted in the determination value extraction process matches a value stored in the winning value storage means;
A result storage process for storing a result of the first determination result;
(Based on the result of the first win / no-go determination process, a specific effect determination process for determining whether or not to execute a continuous effect in a plurality of variable displays)
Prior to the execution of the fluctuation display in the variable display means, whether or not the value of the success / failure random number generation means as the fluctuation information corresponding to the fluctuation display matches the value stored in the winning value storage means. A second winning / failing determination process for determining whether or not to generate a special gaming state based on the information;
Based on the result of the second success / failure determination process, the variable display setting process for setting the variable display can be executed,
A selection customization display means capable of displaying the contents of the customization selected by the customization selection means when the first success / failure determination process is performed;
The selection customization display means is configured to determine the first win / no-go determination process corresponding to the fluctuation information newly stored in the empty holding area in a state where the fluctuation information is stored in the holding area of the holding storage area. In the stage prior to the start of the fluctuation display corresponding to the fluctuation information newly held in the holding area, the suggestion information indicating the content of the customization selected by the customization selection means when Any one of means D-1 to D-4, characterized in that it is configured to be displayed in a fashion that is associated with a variable display corresponding to the variable information newly held in the reserved area. Gaming machine.

  According to the means D-5, the reserved storage area has a plurality of reserved areas, and the values of the success / failure random number generating means relating to the setting of the variable display can be stored a plurality of times. Will be. In addition, this means is configured such that when the value of the random number generation means is stored in the holding storage area, whether the lottery is true or not can be grasped and the customization item and the customization pattern can be selected by the customization selection means. For this reason, at the stage where the variable display is suspended, it is possible to give an opportunity for customization and to tell the player the contents of customization. Therefore, for example, when the variable display is newly held when the variable display is already held, the stage before the newly held variable display is executed, that is, rather than the variable display being held. It is possible to teach the contents of customization that is given based on the fact that the variable display is newly held when the previously held variable display is performed. In this case, the player can respond to the contents of the customization that has been taught (attitude, operation, etc.) with a margin.

  In other words, for example, “A change display capable of performing the desired customization has been put on hold, and when a customization opportunity corresponding to such a change display comes, an operation for reflecting such customization on an incomplete object is performed. "Oh," or "Although the A pattern has been customized for the first customization item of the incomplete object, the first and third customization items are represented by B corresponding to the two suspended display. Since it has been found that the pattern can be customized, it is possible to make an operation schedule by sufficiently thinking such as “stop the A pattern system and align it with the B pattern system”. For this reason, for example, when a predetermined operation is requested from the player, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the operation is not in time due to the short input period. In addition, with this configuration, it is not necessary to forcibly lengthen the fluctuation time in order to secure an extra input period for the operation. Can be suppressed. The selection customization display means may be constituted by variable display means, or may be constituted by predetermined display means provided in addition.

Means D-6. The display control unit is configured to be capable of changing the mode of the suggestion information displayed by the selection customization display unit from when the corresponding variation information is stored in the holding area until it is executed as a variation display. ,
The gaming machine according to means D-5, wherein the display control means determines whether or not to change the mode of the suggestion information based on input information obtained by operating the operation means.

  According to the means D-6, after the suggestion information displayed by the selection customization display means is once displayed in a predetermined form, the form may change in a stage before the corresponding variable display is executed. For this reason, it is possible to diversify the effects such as stepping up the expectation of occurrence of the special gaming state suggested by the change in the mode of the suggestion information.

  Moreover, there is a possibility that the suggestion information may change its mode in the middle of being displayed by the selection customization display means until the change display of the corresponding change information is executed. For this reason, for a player who desires the appearance of customization of the content indicated by the suggestion information before the mode change, the suggestion information may change the mode, which may cause a decrease in interest. In this respect, this means is configured to be able to determine whether or not to change the mode of the suggestion information by an operation input by the player. For this reason, the said malfunction can be avoided and customization can be advanced, suppressing generation | occurrence | production of stress.

  In addition, you may comprise so that the aspect of suggestion information may be determined by the distribution based on the result of the said 1st winning / failing determination process. That is, by visually recognizing the mode of the suggestion information, it is possible to enjoy the estimation of how much expectation can be expected for the occurrence of the special gaming state in the change display of each time. In addition, the type of suggestion information and the presence / absence of change in the form are determined when the change information is suspended, and if there is a change in form, the change in form is performed when the corresponding change information comes at a predetermined timing. (It may be configured to derive a pattern different from the determined pattern and change to the determined pattern later), or based on the variation information that is reserved later, You may comprise so that the aspect of the suggestion information corresponding to the fluctuation information already suspended may be changed.

Means D-7. The customization opportunity giving means determines whether or not to give the customization opportunity according to the result of the first success / failure determination process,
The customization selection unit is configured to determine the type of customization according to a result of the first success / failure determination process,
Based on the latest result of the first success / failure determination process performed in a state where variation information including the result of the first success / failure determination process is stored in the hold area of the hold storage area, the customization opportunity granting unit When it is determined that the customization opportunity is to be given, in the variation information corresponding to the variation information stored in the reserved area of the reserved storage area at the stage where the latest first determination processing is performed, The gaming machine according to means D-6, characterized in that the customization determined by the customization selecting means can be executed based on the result of the 1-win determination process.

  According to the means D-7, when the execution of customization is determined for the reserved area in the reserved storage area in response to the subsequently changed information, the change display corresponding to the already held change information is displayed. In (afterwards). In this case, it is possible to diversify the effects related to customization (for example, it is possible to provide a continuous advance notice such as a step-up effect related to customization over a plurality of continuous variable displays), and to improve convenience. More specifically, in terms of convenience, the execution of customization and the type of customization are determined based on the result of the first winning / failing determination process, in other words, according to the expected degree of occurrence of the special gaming state. It will be. Therefore, in a variable display that teaches the occurrence of a special gaming state, if an effect related to customization is also derived, the time taken for the effect for teaching whether or not the special gaming state occurs is shortened, or the fluctuation time There is a concern that the production balance becomes worse due to the excessively long period.

  In this respect, by executing the customization that was executed based on the occurrence of the special gaming state in the variation display performed before the variation display that teaches the occurrence of the special gaming state, It is possible to derive an effect for teaching the occurrence of the special gaming state and customization with a relatively large margin. Further, when a predetermined customization is derived by being associated with the degree of expectation for occurrence of the special gaming state and the type of customization, the special gaming state is generated in the subsequent variable display that is held. So, the expectation can be raised. In particular, in the state where the display time (variation time) of the variation display of the identification information is set to be relatively short (time shortening state), the above-described effect can be more remarkably achieved by applying the above configuration. .

Means D-8. Proximity detection means capable of detecting the proximity or contact of an object to a plurality of locations of the variable display means on which various information relating to the selection of the customization function is displayed,
The gaming machine according to any one of means D-1 to D-7, wherein selection information by a player regarding the customization can be input based on detection information of the proximity detection means.

  According to the means D-8, for example, when one of a plurality of completed objects is selected, the selection operation is performed by touching one of the plurality of completed objects displayed on the variable display means. The operation can be made very easy to understand. Therefore, it is possible to avoid such a situation that the operation is overwhelmed by such an operation, or that the game tempo is deteriorated by setting a relatively long time for the operation.

  Means D-9. The unfinished object is configured so that a part of the completed object is masked in a manner different from the already customized portion, corresponding to the customization item that has not yet been customized. A gaming machine according to any one of means D-1 to D-8.

  According to the means D-9, by confirming the aspect of the unfinished object that is a form of the continuous display object in which there are customization items that are not yet customized among the plurality of customization items, the part that has not yet been customized (customization Item) exists (there is room for further customization) at a glance. Therefore, it is possible to easily and surely understand how far the continuous display object can be customized, and as a result, the user can enjoy the customization function relatively smoothly by seeing the entire customization function. As a result, the customization function can be fully exhibited, and the production using the continuous display object can be fully enjoyed. Furthermore, an increase in interest in the customization function can improve game motivation.

  In addition, an unfinished object that has undergone masking can effectively and clearly recognize that there is a part that has not yet been customized, so there is no need to provide a separate explanation of the customization function. It will be over. Therefore, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the flow of performance deteriorates due to the explanation of the customization function (especially, it takes unnecessary time for a player who has already been grasped), and the game can proceed relatively smoothly. Can do.

  Means D-10. The game according to means D-9, wherein the mask applied to the unfinished object corresponding to each customization item is configured to have a pattern different from at least the adjacent masking. Machine.

  According to the means D-10, when there is a possibility that masking corresponding to a plurality of customization items is connected (continuous) or close, the masking corresponds to one customization item. It is possible to more reliably avoid a situation where it is difficult to determine whether or not it corresponds to a plurality of customization items. Therefore, masking areas corresponding to a plurality of customization items can be set relatively freely, and by checking the mode of the incomplete object, there are still a number of uncustomized parts (customization items). Can be understood at a glance. Therefore, more information about the customization function can be derived more effectively, so that the player can make a decision about the customization function quickly and surely, and he is fully proficient in the customization process as the game progresses can do.

  Note that “different patterns” of masking includes colors, patterns, or combinations thereof. Also, even if the masking area is separated or a line is drawn at the boundary of the masking area, it is easier and faster to customize items that have not yet been customized by changing the masking pattern of the adjacent masking area. You can distinguish numbers and types.

  In correspondence with the means D-5, “the masking pattern of the unfinished object is associated with the corresponding customization item, and the suggestion information includes the customization item and a part object indicating the customization pattern; The background pattern of the suggestion information may be associated with a masking pattern of the part of the unfinished object corresponding to the part object of the suggestion information ”. Further, “the unfinished object is configured in such a manner that a boundary of a part corresponding to each customization item can be identified, and when an opportunity to customize the unfinished object is given, The part corresponding to the customization item of customization may be changed to a mode different from other parts. When these configurations are adopted, when the player determines whether or not the customization is reflected, it can be relatively smoothly confirmed which part corresponds to the customization at this time.

Means D-11. Customization progress storage means for storing information relating to customization of the incomplete object displayed on the variable display means;
The customization selection means refers to the customization progress storage means when selecting the customization item and the customization pattern (avoids customization that overlaps with the storage contents of the customization progress storage means). A gaming machine according to D-9 or D-10.

  According to the means D-11, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the player feels unpleasant because the customization of the same content is selected one after another, and the customization function can be more fully enjoyed.

Means D-12. The continuous display object includes a main object and a sub-object (which is a simplified form of the main object),
The main object and the sub-object are
A base object capable of identifying an overall picture of the completed object;
It is set corresponding to each of the customization items, and is configured by a customization object displayed on a part corresponding to the customization item among the base objects by performing the customization,
When reflecting the customization object in the continuous display object, it is reflected in both the main object and the sub-object,
The masking is a configuration applied only to the incomplete object (the base object) of the sub-object,
The main object is configured to be changeable based on an operation to the operation means,
The game according to any one of means D-9 to D-11, wherein a selection input operation method for reflecting the customization object on the continuous display object is different from an input operation method for changing the mode of the main object. Machine.

  According to the means D-12, since the main object is not masked, for example, even if the main object in a state where all the customization items are not yet customized (stage of the incomplete object) is displayed, the masking is not noticed. Will not be taken. Therefore, it is possible to avoid a situation such as a decrease in designability and a decrease in interest resulting from masking the unfinished main object, and the degree of customization progresses. However, it can be fully enjoyed in the form of the main object.

  On the other hand, masking is applied to the sub-object that is customized in the same manner as the main object, corresponding to the part that is not customized. For this reason, even if the main object is not masked, if the sub-object is visually recognized, the progress of customization of the main object can be reliably grasped.

  In addition, since the main object is configured to be able to change the mode based on the operation of the operation means, it is possible to suppress a monotonous feeling during the game. Furthermore, when the player is operating the operation means to change the mode of the main object, if the player shifts to a state where selection input related to customization is performed, the selection input different from the intention may be made unintentionally. Is concerned. In this regard, such a problem can be avoided by differentiating the operation method relating to the change in the form of the main object and the operation method relating to the selection input of customization.

  Note that “the base object of the sub-object has a silhouette shape, and the base object of the main object is drawn to the inner details”. Furthermore, as the “sub-object base object”, since there are a plurality of customization patterns, it can be considered as “a simplified form of the completed object”. For example, the drawing line and coloring are simplified, or Examples include deformed ones, reduced ones, and combinations thereof. Further, a character such as a person, an animal, or an anthropomorphic object may be adopted as the “base object”, and a character costume, a tool used by the character, a vehicle, a background, or the like may be adopted as the “customized object”. . Furthermore, as a “base object”, a vehicle used by a predetermined character, a vehicle such as an airplane, a base of an object (such as a cake or a weapon) produced by the character, a background such as a living space or a zoo, is adopted. As such, constituent parts such as vehicles and weapons, decorations, and various objects installed in the background may be employed.

  In addition, a configuration may be adopted in which both the main object and the sub-object are displayed at the same time, and the progress of the customization is confirmed by the sub-object while mainly enjoying the aspect of the main object. It is configured so that only one of the objects is displayed, and the customization is reflected when the main object is displayed while the customization proceeds while only the sub-object is displayed. You may employ | adopt the structure of enjoying the production using a main object.

Means D-13. The customization selection means includes
Pattern random number generating means used for pattern lottery to determine the customized pattern;
A configuration comprising a correspondence pattern storage means for storing a correspondence relationship between a value that can be generated by the pattern random number generation means and the customization pattern;
The correspondence pattern storage means includes a first pattern storage means in which a specific customization pattern is not selected or difficult to select, and a second pattern storage means in which the specific customization pattern is more easily selected than the first pattern storage means. And
When selecting a customization pattern by the customization selection means,
A first pattern selection state in which the first pattern storage means is referred to and the second pattern storage means is not referred to;
Means D comprising customized pattern selection state switching means for changing the state to a second pattern selection state that is referred to by the second pattern storage means and that is not referred to by the first pattern storage means. A gaming machine according to any one of -1 to D-12.

  According to the means D-13, a game value is provided by providing a state in which a specific customization pattern is easily given (for example, a rare pattern high-accuracy state in which a rare customization pattern is given as a specific customization pattern with a high probability). You can be interested in the game in a different dimension from the factors related to the increase or decrease of the game, and can also increase the chance of production. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a monotonous feeling in the game and improve the game motivation. The condition for changing the state between the first pattern selection state and the second pattern selection state can be appropriately set for each model.

  Incidentally, in correspondence with the means D-11, “the customization selecting means selects the customization item and the customization pattern, and then refers to the customization progress storage means, and the content of the customization selected this time is If it is determined that the customization overlaps with the storage content of the customization progress storage means, the customization item may be reselected. That is, in the means D-13, there is a state in which a specific customization pattern is likely to be given, and if the specific customization pattern is a rare customization pattern, the customization contents selected in the rare pattern high-accuracy state overlap. In other words, if a specific customization pattern is changed to another customization pattern (a general customization pattern that is difficult to select or not selected in the rare pattern high-accuracy state), why is the general customization pattern in the rare pattern high-accuracy state? There is a concern that it will cause a decline in interest. On the other hand, in this example, since a duplication is avoided by changing a customization item without changing a customization pattern, this situation can be avoided.

Means D-14. In a gaming machine capable of executing a mobile linked game in which information is exchanged with a server via a portable communication terminal carried by a player,
Operation means that can be operated by the player;
Player specific information storage means for storing player information input by the player operating the operation means when starting a mobile linked game;
Game information storage means capable of accumulating and storing game information which is information relating to a lottery performed in the game;
Information output means capable of outputting game information stored and stored in the game information storage means in a manner that can be acquired or identified by a mobile communication terminal when the mobile linked game is terminated,
The player information is stored in the player identification information storage means so that processing corresponding to the player information is performed, and game information related to the current game is stored and stored in the game information storage means. There,
When the game information stored and stored in the game information storage means is output by the information output means, information on the continuous display object is also output. A gaming machine according to any one of the above.

  According to the means D-14, the information related to the continuous display object of the current game can be handed over to the next game (mobile linked game). As a result, if the continuation display object is not completed in one game with respect to the continuation display object, it is impossible for the game to be performed this time, such as a configuration in which the presentation using the completed continuation display object can only be seen. It is possible to increase the enjoyment of the next game while suppressing such a situation. Therefore, it is possible to improve convenience, and to make the display more diverse and profound with respect to effects using the continuous display object. In addition, it is possible to accumulate and enjoy the tricks and customizations over many days without having to overdo it with one game.

  Note that only a completed object that has been completed may be taken over, or both a completed object and an incomplete object may be taken over. In addition, a function for customizing the continuous display object (or a function for selecting customization, etc.) may be effective only when a mobile linked game is being executed. In this case, the willingness to participate in mobile-linked games can be increased.

Means D-15. Incomplete customization storage means for storing the contents of customization of each customization item of the incomplete object;
Completed customization storage means for storing the contents of customization of each customization item of the completed object for which customization has been completed;
Completed object storage and storage means for storing and storing the customization contents of the respective customization items of the completed object that has been customized;
When all the customization items of the unfinished object are customized, the customization content of each customization item is configured to be stored in the completed customization storage unit,
When at least the stored contents of the incomplete customization storage means are erased, the customization content of each customization item of the incomplete object is stored in the completed object storage storage means,
The information stored in the completed object storage means is not erased even if the stored contents of the completed customization storage means are erased,
When the information output means outputs game information stored and stored in the game information storage means, information stored in the completed object storage and storage means is also output. 14. The gaming machine according to 14.

  According to the means D-15, even if the completed object which is finally completed (by the first combination) by customizing the unfinished object is erased in the flow of the game, the completed object is completed. What has been done remains in the storage (completed object storage means) and is sent to the server via a portable communication terminal carried by the player. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the feeling of disappearance due to the easy erasure of the completed object completed with the last thought, and it is possible to add the pleasure of collecting collections.

  In addition, when the completed object that is completed in the gaming machine is still accumulated without being erased, for example, the display form of the completed object becomes messy, the display process becomes relatively difficult, or the completed object When selecting what to use from among the production, there is a concern that it will take time and the rhythm of the production will worsen, or it will increase the storage capacity, but by deleting it gradually , Can dispel such concerns. Of course, since the memory of the completion of the completed object remains reliably, it is possible to erase the completed object without hesitation.

  In addition, it is good also as an announcement display explaining the content of this means to a player. For example, “You can check the completed object that you obtained today by accessing the homepage (server) after the (mobile-linked) game ends. Furthermore, in the next mobile-linked game, you can select from the completed objects that you have acquired. “You can select a completed object to be used on a real machine (game machine) and use it for production, etc.”. The announcement display is preferably displayed when the completed object is deleted. In this case, it is possible to clearly recognize how the erased completed object will be handled, and it is possible to avoid a situation in which it is not possible to concentrate on the game due to that concern.

  The stored content of the completed object may be erased when an effect using the completed object is executed, or when an input for erasing is performed by the player's operation.

Means D-16. The variable display means is configured to be able to execute a specific effect in which the completed object customized by the player is displayed in a specific manner,
There are a plurality of types of the specific effects, and the winning expectation degree for the occurrence of the special gaming state varies depending on the combination of the types of the specific effects and the completed object displayed during the specific effects. Configured,
When the specific effect is performed, the type of the specific effect is determined based on the customization pattern of the completed vehicle displayed in the specific effect and the winning expectation for occurrence of the special gaming state. The configuration
Determining whether or not to execute the specific effect when starting the variable display of the identification information;
When determining whether or not to execute the specific effect, if it is determined that an opportunity for customization is given in the variable display, the means D-1 or the execution of the specific effect is avoided. The gaming machine according to any one of D-15.

  According to the means D-16, the player information is stored in the player specific information storage means and the mobile linked game is performed, so that the continuous display object customized by the player is used as the specific object for the specific effect (appearance) ). For this reason, it is possible to improve performance. In the specific effect, the type of the specific effect is selected according to the completed object selected by the player and the winning expectation. For this reason, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the combination of the completed object and the specific effect type is far from the winning expectation.

  In addition, the combination of the type of the specific effect and the pattern of the completed object displayed in the specific effect is configured so that the expected degree of winning for the occurrence of the special gaming state is different. Later, if the pattern of the finished vehicle is changed, there is a concern that the reliability of the winning expectation will be reduced. In this respect, this means can maintain the reliability of the winning expectation by avoiding the situation that the pattern of the finished car is changed after the type of the specific effect is decided, and the customization is reflected to the player It can be made that the expectation is not affected even if it is selected.

Means D-17. The customization selection means includes
Item lottery random number generating means used for item lottery for determining a customization item to be customized from among the plurality of customization items;
Corresponding item storage means for storing a correspondence relationship between a value that can be generated by the item lottery random number generating means and the customization item;
Pattern random number generating means used for pattern lottery to determine the customized pattern;
Corresponding pattern storage means for storing a correspondence relationship between a value that can be generated by the pattern random number generating means and the customized pattern;
When it is determined that the customization opportunity is given by the customization opportunity giving means, the value of the item lottery random number generation means and the value of the pattern random number generation means are based on the operation input by the operation means. Is acquired, and the corresponding item storage means and the corresponding pattern storage means are referred to based on the acquired value of the item lottery random number generation means and the value of the pattern random number generation means. The gaming machine according to any one of means D-1 to D-16, wherein a customization item and the customization pattern are determined.

  According to the means D-17, the contents of customization (customization items and customization pattern) are determined by the player's operation (the lottery is performed), so that the player can be familiar with the customization.

Means D-18. The customization opportunity giving means is
Customized lottery random number generating means used for customization lottery whether or not to perform customization on the unfinished object;
As a value to be won in the customized lottery, a customized winning value storage means for storing a predetermined value among the values that can be generated by the customized lottery random number generating means,
When the predetermined condition is satisfied, the value of the customized lottery random number generating unit is acquired based on the operation input by the operating unit, and the customized winning value is based on the acquired value of the customized lottery random number generating unit. The gaming machine according to any one of means D-1 to D-17, wherein a storage means is referred to determine whether or not to give the customization opportunity.

  According to the means D-18, it is determined whether or not the opportunity for customization is given by the player's operation (the lottery is performed), so that the player can be interested in customization.

  The basic configuration of various gaming machines to which the above means are applied is shown below.

  a. The gaming machine in each of the above means is a ball game machine. As a more detailed mode example, “an operation means (game ball launching handle) operated by a player, a launching means (shot motor, etc.) for playing and launching a game ball based on an operation of the operation means, A ball ball game machine including a game area where a game ball is guided and each ball entry means (general prize opening, variable prize winning device, operation opening, etc.) arranged in the game area.

  b. The gaming machine in each of the above means is a bullet ball gaming machine having a gaming area extending in a substantially vertical direction. As a more detailed mode example, “an operation means (game ball launching handle) operated by a player, a launching means (shot motor, etc.) for playing and launching a game ball based on an operation of the operation means, The game balls are guided and extended along a substantially vertical direction (for example, the game area is constituted by a game board surface), and each ball entry means (general winning mouth, And a ball game machine configured to be able to visually recognize the behavior of a game ball flowing down the game area.

  c. The gaming machine in each of the above means or each of the above ball game machines is a pachinko machine or a gaming machine equivalent to a pachinko machine.

  d. The gaming machine in each of the above means is a revolving type gaming machine such as a slot machine. As a more detailed mode example, “a discriminating information string (a symbol string; specifically a rotating body such as a reel or a belt with a symbol) made up of a plurality of identification information (symbols) is variably displayed (specifically, a reel Variable display means (specifically, a rotating unit such as a reel unit) that stops and displays the identification information sequence after the rotation of the starting information means. The identification information (symbol) starts to fluctuate and the identification information (symbol) fluctuates due to the operation of the stop operation means (specifically, the stop button). A spinning-type gaming machine configured to be given game value on condition that the information is specific identification information.

  e. The gaming machine in each of the above means is a gaming machine of a type in which a slot machine and a pachinko machine are fused (especially a gaming machine of a slot machine specification that uses a gaming ball as a gaming medium). As a more detailed mode example, “a discriminating information string (a symbol string; specifically a rotating body such as a reel or a belt with a symbol) made up of a plurality of identification information (symbols) is variably displayed (specifically, a reel Variable display means (specifically, a rotating unit such as a reel unit) that stops and displays the identification information sequence after the rotation of the starting information means. The identification information (symbol) starts to fluctuate and the identification information (symbol) fluctuates due to the operation of the stop operation means (specifically, the stop button). The game value is provided on the condition that the information is specific identification information, and a ball receiving tray (upper plate or the like) is further provided, taking-in means for taking the game ball from the ball receiving tray, and the ball receiving tray Payout means for paying out game balls Comprising a configuration and gaming machine "and the like as starting condition of the game is satisfied by the game ball is captured by the capturing means.

  DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 10 ... Pachinko machine, 32a ... 1st variable winning device, 32b ... 2nd variable winning device, 33a ... 1st starting winning device, 33b ... 2nd starting winning device, 34 ... Through gate, 42 ... Decoration symbol display device, 43L ... 1st special display device, 43R ... 2nd special display device, 261 ... main control device, 262 ... sub-control device.

Claims (4)

In a gaming system comprising a gaming machine and a server capable of acquiring information related to the player's game via a portable communication terminal carried by the player,
The gaming machine is
Operation means that can be operated by the player;
Player specifying information storage means for storing player information input by the player operating the operating means;
Game information storage means capable of accumulating and storing game information which is information relating to a lottery performed in the game;
Information output means capable of outputting the game information stored and stored in the game information storage means in a manner capable of being acquired by a mobile communication terminal;
The player information is stored in the player identification information storage means, so that processing corresponding to the player information is performed, and game information related to the game is stored and stored in the game information storage means. ,
The mobile communication terminal is
Information acquisition means capable of acquiring the game information output from the information output means;
When the game information is acquired by the information acquisition means, portable side transmission means for transmitting the game information and portable identification information capable of identifying the portable communication terminal to the server;
Mobile-side receiving means for receiving information transmitted from the server;
Portable output means capable of outputting information received by the portable side receiving means,
The server
Server side receiving means for receiving the game information transmitted from the portable side transmitting means and the portable identification information;
Server-side game information storage means for storing and storing the game information in association with the mobile identification information;
An accumulation storage that accumulates and stores the game information in the server-side game information storage means corresponding to the mobile identification information when the game information and the mobile identification information are received by the server-side receiving means. Control means;
Server-side transmission means for transmitting information related to the game information stored in the server-side game information storage means to the mobile communication terminal;
The gaming machine is
A main control means for performing a lottery on whether or not to generate a special gaming state advantageous to the player based on a predetermined opportunity, and generating the special gaming state based on a result of the lottery;
Variable display means capable of variably displaying the identification information;
The variable display means includes display control means for variably displaying the identification information and, after a predetermined time, displaying the identification information based on the lottery result.
The display control means is configured to be capable of deriving a continuous display object that can be continuously displayed in the variable display of the variable display means a plurality of times.
Regarding the continuous display object,
Multiple customization items that can be customized are set.
A plurality of patterns are prepared for the customization pattern of each customization item,
The continuous display object includes a completed object in which all of the plurality of customization items are customized, and an incomplete object in which the customization items that have not yet been customized exist up to the completed object,
The unfinished object is configured so that a part of the completed object is masked in a manner different from a part that has already been customized, corresponding to the customization item that has not yet been customized,
When the game information is output by the information output means, information on the continuous display object is also output. The server
Server-side continuous display object information storage means capable of storing information relating to the continuous display object in association with the mobile identification information;
When information related to the continuous display object is received from the mobile communication terminal storing the game information of the gaming machine, information related to the continuous display object is stored in the server-side continuous display object information storage unit,
When the mobile communication terminal receives a request to transmit information related to the game information stored in the server-side game information storage means to the mobile communication terminal, the server-side continuous display is displayed together with the information related to the game information. 2. The game system according to claim 1, wherein information relating to the continuous display object stored in the object information storage means is also transmitted. The gaming machine is
The variable display means displays the continuous display object on the basis of information related to the continuous display object when information related to the continuous display object is input by an operation of the operation means by a player. Item 3. A gaming system according to item 1 or 2. A main control means for performing a lottery on whether or not to generate a special gaming state advantageous to the player based on a predetermined opportunity, and generating the special gaming state based on a result of the lottery;
Variable display means capable of variably displaying the identification information;
In a gaming machine comprising: variable display means for variably displaying the identification information, and after a predetermined time, display control means for stopping and displaying the identification information based on the lottery result.
The display control means is configured to be capable of deriving a continuous display object that can be continuously displayed in the variable display of the variable display means a plurality of times.
Regarding the continuous display object,
Multiple customization items that can be customized are set.
A plurality of patterns are prepared for the customization pattern of each customization item,
The continuous display object includes a completed object in which all of the plurality of customization items are customized, and an incomplete object in which the customization items that have not yet been customized exist up to the completed object,
The unfinished object is configured so that a part of the completed object is masked in a manner different from the already customized portion, corresponding to the customization item that has not yet been customized. A gaming machine characterized by that.

Images